1 |
342 |
jeremybenn |
This is gdb.info, produced by makeinfo version 4.13 from ./gdb.texinfo.
|
2 |
330 |
jeremybenn |
|
3 |
|
|
INFO-DIR-SECTION Software development
|
4 |
|
|
START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
|
5 |
|
|
* Gdb: (gdb). The GNU debugger.
|
6 |
|
|
END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
|
7 |
|
|
|
8 |
|
|
Copyright (C) 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996,
|
9 |
|
|
1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009,
|
10 |
|
|
2010 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
11 |
|
|
|
12 |
|
|
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
|
13 |
|
|
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
|
14 |
|
|
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the
|
15 |
|
|
Invariant Sections being "Free Software" and "Free Software Needs Free
|
16 |
|
|
Documentation", with the Front-Cover Texts being "A GNU Manual," and
|
17 |
|
|
with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below.
|
18 |
|
|
|
19 |
|
|
(a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: "You are free to copy and modify
|
20 |
|
|
this GNU Manual. Buying copies from GNU Press supports the FSF in
|
21 |
|
|
developing GNU and promoting software freedom."
|
22 |
|
|
|
23 |
|
|
This file documents the GNU debugger GDB.
|
24 |
|
|
|
25 |
|
|
This is the Ninth Edition, of `Debugging with GDB: the GNU
|
26 |
512 |
jeremybenn |
Source-Level Debugger' for GDB (GDB) Version 7.2-or32-1.0rc3.
|
27 |
330 |
jeremybenn |
|
28 |
|
|
Copyright (C) 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996,
|
29 |
|
|
1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009,
|
30 |
|
|
2010 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
31 |
|
|
|
32 |
|
|
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
|
33 |
|
|
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
|
34 |
|
|
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the
|
35 |
|
|
Invariant Sections being "Free Software" and "Free Software Needs Free
|
36 |
|
|
Documentation", with the Front-Cover Texts being "A GNU Manual," and
|
37 |
|
|
with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below.
|
38 |
|
|
|
39 |
|
|
(a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: "You are free to copy and modify
|
40 |
|
|
this GNU Manual. Buying copies from GNU Press supports the FSF in
|
41 |
|
|
developing GNU and promoting software freedom."
|
42 |
|
|
|
43 |
|
|
|
44 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Registers, Next: Floating Point Hardware, Prev: Convenience Vars, Up: Data
|
45 |
|
|
|
46 |
|
|
10.12 Registers
|
47 |
|
|
===============
|
48 |
|
|
|
49 |
|
|
You can refer to machine register contents, in expressions, as variables
|
50 |
|
|
with names starting with `$'. The names of registers are different for
|
51 |
|
|
each machine; use `info registers' to see the names used on your
|
52 |
|
|
machine.
|
53 |
|
|
|
54 |
|
|
`info registers'
|
55 |
|
|
Print the names and values of all registers except floating-point
|
56 |
|
|
and vector registers (in the selected stack frame).
|
57 |
|
|
|
58 |
|
|
`info all-registers'
|
59 |
|
|
Print the names and values of all registers, including
|
60 |
|
|
floating-point and vector registers (in the selected stack frame).
|
61 |
|
|
|
62 |
|
|
`info registers REGNAME ...'
|
63 |
|
|
Print the "relativized" value of each specified register REGNAME.
|
64 |
|
|
As discussed in detail below, register values are normally
|
65 |
|
|
relative to the selected stack frame. REGNAME may be any register
|
66 |
|
|
name valid on the machine you are using, with or without the
|
67 |
|
|
initial `$'.
|
68 |
|
|
|
69 |
|
|
GDB has four "standard" register names that are available (in
|
70 |
|
|
expressions) on most machines--whenever they do not conflict with an
|
71 |
|
|
architecture's canonical mnemonics for registers. The register names
|
72 |
|
|
`$pc' and `$sp' are used for the program counter register and the stack
|
73 |
|
|
pointer. `$fp' is used for a register that contains a pointer to the
|
74 |
|
|
current stack frame, and `$ps' is used for a register that contains the
|
75 |
|
|
processor status. For example, you could print the program counter in
|
76 |
|
|
hex with
|
77 |
|
|
|
78 |
|
|
p/x $pc
|
79 |
|
|
|
80 |
|
|
or print the instruction to be executed next with
|
81 |
|
|
|
82 |
|
|
x/i $pc
|
83 |
|
|
|
84 |
|
|
or add four to the stack pointer(1) with
|
85 |
|
|
|
86 |
|
|
set $sp += 4
|
87 |
|
|
|
88 |
|
|
Whenever possible, these four standard register names are available
|
89 |
|
|
on your machine even though the machine has different canonical
|
90 |
|
|
mnemonics, so long as there is no conflict. The `info registers'
|
91 |
|
|
command shows the canonical names. For example, on the SPARC, `info
|
92 |
|
|
registers' displays the processor status register as `$psr' but you can
|
93 |
|
|
also refer to it as `$ps'; and on x86-based machines `$ps' is an alias
|
94 |
|
|
for the EFLAGS register.
|
95 |
|
|
|
96 |
|
|
GDB always considers the contents of an ordinary register as an
|
97 |
|
|
integer when the register is examined in this way. Some machines have
|
98 |
|
|
special registers which can hold nothing but floating point; these
|
99 |
|
|
registers are considered to have floating point values. There is no way
|
100 |
|
|
to refer to the contents of an ordinary register as floating point value
|
101 |
|
|
(although you can _print_ it as a floating point value with `print/f
|
102 |
|
|
$REGNAME').
|
103 |
|
|
|
104 |
|
|
Some registers have distinct "raw" and "virtual" data formats. This
|
105 |
|
|
means that the data format in which the register contents are saved by
|
106 |
|
|
the operating system is not the same one that your program normally
|
107 |
|
|
sees. For example, the registers of the 68881 floating point
|
108 |
|
|
coprocessor are always saved in "extended" (raw) format, but all C
|
109 |
|
|
programs expect to work with "double" (virtual) format. In such cases,
|
110 |
|
|
GDB normally works with the virtual format only (the format that makes
|
111 |
|
|
sense for your program), but the `info registers' command prints the
|
112 |
|
|
data in both formats.
|
113 |
|
|
|
114 |
|
|
Some machines have special registers whose contents can be
|
115 |
|
|
interpreted in several different ways. For example, modern x86-based
|
116 |
|
|
machines have SSE and MMX registers that can hold several values packed
|
117 |
|
|
together in several different formats. GDB refers to such registers in
|
118 |
|
|
`struct' notation:
|
119 |
|
|
|
120 |
|
|
(gdb) print $xmm1
|
121 |
|
|
$1 = {
|
122 |
|
|
v4_float = {0, 3.43859137e-038, 1.54142831e-044, 1.821688e-044},
|
123 |
|
|
v2_double = {9.92129282474342e-303, 2.7585945287983262e-313},
|
124 |
|
|
v16_int8 = "\000\000\000\000\3706;\001\v\000\000\000\r\000\000",
|
125 |
|
|
v8_int16 = {0, 0, 14072, 315, 11, 0, 13, 0},
|
126 |
|
|
v4_int32 = {0, 20657912, 11, 13},
|
127 |
|
|
v2_int64 = {88725056443645952, 55834574859},
|
128 |
|
|
uint128 = 0x0000000d0000000b013b36f800000000
|
129 |
|
|
}
|
130 |
|
|
|
131 |
|
|
To set values of such registers, you need to tell GDB which view of the
|
132 |
|
|
register you wish to change, as if you were assigning value to a
|
133 |
|
|
`struct' member:
|
134 |
|
|
|
135 |
|
|
(gdb) set $xmm1.uint128 = 0x000000000000000000000000FFFFFFFF
|
136 |
|
|
|
137 |
|
|
Normally, register values are relative to the selected stack frame
|
138 |
|
|
(*note Selecting a Frame: Selection.). This means that you get the
|
139 |
|
|
value that the register would contain if all stack frames farther in
|
140 |
|
|
were exited and their saved registers restored. In order to see the
|
141 |
|
|
true contents of hardware registers, you must select the innermost
|
142 |
|
|
frame (with `frame 0').
|
143 |
|
|
|
144 |
|
|
However, GDB must deduce where registers are saved, from the machine
|
145 |
|
|
code generated by your compiler. If some registers are not saved, or if
|
146 |
|
|
GDB is unable to locate the saved registers, the selected stack frame
|
147 |
|
|
makes no difference.
|
148 |
|
|
|
149 |
|
|
---------- Footnotes ----------
|
150 |
|
|
|
151 |
|
|
(1) This is a way of removing one word from the stack, on machines
|
152 |
|
|
where stacks grow downward in memory (most machines, nowadays). This
|
153 |
|
|
assumes that the innermost stack frame is selected; setting `$sp' is
|
154 |
|
|
not allowed when other stack frames are selected. To pop entire frames
|
155 |
|
|
off the stack, regardless of machine architecture, use `return'; see
|
156 |
342 |
jeremybenn |
*note Returning from a Function: Returning.
|
157 |
330 |
jeremybenn |
|
158 |
|
|
|
159 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Floating Point Hardware, Next: Vector Unit, Prev: Registers, Up: Data
|
160 |
|
|
|
161 |
|
|
10.13 Floating Point Hardware
|
162 |
|
|
=============================
|
163 |
|
|
|
164 |
|
|
Depending on the configuration, GDB may be able to give you more
|
165 |
|
|
information about the status of the floating point hardware.
|
166 |
|
|
|
167 |
|
|
`info float'
|
168 |
|
|
Display hardware-dependent information about the floating point
|
169 |
|
|
unit. The exact contents and layout vary depending on the
|
170 |
|
|
floating point chip. Currently, `info float' is supported on the
|
171 |
|
|
ARM and x86 machines.
|
172 |
|
|
|
173 |
|
|
|
174 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Vector Unit, Next: OS Information, Prev: Floating Point Hardware, Up: Data
|
175 |
|
|
|
176 |
|
|
10.14 Vector Unit
|
177 |
|
|
=================
|
178 |
|
|
|
179 |
|
|
Depending on the configuration, GDB may be able to give you more
|
180 |
|
|
information about the status of the vector unit.
|
181 |
|
|
|
182 |
|
|
`info vector'
|
183 |
|
|
Display information about the vector unit. The exact contents and
|
184 |
|
|
layout vary depending on the hardware.
|
185 |
|
|
|
186 |
|
|
|
187 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: OS Information, Next: Memory Region Attributes, Prev: Vector Unit, Up: Data
|
188 |
|
|
|
189 |
|
|
10.15 Operating System Auxiliary Information
|
190 |
|
|
============================================
|
191 |
|
|
|
192 |
|
|
GDB provides interfaces to useful OS facilities that can help you debug
|
193 |
|
|
your program.
|
194 |
|
|
|
195 |
|
|
When GDB runs on a "Posix system" (such as GNU or Unix machines), it
|
196 |
|
|
interfaces with the inferior via the `ptrace' system call. The
|
197 |
|
|
operating system creates a special sata structure, called `struct
|
198 |
|
|
user', for this interface. You can use the command `info udot' to
|
199 |
|
|
display the contents of this data structure.
|
200 |
|
|
|
201 |
|
|
`info udot'
|
202 |
|
|
Display the contents of the `struct user' maintained by the OS
|
203 |
|
|
kernel for the program being debugged. GDB displays the contents
|
204 |
|
|
of `struct user' as a list of hex numbers, similar to the
|
205 |
|
|
`examine' command.
|
206 |
|
|
|
207 |
|
|
Some operating systems supply an "auxiliary vector" to programs at
|
208 |
|
|
startup. This is akin to the arguments and environment that you
|
209 |
|
|
specify for a program, but contains a system-dependent variety of
|
210 |
|
|
binary values that tell system libraries important details about the
|
211 |
|
|
hardware, operating system, and process. Each value's purpose is
|
212 |
|
|
identified by an integer tag; the meanings are well-known but
|
213 |
|
|
system-specific. Depending on the configuration and operating system
|
214 |
|
|
facilities, GDB may be able to show you this information. For remote
|
215 |
|
|
targets, this functionality may further depend on the remote stub's
|
216 |
342 |
jeremybenn |
support of the `qXfer:auxv:read' packet, see *note qXfer auxiliary
|
217 |
330 |
jeremybenn |
vector read::.
|
218 |
|
|
|
219 |
|
|
`info auxv'
|
220 |
|
|
Display the auxiliary vector of the inferior, which can be either a
|
221 |
|
|
live process or a core dump file. GDB prints each tag value
|
222 |
|
|
numerically, and also shows names and text descriptions for
|
223 |
|
|
recognized tags. Some values in the vector are numbers, some bit
|
224 |
|
|
masks, and some pointers to strings or other data. GDB displays
|
225 |
|
|
each value in the most appropriate form for a recognized tag, and
|
226 |
|
|
in hexadecimal for an unrecognized tag.
|
227 |
|
|
|
228 |
|
|
On some targets, GDB can access operating-system-specific information
|
229 |
|
|
and display it to user, without interpretation. For remote targets,
|
230 |
|
|
this functionality depends on the remote stub's support of the
|
231 |
342 |
jeremybenn |
`qXfer:osdata:read' packet, see *note qXfer osdata read::.
|
232 |
330 |
jeremybenn |
|
233 |
|
|
`info os'
|
234 |
|
|
List the types of OS information available for the target. If the
|
235 |
|
|
target does not return a list of possible types, this command will
|
236 |
|
|
report an error.
|
237 |
|
|
|
238 |
|
|
`info os processes'
|
239 |
|
|
Display the list of processes on the target. For each process,
|
240 |
|
|
GDB prints the process identifier, the name of the user, and the
|
241 |
|
|
command corresponding to the process.
|
242 |
|
|
|
243 |
|
|
|
244 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Memory Region Attributes, Next: Dump/Restore Files, Prev: OS Information, Up: Data
|
245 |
|
|
|
246 |
|
|
10.16 Memory Region Attributes
|
247 |
|
|
==============================
|
248 |
|
|
|
249 |
|
|
"Memory region attributes" allow you to describe special handling
|
250 |
|
|
required by regions of your target's memory. GDB uses attributes to
|
251 |
|
|
determine whether to allow certain types of memory accesses; whether to
|
252 |
|
|
use specific width accesses; and whether to cache target memory. By
|
253 |
|
|
default the description of memory regions is fetched from the target
|
254 |
|
|
(if the current target supports this), but the user can override the
|
255 |
|
|
fetched regions.
|
256 |
|
|
|
257 |
|
|
Defined memory regions can be individually enabled and disabled.
|
258 |
|
|
When a memory region is disabled, GDB uses the default attributes when
|
259 |
|
|
accessing memory in that region. Similarly, if no memory regions have
|
260 |
|
|
been defined, GDB uses the default attributes when accessing all memory.
|
261 |
|
|
|
262 |
|
|
When a memory region is defined, it is given a number to identify it;
|
263 |
|
|
to enable, disable, or remove a memory region, you specify that number.
|
264 |
|
|
|
265 |
|
|
`mem LOWER UPPER ATTRIBUTES...'
|
266 |
|
|
Define a memory region bounded by LOWER and UPPER with attributes
|
267 |
|
|
ATTRIBUTES..., and add it to the list of regions monitored by GDB.
|
268 |
|
|
Note that UPPER == 0 is a special case: it is treated as the
|
269 |
|
|
target's maximum memory address. (0xffff on 16 bit targets,
|
270 |
|
|
0xffffffff on 32 bit targets, etc.)
|
271 |
|
|
|
272 |
|
|
`mem auto'
|
273 |
|
|
Discard any user changes to the memory regions and use
|
274 |
|
|
target-supplied regions, if available, or no regions if the target
|
275 |
|
|
does not support.
|
276 |
|
|
|
277 |
|
|
`delete mem NUMS...'
|
278 |
|
|
Remove memory regions NUMS... from the list of regions monitored
|
279 |
|
|
by GDB.
|
280 |
|
|
|
281 |
|
|
`disable mem NUMS...'
|
282 |
|
|
Disable monitoring of memory regions NUMS.... A disabled memory
|
283 |
|
|
region is not forgotten. It may be enabled again later.
|
284 |
|
|
|
285 |
|
|
`enable mem NUMS...'
|
286 |
|
|
Enable monitoring of memory regions NUMS....
|
287 |
|
|
|
288 |
|
|
`info mem'
|
289 |
|
|
Print a table of all defined memory regions, with the following
|
290 |
|
|
columns for each region:
|
291 |
|
|
|
292 |
|
|
_Memory Region Number_
|
293 |
|
|
|
294 |
|
|
_Enabled or Disabled._
|
295 |
|
|
Enabled memory regions are marked with `y'. Disabled memory
|
296 |
|
|
regions are marked with `n'.
|
297 |
|
|
|
298 |
|
|
_Lo Address_
|
299 |
|
|
The address defining the inclusive lower bound of the memory
|
300 |
|
|
region.
|
301 |
|
|
|
302 |
|
|
_Hi Address_
|
303 |
|
|
The address defining the exclusive upper bound of the memory
|
304 |
|
|
region.
|
305 |
|
|
|
306 |
|
|
_Attributes_
|
307 |
|
|
The list of attributes set for this memory region.
|
308 |
|
|
|
309 |
|
|
10.16.1 Attributes
|
310 |
|
|
------------------
|
311 |
|
|
|
312 |
|
|
10.16.1.1 Memory Access Mode
|
313 |
|
|
............................
|
314 |
|
|
|
315 |
|
|
The access mode attributes set whether GDB may make read or write
|
316 |
|
|
accesses to a memory region.
|
317 |
|
|
|
318 |
|
|
While these attributes prevent GDB from performing invalid memory
|
319 |
|
|
accesses, they do nothing to prevent the target system, I/O DMA, etc.
|
320 |
|
|
from accessing memory.
|
321 |
|
|
|
322 |
|
|
`ro'
|
323 |
|
|
Memory is read only.
|
324 |
|
|
|
325 |
|
|
`wo'
|
326 |
|
|
Memory is write only.
|
327 |
|
|
|
328 |
|
|
`rw'
|
329 |
|
|
Memory is read/write. This is the default.
|
330 |
|
|
|
331 |
|
|
10.16.1.2 Memory Access Size
|
332 |
|
|
............................
|
333 |
|
|
|
334 |
|
|
The access size attribute tells GDB to use specific sized accesses in
|
335 |
|
|
the memory region. Often memory mapped device registers require
|
336 |
|
|
specific sized accesses. If no access size attribute is specified, GDB
|
337 |
|
|
may use accesses of any size.
|
338 |
|
|
|
339 |
|
|
`8'
|
340 |
|
|
Use 8 bit memory accesses.
|
341 |
|
|
|
342 |
|
|
`16'
|
343 |
|
|
Use 16 bit memory accesses.
|
344 |
|
|
|
345 |
|
|
`32'
|
346 |
|
|
Use 32 bit memory accesses.
|
347 |
|
|
|
348 |
|
|
`64'
|
349 |
|
|
Use 64 bit memory accesses.
|
350 |
|
|
|
351 |
|
|
10.16.1.3 Data Cache
|
352 |
|
|
....................
|
353 |
|
|
|
354 |
|
|
The data cache attributes set whether GDB will cache target memory.
|
355 |
|
|
While this generally improves performance by reducing debug protocol
|
356 |
|
|
overhead, it can lead to incorrect results because GDB does not know
|
357 |
|
|
about volatile variables or memory mapped device registers.
|
358 |
|
|
|
359 |
|
|
`cache'
|
360 |
|
|
Enable GDB to cache target memory.
|
361 |
|
|
|
362 |
|
|
`nocache'
|
363 |
|
|
Disable GDB from caching target memory. This is the default.
|
364 |
|
|
|
365 |
|
|
10.16.2 Memory Access Checking
|
366 |
|
|
------------------------------
|
367 |
|
|
|
368 |
|
|
GDB can be instructed to refuse accesses to memory that is not
|
369 |
|
|
explicitly described. This can be useful if accessing such regions has
|
370 |
|
|
undesired effects for a specific target, or to provide better error
|
371 |
|
|
checking. The following commands control this behaviour.
|
372 |
|
|
|
373 |
|
|
`set mem inaccessible-by-default [on|off]'
|
374 |
|
|
If `on' is specified, make GDB treat memory not explicitly
|
375 |
|
|
described by the memory ranges as non-existent and refuse accesses
|
376 |
|
|
to such memory. The checks are only performed if there's at least
|
377 |
|
|
one memory range defined. If `off' is specified, make GDB treat
|
378 |
|
|
the memory not explicitly described by the memory ranges as RAM.
|
379 |
|
|
The default value is `on'.
|
380 |
|
|
|
381 |
|
|
`show mem inaccessible-by-default'
|
382 |
|
|
Show the current handling of accesses to unknown memory.
|
383 |
|
|
|
384 |
|
|
|
385 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Dump/Restore Files, Next: Core File Generation, Prev: Memory Region Attributes, Up: Data
|
386 |
|
|
|
387 |
|
|
10.17 Copy Between Memory and a File
|
388 |
|
|
====================================
|
389 |
|
|
|
390 |
|
|
You can use the commands `dump', `append', and `restore' to copy data
|
391 |
|
|
between target memory and a file. The `dump' and `append' commands
|
392 |
|
|
write data to a file, and the `restore' command reads data from a file
|
393 |
|
|
back into the inferior's memory. Files may be in binary, Motorola
|
394 |
|
|
S-record, Intel hex, or Tektronix Hex format; however, GDB can only
|
395 |
|
|
append to binary files.
|
396 |
|
|
|
397 |
|
|
`dump [FORMAT] memory FILENAME START_ADDR END_ADDR'
|
398 |
|
|
`dump [FORMAT] value FILENAME EXPR'
|
399 |
|
|
Dump the contents of memory from START_ADDR to END_ADDR, or the
|
400 |
|
|
value of EXPR, to FILENAME in the given format.
|
401 |
|
|
|
402 |
|
|
The FORMAT parameter may be any one of:
|
403 |
|
|
`binary'
|
404 |
|
|
Raw binary form.
|
405 |
|
|
|
406 |
|
|
`ihex'
|
407 |
|
|
Intel hex format.
|
408 |
|
|
|
409 |
|
|
`srec'
|
410 |
|
|
Motorola S-record format.
|
411 |
|
|
|
412 |
|
|
`tekhex'
|
413 |
|
|
Tektronix Hex format.
|
414 |
|
|
|
415 |
|
|
GDB uses the same definitions of these formats as the GNU binary
|
416 |
|
|
utilities, like `objdump' and `objcopy'. If FORMAT is omitted,
|
417 |
|
|
GDB dumps the data in raw binary form.
|
418 |
|
|
|
419 |
|
|
`append [binary] memory FILENAME START_ADDR END_ADDR'
|
420 |
|
|
`append [binary] value FILENAME EXPR'
|
421 |
|
|
Append the contents of memory from START_ADDR to END_ADDR, or the
|
422 |
|
|
value of EXPR, to the file FILENAME, in raw binary form. (GDB can
|
423 |
|
|
only append data to files in raw binary form.)
|
424 |
|
|
|
425 |
|
|
`restore FILENAME [binary] BIAS START END'
|
426 |
|
|
Restore the contents of file FILENAME into memory. The `restore'
|
427 |
|
|
command can automatically recognize any known BFD file format,
|
428 |
|
|
except for raw binary. To restore a raw binary file you must
|
429 |
|
|
specify the optional keyword `binary' after the filename.
|
430 |
|
|
|
431 |
|
|
If BIAS is non-zero, its value will be added to the addresses
|
432 |
|
|
contained in the file. Binary files always start at address zero,
|
433 |
|
|
so they will be restored at address BIAS. Other bfd files have a
|
434 |
|
|
built-in location; they will be restored at offset BIAS from that
|
435 |
|
|
location.
|
436 |
|
|
|
437 |
|
|
If START and/or END are non-zero, then only data between file
|
438 |
|
|
offset START and file offset END will be restored. These offsets
|
439 |
|
|
are relative to the addresses in the file, before the BIAS
|
440 |
|
|
argument is applied.
|
441 |
|
|
|
442 |
|
|
|
443 |
|
|
|
444 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Core File Generation, Next: Character Sets, Prev: Dump/Restore Files, Up: Data
|
445 |
|
|
|
446 |
|
|
10.18 How to Produce a Core File from Your Program
|
447 |
|
|
==================================================
|
448 |
|
|
|
449 |
|
|
A "core file" or "core dump" is a file that records the memory image of
|
450 |
|
|
a running process and its process status (register values etc.). Its
|
451 |
|
|
primary use is post-mortem debugging of a program that crashed while it
|
452 |
|
|
ran outside a debugger. A program that crashes automatically produces
|
453 |
|
|
a core file, unless this feature is disabled by the user. *Note
|
454 |
|
|
Files::, for information on invoking GDB in the post-mortem debugging
|
455 |
|
|
mode.
|
456 |
|
|
|
457 |
|
|
Occasionally, you may wish to produce a core file of the program you
|
458 |
|
|
are debugging in order to preserve a snapshot of its state. GDB has a
|
459 |
|
|
special command for that.
|
460 |
|
|
|
461 |
|
|
`generate-core-file [FILE]'
|
462 |
|
|
`gcore [FILE]'
|
463 |
|
|
Produce a core dump of the inferior process. The optional argument
|
464 |
|
|
FILE specifies the file name where to put the core dump. If not
|
465 |
|
|
specified, the file name defaults to `core.PID', where PID is the
|
466 |
|
|
inferior process ID.
|
467 |
|
|
|
468 |
|
|
Note that this command is implemented only for some systems (as of
|
469 |
|
|
this writing, GNU/Linux, FreeBSD, Solaris, Unixware, and S390).
|
470 |
|
|
|
471 |
|
|
|
472 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Character Sets, Next: Caching Remote Data, Prev: Core File Generation, Up: Data
|
473 |
|
|
|
474 |
|
|
10.19 Character Sets
|
475 |
|
|
====================
|
476 |
|
|
|
477 |
|
|
If the program you are debugging uses a different character set to
|
478 |
|
|
represent characters and strings than the one GDB uses itself, GDB can
|
479 |
|
|
automatically translate between the character sets for you. The
|
480 |
|
|
character set GDB uses we call the "host character set"; the one the
|
481 |
|
|
inferior program uses we call the "target character set".
|
482 |
|
|
|
483 |
|
|
For example, if you are running GDB on a GNU/Linux system, which
|
484 |
|
|
uses the ISO Latin 1 character set, but you are using GDB's remote
|
485 |
|
|
protocol (*note Remote Debugging::) to debug a program running on an
|
486 |
|
|
IBM mainframe, which uses the EBCDIC character set, then the host
|
487 |
|
|
character set is Latin-1, and the target character set is EBCDIC. If
|
488 |
|
|
you give GDB the command `set target-charset EBCDIC-US', then GDB
|
489 |
|
|
translates between EBCDIC and Latin 1 as you print character or string
|
490 |
|
|
values, or use character and string literals in expressions.
|
491 |
|
|
|
492 |
|
|
GDB has no way to automatically recognize which character set the
|
493 |
|
|
inferior program uses; you must tell it, using the `set target-charset'
|
494 |
|
|
command, described below.
|
495 |
|
|
|
496 |
|
|
Here are the commands for controlling GDB's character set support:
|
497 |
|
|
|
498 |
|
|
`set target-charset CHARSET'
|
499 |
|
|
Set the current target character set to CHARSET. To display the
|
500 |
|
|
list of supported target character sets, type
|
501 |
|
|
`set target-charset '.
|
502 |
|
|
|
503 |
|
|
`set host-charset CHARSET'
|
504 |
|
|
Set the current host character set to CHARSET.
|
505 |
|
|
|
506 |
|
|
By default, GDB uses a host character set appropriate to the
|
507 |
|
|
system it is running on; you can override that default using the
|
508 |
|
|
`set host-charset' command. On some systems, GDB cannot
|
509 |
|
|
automatically determine the appropriate host character set. In
|
510 |
|
|
this case, GDB uses `UTF-8'.
|
511 |
|
|
|
512 |
|
|
GDB can only use certain character sets as its host character set.
|
513 |
|
|
If you type `set target-charset ', GDB will list the
|
514 |
|
|
host character sets it supports.
|
515 |
|
|
|
516 |
|
|
`set charset CHARSET'
|
517 |
|
|
Set the current host and target character sets to CHARSET. As
|
518 |
|
|
above, if you type `set charset ', GDB will list the
|
519 |
|
|
names of the character sets that can be used for both host and
|
520 |
|
|
target.
|
521 |
|
|
|
522 |
|
|
`show charset'
|
523 |
|
|
Show the names of the current host and target character sets.
|
524 |
|
|
|
525 |
|
|
`show host-charset'
|
526 |
|
|
Show the name of the current host character set.
|
527 |
|
|
|
528 |
|
|
`show target-charset'
|
529 |
|
|
Show the name of the current target character set.
|
530 |
|
|
|
531 |
|
|
`set target-wide-charset CHARSET'
|
532 |
|
|
Set the current target's wide character set to CHARSET. This is
|
533 |
|
|
the character set used by the target's `wchar_t' type. To display
|
534 |
|
|
the list of supported wide character sets, type
|
535 |
|
|
`set target-wide-charset '.
|
536 |
|
|
|
537 |
|
|
`show target-wide-charset'
|
538 |
|
|
Show the name of the current target's wide character set.
|
539 |
|
|
|
540 |
|
|
Here is an example of GDB's character set support in action. Assume
|
541 |
|
|
that the following source code has been placed in the file
|
542 |
|
|
`charset-test.c':
|
543 |
|
|
|
544 |
|
|
#include
|
545 |
|
|
|
546 |
|
|
char ascii_hello[]
|
547 |
|
|
= {72, 101, 108, 108, 111, 44, 32, 119,
|
548 |
|
|
111, 114, 108, 100, 33, 10, 0};
|
549 |
|
|
char ibm1047_hello[]
|
550 |
|
|
= {200, 133, 147, 147, 150, 107, 64, 166,
|
551 |
|
|
150, 153, 147, 132, 90, 37, 0};
|
552 |
|
|
|
553 |
|
|
main ()
|
554 |
|
|
{
|
555 |
|
|
printf ("Hello, world!\n");
|
556 |
|
|
}
|
557 |
|
|
|
558 |
|
|
In this program, `ascii_hello' and `ibm1047_hello' are arrays
|
559 |
|
|
containing the string `Hello, world!' followed by a newline, encoded in
|
560 |
|
|
the ASCII and IBM1047 character sets.
|
561 |
|
|
|
562 |
|
|
We compile the program, and invoke the debugger on it:
|
563 |
|
|
|
564 |
|
|
$ gcc -g charset-test.c -o charset-test
|
565 |
|
|
$ gdb -nw charset-test
|
566 |
|
|
GNU gdb 2001-12-19-cvs
|
567 |
|
|
Copyright 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
568 |
|
|
...
|
569 |
|
|
(gdb)
|
570 |
|
|
|
571 |
|
|
We can use the `show charset' command to see what character sets GDB
|
572 |
|
|
is currently using to interpret and display characters and strings:
|
573 |
|
|
|
574 |
|
|
(gdb) show charset
|
575 |
|
|
The current host and target character set is `ISO-8859-1'.
|
576 |
|
|
(gdb)
|
577 |
|
|
|
578 |
|
|
For the sake of printing this manual, let's use ASCII as our initial
|
579 |
|
|
character set:
|
580 |
|
|
(gdb) set charset ASCII
|
581 |
|
|
(gdb) show charset
|
582 |
|
|
The current host and target character set is `ASCII'.
|
583 |
|
|
(gdb)
|
584 |
|
|
|
585 |
|
|
Let's assume that ASCII is indeed the correct character set for our
|
586 |
|
|
host system -- in other words, let's assume that if GDB prints
|
587 |
|
|
characters using the ASCII character set, our terminal will display
|
588 |
|
|
them properly. Since our current target character set is also ASCII,
|
589 |
|
|
the contents of `ascii_hello' print legibly:
|
590 |
|
|
|
591 |
|
|
(gdb) print ascii_hello
|
592 |
|
|
$1 = 0x401698 "Hello, world!\n"
|
593 |
|
|
(gdb) print ascii_hello[0]
|
594 |
|
|
$2 = 72 'H'
|
595 |
|
|
(gdb)
|
596 |
|
|
|
597 |
|
|
GDB uses the target character set for character and string literals
|
598 |
|
|
you use in expressions:
|
599 |
|
|
|
600 |
|
|
(gdb) print '+'
|
601 |
|
|
$3 = 43 '+'
|
602 |
|
|
(gdb)
|
603 |
|
|
|
604 |
|
|
The ASCII character set uses the number 43 to encode the `+'
|
605 |
|
|
character.
|
606 |
|
|
|
607 |
|
|
GDB relies on the user to tell it which character set the target
|
608 |
|
|
program uses. If we print `ibm1047_hello' while our target character
|
609 |
|
|
set is still ASCII, we get jibberish:
|
610 |
|
|
|
611 |
|
|
(gdb) print ibm1047_hello
|
612 |
|
|
$4 = 0x4016a8 "\310\205\223\223\226k@\246\226\231\223\204Z%"
|
613 |
|
|
(gdb) print ibm1047_hello[0]
|
614 |
|
|
$5 = 200 '\310'
|
615 |
|
|
(gdb)
|
616 |
|
|
|
617 |
|
|
If we invoke the `set target-charset' followed by , GDB
|
618 |
|
|
tells us the character sets it supports:
|
619 |
|
|
|
620 |
|
|
(gdb) set target-charset
|
621 |
|
|
ASCII EBCDIC-US IBM1047 ISO-8859-1
|
622 |
|
|
(gdb) set target-charset
|
623 |
|
|
|
624 |
|
|
We can select IBM1047 as our target character set, and examine the
|
625 |
|
|
program's strings again. Now the ASCII string is wrong, but GDB
|
626 |
|
|
translates the contents of `ibm1047_hello' from the target character
|
627 |
|
|
set, IBM1047, to the host character set, ASCII, and they display
|
628 |
|
|
correctly:
|
629 |
|
|
|
630 |
|
|
(gdb) set target-charset IBM1047
|
631 |
|
|
(gdb) show charset
|
632 |
|
|
The current host character set is `ASCII'.
|
633 |
|
|
The current target character set is `IBM1047'.
|
634 |
|
|
(gdb) print ascii_hello
|
635 |
|
|
$6 = 0x401698 "\110\145%%?\054\040\167?\162%\144\041\012"
|
636 |
|
|
(gdb) print ascii_hello[0]
|
637 |
|
|
$7 = 72 '\110'
|
638 |
|
|
(gdb) print ibm1047_hello
|
639 |
|
|
$8 = 0x4016a8 "Hello, world!\n"
|
640 |
|
|
(gdb) print ibm1047_hello[0]
|
641 |
|
|
$9 = 200 'H'
|
642 |
|
|
(gdb)
|
643 |
|
|
|
644 |
|
|
As above, GDB uses the target character set for character and string
|
645 |
|
|
literals you use in expressions:
|
646 |
|
|
|
647 |
|
|
(gdb) print '+'
|
648 |
|
|
$10 = 78 '+'
|
649 |
|
|
(gdb)
|
650 |
|
|
|
651 |
|
|
The IBM1047 character set uses the number 78 to encode the `+'
|
652 |
|
|
character.
|
653 |
|
|
|
654 |
|
|
|
655 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Caching Remote Data, Next: Searching Memory, Prev: Character Sets, Up: Data
|
656 |
|
|
|
657 |
|
|
10.20 Caching Data of Remote Targets
|
658 |
|
|
====================================
|
659 |
|
|
|
660 |
|
|
GDB caches data exchanged between the debugger and a remote target
|
661 |
|
|
(*note Remote Debugging::). Such caching generally improves
|
662 |
|
|
performance, because it reduces the overhead of the remote protocol by
|
663 |
|
|
bundling memory reads and writes into large chunks. Unfortunately,
|
664 |
|
|
simply caching everything would lead to incorrect results, since GDB
|
665 |
|
|
does not necessarily know anything about volatile values, memory-mapped
|
666 |
|
|
I/O addresses, etc. Furthermore, in non-stop mode (*note Non-Stop
|
667 |
|
|
Mode::) memory can be changed _while_ a gdb command is executing.
|
668 |
|
|
Therefore, by default, GDB only caches data known to be on the stack(1).
|
669 |
|
|
Other regions of memory can be explicitly marked as cacheable; see
|
670 |
|
|
*note Memory Region Attributes::.
|
671 |
|
|
|
672 |
|
|
`set remotecache on'
|
673 |
|
|
`set remotecache off'
|
674 |
|
|
This option no longer does anything; it exists for compatibility
|
675 |
|
|
with old scripts.
|
676 |
|
|
|
677 |
|
|
`show remotecache'
|
678 |
|
|
Show the current state of the obsolete remotecache flag.
|
679 |
|
|
|
680 |
|
|
`set stack-cache on'
|
681 |
|
|
`set stack-cache off'
|
682 |
|
|
Enable or disable caching of stack accesses. When `ON', use
|
683 |
|
|
caching. By default, this option is `ON'.
|
684 |
|
|
|
685 |
|
|
`show stack-cache'
|
686 |
|
|
Show the current state of data caching for memory accesses.
|
687 |
|
|
|
688 |
|
|
`info dcache [line]'
|
689 |
|
|
Print the information about the data cache performance. The
|
690 |
|
|
information displayed includes the dcache width and depth, and for
|
691 |
|
|
each cache line, its number, address, and how many times it was
|
692 |
|
|
referenced. This command is useful for debugging the data cache
|
693 |
|
|
operation.
|
694 |
|
|
|
695 |
|
|
If a line number is specified, the contents of that line will be
|
696 |
|
|
printed in hex.
|
697 |
|
|
|
698 |
|
|
---------- Footnotes ----------
|
699 |
|
|
|
700 |
|
|
(1) In non-stop mode, it is moderately rare for a running thread to
|
701 |
|
|
modify the stack of a stopped thread in a way that would interfere with
|
702 |
|
|
a backtrace, and caching of stack reads provides a significant speed up
|
703 |
|
|
of remote backtraces.
|
704 |
|
|
|
705 |
|
|
|
706 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Searching Memory, Prev: Caching Remote Data, Up: Data
|
707 |
|
|
|
708 |
|
|
10.21 Search Memory
|
709 |
|
|
===================
|
710 |
|
|
|
711 |
|
|
Memory can be searched for a particular sequence of bytes with the
|
712 |
|
|
`find' command.
|
713 |
|
|
|
714 |
|
|
`find [/SN] START_ADDR, +LEN, VAL1 [, VAL2, ...]'
|
715 |
|
|
`find [/SN] START_ADDR, END_ADDR, VAL1 [, VAL2, ...]'
|
716 |
|
|
Search memory for the sequence of bytes specified by VAL1, VAL2,
|
717 |
|
|
etc. The search begins at address START_ADDR and continues for
|
718 |
|
|
either LEN bytes or through to END_ADDR inclusive.
|
719 |
|
|
|
720 |
|
|
S and N are optional parameters. They may be specified in either
|
721 |
|
|
order, apart or together.
|
722 |
|
|
|
723 |
|
|
S, search query size
|
724 |
|
|
The size of each search query value.
|
725 |
|
|
|
726 |
|
|
`b'
|
727 |
|
|
bytes
|
728 |
|
|
|
729 |
|
|
`h'
|
730 |
|
|
halfwords (two bytes)
|
731 |
|
|
|
732 |
|
|
`w'
|
733 |
|
|
words (four bytes)
|
734 |
|
|
|
735 |
|
|
`g'
|
736 |
|
|
giant words (eight bytes)
|
737 |
|
|
|
738 |
|
|
All values are interpreted in the current language. This means,
|
739 |
|
|
for example, that if the current source language is C/C++ then
|
740 |
|
|
searching for the string "hello" includes the trailing '\0'.
|
741 |
|
|
|
742 |
|
|
If the value size is not specified, it is taken from the value's
|
743 |
|
|
type in the current language. This is useful when one wants to
|
744 |
|
|
specify the search pattern as a mixture of types. Note that this
|
745 |
|
|
means, for example, that in the case of C-like languages a search
|
746 |
|
|
for an untyped 0x42 will search for `(int) 0x42' which is
|
747 |
|
|
typically four bytes.
|
748 |
|
|
|
749 |
|
|
N, maximum number of finds
|
750 |
|
|
The maximum number of matches to print. The default is to print
|
751 |
|
|
all finds.
|
752 |
|
|
|
753 |
|
|
You can use strings as search values. Quote them with double-quotes
|
754 |
342 |
jeremybenn |
(`"'). The string value is copied into the search pattern byte by byte,
|
755 |
|
|
regardless of the endianness of the target and the size specification.
|
756 |
330 |
jeremybenn |
|
757 |
|
|
The address of each match found is printed as well as a count of the
|
758 |
|
|
number of matches found.
|
759 |
|
|
|
760 |
|
|
The address of the last value found is stored in convenience variable
|
761 |
|
|
`$_'. A count of the number of matches is stored in `$numfound'.
|
762 |
|
|
|
763 |
|
|
For example, if stopped at the `printf' in this function:
|
764 |
|
|
|
765 |
|
|
void
|
766 |
|
|
hello ()
|
767 |
|
|
{
|
768 |
|
|
static char hello[] = "hello-hello";
|
769 |
|
|
static struct { char c; short s; int i; }
|
770 |
|
|
__attribute__ ((packed)) mixed
|
771 |
|
|
= { 'c', 0x1234, 0x87654321 };
|
772 |
|
|
printf ("%s\n", hello);
|
773 |
|
|
}
|
774 |
|
|
|
775 |
|
|
you get during debugging:
|
776 |
|
|
|
777 |
|
|
(gdb) find &hello[0], +sizeof(hello), "hello"
|
778 |
|
|
0x804956d
|
779 |
|
|
1 pattern found
|
780 |
|
|
(gdb) find &hello[0], +sizeof(hello), 'h', 'e', 'l', 'l', 'o'
|
781 |
|
|
0x8049567
|
782 |
|
|
0x804956d
|
783 |
|
|
2 patterns found
|
784 |
|
|
(gdb) find /b1 &hello[0], +sizeof(hello), 'h', 0x65, 'l'
|
785 |
|
|
0x8049567
|
786 |
|
|
1 pattern found
|
787 |
|
|
(gdb) find &mixed, +sizeof(mixed), (char) 'c', (short) 0x1234, (int) 0x87654321
|
788 |
|
|
0x8049560
|
789 |
|
|
1 pattern found
|
790 |
|
|
(gdb) print $numfound
|
791 |
|
|
$1 = 1
|
792 |
|
|
(gdb) print $_
|
793 |
|
|
$2 = (void *) 0x8049560
|
794 |
|
|
|
795 |
|
|
|
796 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Optimized Code, Next: Macros, Prev: Data, Up: Top
|
797 |
|
|
|
798 |
|
|
11 Debugging Optimized Code
|
799 |
|
|
***************************
|
800 |
|
|
|
801 |
|
|
Almost all compilers support optimization. With optimization disabled,
|
802 |
|
|
the compiler generates assembly code that corresponds directly to your
|
803 |
|
|
source code, in a simplistic way. As the compiler applies more
|
804 |
|
|
powerful optimizations, the generated assembly code diverges from your
|
805 |
|
|
original source code. With help from debugging information generated
|
806 |
|
|
by the compiler, GDB can map from the running program back to
|
807 |
|
|
constructs from your original source.
|
808 |
|
|
|
809 |
|
|
GDB is more accurate with optimization disabled. If you can
|
810 |
|
|
recompile without optimization, it is easier to follow the progress of
|
811 |
|
|
your program during debugging. But, there are many cases where you may
|
812 |
|
|
need to debug an optimized version.
|
813 |
|
|
|
814 |
|
|
When you debug a program compiled with `-g -O', remember that the
|
815 |
|
|
optimizer has rearranged your code; the debugger shows you what is
|
816 |
|
|
really there. Do not be too surprised when the execution path does not
|
817 |
|
|
exactly match your source file! An extreme example: if you define a
|
818 |
|
|
variable, but never use it, GDB never sees that variable--because the
|
819 |
|
|
compiler optimizes it out of existence.
|
820 |
|
|
|
821 |
|
|
Some things do not work as well with `-g -O' as with just `-g',
|
822 |
|
|
particularly on machines with instruction scheduling. If in doubt,
|
823 |
|
|
recompile with `-g' alone, and if this fixes the problem, please report
|
824 |
|
|
it to us as a bug (including a test case!). *Note Variables::, for
|
825 |
|
|
more information about debugging optimized code.
|
826 |
|
|
|
827 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
828 |
|
|
|
829 |
|
|
* Inline Functions:: How GDB presents inlining
|
830 |
|
|
|
831 |
|
|
|
832 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Inline Functions, Up: Optimized Code
|
833 |
|
|
|
834 |
|
|
11.1 Inline Functions
|
835 |
|
|
=====================
|
836 |
|
|
|
837 |
|
|
"Inlining" is an optimization that inserts a copy of the function body
|
838 |
|
|
directly at each call site, instead of jumping to a shared routine.
|
839 |
|
|
GDB displays inlined functions just like non-inlined functions. They
|
840 |
|
|
appear in backtraces. You can view their arguments and local
|
841 |
|
|
variables, step into them with `step', skip them with `next', and
|
842 |
|
|
escape from them with `finish'. You can check whether a function was
|
843 |
|
|
inlined by using the `info frame' command.
|
844 |
|
|
|
845 |
|
|
For GDB to support inlined functions, the compiler must record
|
846 |
|
|
information about inlining in the debug information -- GCC using the
|
847 |
|
|
DWARF 2 format does this, and several other compilers do also. GDB
|
848 |
|
|
only supports inlined functions when using DWARF 2. Versions of GCC
|
849 |
|
|
before 4.1 do not emit two required attributes (`DW_AT_call_file' and
|
850 |
|
|
`DW_AT_call_line'); GDB does not display inlined function calls with
|
851 |
|
|
earlier versions of GCC. It instead displays the arguments and local
|
852 |
|
|
variables of inlined functions as local variables in the caller.
|
853 |
|
|
|
854 |
|
|
The body of an inlined function is directly included at its call
|
855 |
|
|
site; unlike a non-inlined function, there are no instructions devoted
|
856 |
|
|
to the call. GDB still pretends that the call site and the start of
|
857 |
|
|
the inlined function are different instructions. Stepping to the call
|
858 |
|
|
site shows the call site, and then stepping again shows the first line
|
859 |
|
|
of the inlined function, even though no additional instructions are
|
860 |
|
|
executed.
|
861 |
|
|
|
862 |
|
|
This makes source-level debugging much clearer; you can see both the
|
863 |
|
|
context of the call and then the effect of the call. Only stepping by
|
864 |
|
|
a single instruction using `stepi' or `nexti' does not do this; single
|
865 |
|
|
instruction steps always show the inlined body.
|
866 |
|
|
|
867 |
|
|
There are some ways that GDB does not pretend that inlined function
|
868 |
|
|
calls are the same as normal calls:
|
869 |
|
|
|
870 |
|
|
* You cannot set breakpoints on inlined functions. GDB either
|
871 |
|
|
reports that there is no symbol with that name, or else sets the
|
872 |
|
|
breakpoint only on non-inlined copies of the function. This
|
873 |
|
|
limitation will be removed in a future version of GDB; until then,
|
874 |
|
|
set a breakpoint by line number on the first line of the inlined
|
875 |
|
|
function instead.
|
876 |
|
|
|
877 |
|
|
* Setting breakpoints at the call site of an inlined function may not
|
878 |
|
|
work, because the call site does not contain any code. GDB may
|
879 |
|
|
incorrectly move the breakpoint to the next line of the enclosing
|
880 |
|
|
function, after the call. This limitation will be removed in a
|
881 |
|
|
future version of GDB; until then, set a breakpoint on an earlier
|
882 |
|
|
line or inside the inlined function instead.
|
883 |
|
|
|
884 |
|
|
* GDB cannot locate the return value of inlined calls after using
|
885 |
|
|
the `finish' command. This is a limitation of compiler-generated
|
886 |
|
|
debugging information; after `finish', you can step to the next
|
887 |
|
|
line and print a variable where your program stored the return
|
888 |
|
|
value.
|
889 |
|
|
|
890 |
|
|
|
891 |
|
|
|
892 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Macros, Next: Tracepoints, Prev: Optimized Code, Up: Top
|
893 |
|
|
|
894 |
|
|
12 C Preprocessor Macros
|
895 |
|
|
************************
|
896 |
|
|
|
897 |
|
|
Some languages, such as C and C++, provide a way to define and invoke
|
898 |
|
|
"preprocessor macros" which expand into strings of tokens. GDB can
|
899 |
|
|
evaluate expressions containing macro invocations, show the result of
|
900 |
|
|
macro expansion, and show a macro's definition, including where it was
|
901 |
|
|
defined.
|
902 |
|
|
|
903 |
|
|
You may need to compile your program specially to provide GDB with
|
904 |
|
|
information about preprocessor macros. Most compilers do not include
|
905 |
|
|
macros in their debugging information, even when you compile with the
|
906 |
|
|
`-g' flag. *Note Compilation::.
|
907 |
|
|
|
908 |
|
|
A program may define a macro at one point, remove that definition
|
909 |
|
|
later, and then provide a different definition after that. Thus, at
|
910 |
|
|
different points in the program, a macro may have different
|
911 |
|
|
definitions, or have no definition at all. If there is a current stack
|
912 |
|
|
frame, GDB uses the macros in scope at that frame's source code line.
|
913 |
|
|
Otherwise, GDB uses the macros in scope at the current listing location;
|
914 |
342 |
jeremybenn |
see *note List::.
|
915 |
330 |
jeremybenn |
|
916 |
|
|
Whenever GDB evaluates an expression, it always expands any macro
|
917 |
|
|
invocations present in the expression. GDB also provides the following
|
918 |
|
|
commands for working with macros explicitly.
|
919 |
|
|
|
920 |
|
|
`macro expand EXPRESSION'
|
921 |
|
|
`macro exp EXPRESSION'
|
922 |
|
|
Show the results of expanding all preprocessor macro invocations in
|
923 |
|
|
EXPRESSION. Since GDB simply expands macros, but does not parse
|
924 |
|
|
the result, EXPRESSION need not be a valid expression; it can be
|
925 |
|
|
any string of tokens.
|
926 |
|
|
|
927 |
|
|
`macro expand-once EXPRESSION'
|
928 |
|
|
`macro exp1 EXPRESSION'
|
929 |
|
|
(This command is not yet implemented.) Show the results of
|
930 |
|
|
expanding those preprocessor macro invocations that appear
|
931 |
|
|
explicitly in EXPRESSION. Macro invocations appearing in that
|
932 |
|
|
expansion are left unchanged. This command allows you to see the
|
933 |
|
|
effect of a particular macro more clearly, without being confused
|
934 |
|
|
by further expansions. Since GDB simply expands macros, but does
|
935 |
|
|
not parse the result, EXPRESSION need not be a valid expression; it
|
936 |
|
|
can be any string of tokens.
|
937 |
|
|
|
938 |
|
|
`info macro MACRO'
|
939 |
|
|
Show the definition of the macro named MACRO, and describe the
|
940 |
|
|
source location or compiler command-line where that definition was
|
941 |
|
|
established.
|
942 |
|
|
|
943 |
|
|
`macro define MACRO REPLACEMENT-LIST'
|
944 |
|
|
`macro define MACRO(ARGLIST) REPLACEMENT-LIST'
|
945 |
|
|
Introduce a definition for a preprocessor macro named MACRO,
|
946 |
|
|
invocations of which are replaced by the tokens given in
|
947 |
|
|
REPLACEMENT-LIST. The first form of this command defines an
|
948 |
|
|
"object-like" macro, which takes no arguments; the second form
|
949 |
|
|
defines a "function-like" macro, which takes the arguments given in
|
950 |
|
|
ARGLIST.
|
951 |
|
|
|
952 |
|
|
A definition introduced by this command is in scope in every
|
953 |
|
|
expression evaluated in GDB, until it is removed with the `macro
|
954 |
|
|
undef' command, described below. The definition overrides all
|
955 |
|
|
definitions for MACRO present in the program being debugged, as
|
956 |
|
|
well as any previous user-supplied definition.
|
957 |
|
|
|
958 |
|
|
`macro undef MACRO'
|
959 |
|
|
Remove any user-supplied definition for the macro named MACRO.
|
960 |
|
|
This command only affects definitions provided with the `macro
|
961 |
|
|
define' command, described above; it cannot remove definitions
|
962 |
|
|
present in the program being debugged.
|
963 |
|
|
|
964 |
|
|
`macro list'
|
965 |
|
|
List all the macros defined using the `macro define' command.
|
966 |
|
|
|
967 |
|
|
Here is a transcript showing the above commands in action. First, we
|
968 |
|
|
show our source files:
|
969 |
|
|
|
970 |
|
|
$ cat sample.c
|
971 |
|
|
#include
|
972 |
|
|
#include "sample.h"
|
973 |
|
|
|
974 |
|
|
#define M 42
|
975 |
|
|
#define ADD(x) (M + x)
|
976 |
|
|
|
977 |
|
|
main ()
|
978 |
|
|
{
|
979 |
|
|
#define N 28
|
980 |
|
|
printf ("Hello, world!\n");
|
981 |
|
|
#undef N
|
982 |
|
|
printf ("We're so creative.\n");
|
983 |
|
|
#define N 1729
|
984 |
|
|
printf ("Goodbye, world!\n");
|
985 |
|
|
}
|
986 |
|
|
$ cat sample.h
|
987 |
|
|
#define Q <
|
988 |
|
|
$
|
989 |
|
|
|
990 |
|
|
Now, we compile the program using the GNU C compiler, GCC. We pass
|
991 |
|
|
the `-gdwarf-2' and `-g3' flags to ensure the compiler includes
|
992 |
|
|
information about preprocessor macros in the debugging information.
|
993 |
|
|
|
994 |
|
|
$ gcc -gdwarf-2 -g3 sample.c -o sample
|
995 |
|
|
$
|
996 |
|
|
|
997 |
|
|
Now, we start GDB on our sample program:
|
998 |
|
|
|
999 |
|
|
$ gdb -nw sample
|
1000 |
|
|
GNU gdb 2002-05-06-cvs
|
1001 |
|
|
Copyright 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
1002 |
|
|
GDB is free software, ...
|
1003 |
|
|
(gdb)
|
1004 |
|
|
|
1005 |
|
|
We can expand macros and examine their definitions, even when the
|
1006 |
|
|
program is not running. GDB uses the current listing position to
|
1007 |
|
|
decide which macro definitions are in scope:
|
1008 |
|
|
|
1009 |
|
|
(gdb) list main
|
1010 |
|
|
3
|
1011 |
|
|
4 #define M 42
|
1012 |
|
|
5 #define ADD(x) (M + x)
|
1013 |
|
|
6
|
1014 |
|
|
7 main ()
|
1015 |
|
|
8 {
|
1016 |
|
|
9 #define N 28
|
1017 |
|
|
10 printf ("Hello, world!\n");
|
1018 |
|
|
11 #undef N
|
1019 |
|
|
12 printf ("We're so creative.\n");
|
1020 |
|
|
(gdb) info macro ADD
|
1021 |
|
|
Defined at /home/jimb/gdb/macros/play/sample.c:5
|
1022 |
|
|
#define ADD(x) (M + x)
|
1023 |
|
|
(gdb) info macro Q
|
1024 |
|
|
Defined at /home/jimb/gdb/macros/play/sample.h:1
|
1025 |
|
|
included at /home/jimb/gdb/macros/play/sample.c:2
|
1026 |
|
|
#define Q <
|
1027 |
|
|
(gdb) macro expand ADD(1)
|
1028 |
|
|
expands to: (42 + 1)
|
1029 |
|
|
(gdb) macro expand-once ADD(1)
|
1030 |
|
|
expands to: once (M + 1)
|
1031 |
|
|
(gdb)
|
1032 |
|
|
|
1033 |
|
|
In the example above, note that `macro expand-once' expands only the
|
1034 |
|
|
macro invocation explicit in the original text -- the invocation of
|
1035 |
|
|
`ADD' -- but does not expand the invocation of the macro `M', which was
|
1036 |
|
|
introduced by `ADD'.
|
1037 |
|
|
|
1038 |
|
|
Once the program is running, GDB uses the macro definitions in force
|
1039 |
|
|
at the source line of the current stack frame:
|
1040 |
|
|
|
1041 |
|
|
(gdb) break main
|
1042 |
|
|
Breakpoint 1 at 0x8048370: file sample.c, line 10.
|
1043 |
|
|
(gdb) run
|
1044 |
|
|
Starting program: /home/jimb/gdb/macros/play/sample
|
1045 |
|
|
|
1046 |
|
|
Breakpoint 1, main () at sample.c:10
|
1047 |
|
|
10 printf ("Hello, world!\n");
|
1048 |
|
|
(gdb)
|
1049 |
|
|
|
1050 |
|
|
At line 10, the definition of the macro `N' at line 9 is in force:
|
1051 |
|
|
|
1052 |
|
|
(gdb) info macro N
|
1053 |
|
|
Defined at /home/jimb/gdb/macros/play/sample.c:9
|
1054 |
|
|
#define N 28
|
1055 |
|
|
(gdb) macro expand N Q M
|
1056 |
|
|
expands to: 28 < 42
|
1057 |
|
|
(gdb) print N Q M
|
1058 |
|
|
$1 = 1
|
1059 |
|
|
(gdb)
|
1060 |
|
|
|
1061 |
|
|
As we step over directives that remove `N''s definition, and then
|
1062 |
|
|
give it a new definition, GDB finds the definition (or lack thereof) in
|
1063 |
|
|
force at each point:
|
1064 |
|
|
|
1065 |
|
|
(gdb) next
|
1066 |
|
|
Hello, world!
|
1067 |
|
|
12 printf ("We're so creative.\n");
|
1068 |
|
|
(gdb) info macro N
|
1069 |
|
|
The symbol `N' has no definition as a C/C++ preprocessor macro
|
1070 |
|
|
at /home/jimb/gdb/macros/play/sample.c:12
|
1071 |
|
|
(gdb) next
|
1072 |
|
|
We're so creative.
|
1073 |
|
|
14 printf ("Goodbye, world!\n");
|
1074 |
|
|
(gdb) info macro N
|
1075 |
|
|
Defined at /home/jimb/gdb/macros/play/sample.c:13
|
1076 |
|
|
#define N 1729
|
1077 |
|
|
(gdb) macro expand N Q M
|
1078 |
|
|
expands to: 1729 < 42
|
1079 |
|
|
(gdb) print N Q M
|
1080 |
|
|
$2 = 0
|
1081 |
|
|
(gdb)
|
1082 |
|
|
|
1083 |
|
|
In addition to source files, macros can be defined on the
|
1084 |
|
|
compilation command line using the `-DNAME=VALUE' syntax. For macros
|
1085 |
|
|
defined in such a way, GDB displays the location of their definition as
|
1086 |
|
|
line zero of the source file submitted to the compiler.
|
1087 |
|
|
|
1088 |
|
|
(gdb) info macro __STDC__
|
1089 |
|
|
Defined at /home/jimb/gdb/macros/play/sample.c:0
|
1090 |
|
|
-D__STDC__=1
|
1091 |
|
|
(gdb)
|
1092 |
|
|
|
1093 |
|
|
|
1094 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Tracepoints, Next: Overlays, Prev: Macros, Up: Top
|
1095 |
|
|
|
1096 |
|
|
13 Tracepoints
|
1097 |
|
|
**************
|
1098 |
|
|
|
1099 |
|
|
In some applications, it is not feasible for the debugger to interrupt
|
1100 |
|
|
the program's execution long enough for the developer to learn anything
|
1101 |
|
|
helpful about its behavior. If the program's correctness depends on
|
1102 |
|
|
its real-time behavior, delays introduced by a debugger might cause the
|
1103 |
|
|
program to change its behavior drastically, or perhaps fail, even when
|
1104 |
|
|
the code itself is correct. It is useful to be able to observe the
|
1105 |
|
|
program's behavior without interrupting it.
|
1106 |
|
|
|
1107 |
|
|
Using GDB's `trace' and `collect' commands, you can specify
|
1108 |
|
|
locations in the program, called "tracepoints", and arbitrary
|
1109 |
|
|
expressions to evaluate when those tracepoints are reached. Later,
|
1110 |
|
|
using the `tfind' command, you can examine the values those expressions
|
1111 |
|
|
had when the program hit the tracepoints. The expressions may also
|
1112 |
|
|
denote objects in memory--structures or arrays, for example--whose
|
1113 |
|
|
values GDB should record; while visiting a particular tracepoint, you
|
1114 |
|
|
may inspect those objects as if they were in memory at that moment.
|
1115 |
|
|
However, because GDB records these values without interacting with you,
|
1116 |
|
|
it can do so quickly and unobtrusively, hopefully not disturbing the
|
1117 |
|
|
program's behavior.
|
1118 |
|
|
|
1119 |
|
|
The tracepoint facility is currently available only for remote
|
1120 |
|
|
targets. *Note Targets::. In addition, your remote target must know
|
1121 |
|
|
how to collect trace data. This functionality is implemented in the
|
1122 |
|
|
remote stub; however, none of the stubs distributed with GDB support
|
1123 |
|
|
tracepoints as of this writing. The format of the remote packets used
|
1124 |
342 |
jeremybenn |
to implement tracepoints are described in *note Tracepoint Packets::.
|
1125 |
330 |
jeremybenn |
|
1126 |
|
|
It is also possible to get trace data from a file, in a manner
|
1127 |
|
|
reminiscent of corefiles; you specify the filename, and use `tfind' to
|
1128 |
|
|
search through the file. *Note Trace Files::, for more details.
|
1129 |
|
|
|
1130 |
|
|
This chapter describes the tracepoint commands and features.
|
1131 |
|
|
|
1132 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
1133 |
|
|
|
1134 |
|
|
* Set Tracepoints::
|
1135 |
|
|
* Analyze Collected Data::
|
1136 |
|
|
* Tracepoint Variables::
|
1137 |
|
|
* Trace Files::
|
1138 |
|
|
|
1139 |
|
|
|
1140 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Set Tracepoints, Next: Analyze Collected Data, Up: Tracepoints
|
1141 |
|
|
|
1142 |
|
|
13.1 Commands to Set Tracepoints
|
1143 |
|
|
================================
|
1144 |
|
|
|
1145 |
|
|
Before running such a "trace experiment", an arbitrary number of
|
1146 |
|
|
tracepoints can be set. A tracepoint is actually a special type of
|
1147 |
|
|
breakpoint (*note Set Breaks::), so you can manipulate it using
|
1148 |
|
|
standard breakpoint commands. For instance, as with breakpoints,
|
1149 |
|
|
tracepoint numbers are successive integers starting from one, and many
|
1150 |
|
|
of the commands associated with tracepoints take the tracepoint number
|
1151 |
|
|
as their argument, to identify which tracepoint to work on.
|
1152 |
|
|
|
1153 |
|
|
For each tracepoint, you can specify, in advance, some arbitrary set
|
1154 |
|
|
of data that you want the target to collect in the trace buffer when it
|
1155 |
|
|
hits that tracepoint. The collected data can include registers, local
|
1156 |
|
|
variables, or global data. Later, you can use GDB commands to examine
|
1157 |
|
|
the values these data had at the time the tracepoint was hit.
|
1158 |
|
|
|
1159 |
|
|
Tracepoints do not support every breakpoint feature. Ignore counts
|
1160 |
|
|
on tracepoints have no effect, and tracepoints cannot run GDB commands
|
1161 |
|
|
when they are hit. Tracepoints may not be thread-specific either.
|
1162 |
|
|
|
1163 |
|
|
Some targets may support "fast tracepoints", which are inserted in a
|
1164 |
|
|
different way (such as with a jump instead of a trap), that is faster
|
1165 |
|
|
but possibly restricted in where they may be installed.
|
1166 |
|
|
|
1167 |
|
|
Regular and fast tracepoints are dynamic tracing facilities, meaning
|
1168 |
|
|
that they can be used to insert tracepoints at (almost) any location in
|
1169 |
|
|
the target. Some targets may also support controlling "static
|
1170 |
|
|
tracepoints" from GDB. With static tracing, a set of instrumentation
|
1171 |
|
|
points, also known as "markers", are embedded in the target program,
|
1172 |
|
|
and can be activated or deactivated by name or address. These are
|
1173 |
|
|
usually placed at locations which facilitate investigating what the
|
1174 |
|
|
target is actually doing. GDB's support for static tracing includes
|
1175 |
|
|
being able to list instrumentation points, and attach them with GDB
|
1176 |
|
|
defined high level tracepoints that expose the whole range of
|
1177 |
|
|
convenience of GDB's tracepoints support. Namelly, support for
|
1178 |
|
|
collecting registers values and values of global or local (to the
|
1179 |
|
|
instrumentation point) variables; tracepoint conditions and trace state
|
1180 |
|
|
variables. The act of installing a GDB static tracepoint on an
|
1181 |
|
|
instrumentation point, or marker, is referred to as "probing" a static
|
1182 |
|
|
tracepoint marker.
|
1183 |
|
|
|
1184 |
|
|
`gdbserver' supports tracepoints on some target systems. *Note
|
1185 |
|
|
Tracepoints support in `gdbserver': Server.
|
1186 |
|
|
|
1187 |
|
|
This section describes commands to set tracepoints and associated
|
1188 |
|
|
conditions and actions.
|
1189 |
|
|
|
1190 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
1191 |
|
|
|
1192 |
|
|
* Create and Delete Tracepoints::
|
1193 |
|
|
* Enable and Disable Tracepoints::
|
1194 |
|
|
* Tracepoint Passcounts::
|
1195 |
|
|
* Tracepoint Conditions::
|
1196 |
|
|
* Trace State Variables::
|
1197 |
|
|
* Tracepoint Actions::
|
1198 |
|
|
* Listing Tracepoints::
|
1199 |
|
|
* Listing Static Tracepoint Markers::
|
1200 |
|
|
* Starting and Stopping Trace Experiments::
|
1201 |
|
|
* Tracepoint Restrictions::
|
1202 |
|
|
|
1203 |
|
|
|
1204 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Create and Delete Tracepoints, Next: Enable and Disable Tracepoints, Up: Set Tracepoints
|
1205 |
|
|
|
1206 |
|
|
13.1.1 Create and Delete Tracepoints
|
1207 |
|
|
------------------------------------
|
1208 |
|
|
|
1209 |
|
|
`trace LOCATION'
|
1210 |
|
|
The `trace' command is very similar to the `break' command. Its
|
1211 |
|
|
argument LOCATION can be a source line, a function name, or an
|
1212 |
|
|
address in the target program. *Note Specify Location::. The
|
1213 |
|
|
`trace' command defines a tracepoint, which is a point in the
|
1214 |
|
|
target program where the debugger will briefly stop, collect some
|
1215 |
|
|
data, and then allow the program to continue. Setting a
|
1216 |
|
|
tracepoint or changing its actions doesn't take effect until the
|
1217 |
|
|
next `tstart' command, and once a trace experiment is running,
|
1218 |
|
|
further changes will not have any effect until the next trace
|
1219 |
|
|
experiment starts.
|
1220 |
|
|
|
1221 |
|
|
Here are some examples of using the `trace' command:
|
1222 |
|
|
|
1223 |
|
|
(gdb) trace foo.c:121 // a source file and line number
|
1224 |
|
|
|
1225 |
|
|
(gdb) trace +2 // 2 lines forward
|
1226 |
|
|
|
1227 |
|
|
(gdb) trace my_function // first source line of function
|
1228 |
|
|
|
1229 |
|
|
(gdb) trace *my_function // EXACT start address of function
|
1230 |
|
|
|
1231 |
|
|
(gdb) trace *0x2117c4 // an address
|
1232 |
|
|
|
1233 |
|
|
You can abbreviate `trace' as `tr'.
|
1234 |
|
|
|
1235 |
|
|
`trace LOCATION if COND'
|
1236 |
|
|
Set a tracepoint with condition COND; evaluate the expression COND
|
1237 |
|
|
each time the tracepoint is reached, and collect data only if the
|
1238 |
|
|
value is nonzero--that is, if COND evaluates as true. *Note
|
1239 |
|
|
Tracepoint Conditions: Tracepoint Conditions, for more information
|
1240 |
|
|
on tracepoint conditions.
|
1241 |
|
|
|
1242 |
|
|
`ftrace LOCATION [ if COND ]'
|
1243 |
|
|
The `ftrace' command sets a fast tracepoint. For targets that
|
1244 |
|
|
support them, fast tracepoints will use a more efficient but
|
1245 |
|
|
possibly less general technique to trigger data collection, such
|
1246 |
|
|
as a jump instruction instead of a trap, or some sort of hardware
|
1247 |
|
|
support. It may not be possible to create a fast tracepoint at
|
1248 |
|
|
the desired location, in which case the command will exit with an
|
1249 |
|
|
explanatory message.
|
1250 |
|
|
|
1251 |
|
|
GDB handles arguments to `ftrace' exactly as for `trace'.
|
1252 |
|
|
|
1253 |
|
|
`strace LOCATION [ if COND ]'
|
1254 |
|
|
The `strace' command sets a static tracepoint. For targets that
|
1255 |
|
|
support it, setting a static tracepoint probes a static
|
1256 |
|
|
instrumentation point, or marker, found at LOCATION. It may not
|
1257 |
|
|
be possible to set a static tracepoint at the desired location, in
|
1258 |
|
|
which case the command will exit with an explanatory message.
|
1259 |
|
|
|
1260 |
|
|
GDB handles arguments to `strace' exactly as for `trace', with the
|
1261 |
|
|
addition that the user can also specify `-m MARKER' as LOCATION.
|
1262 |
|
|
This probes the marker identified by the MARKER string identifier.
|
1263 |
|
|
This identifier depends on the static tracepoint backend library
|
1264 |
|
|
your program is using. You can find all the marker identifiers in
|
1265 |
|
|
the `ID' field of the `info static-tracepoint-markers' command
|
1266 |
|
|
output. *Note Listing Static Tracepoint Markers: Listing Static
|
1267 |
|
|
Tracepoint Markers. For example, in the following small program
|
1268 |
|
|
using the UST tracing engine:
|
1269 |
|
|
|
1270 |
|
|
main ()
|
1271 |
|
|
{
|
1272 |
|
|
trace_mark(ust, bar33, "str %s", "FOOBAZ");
|
1273 |
|
|
}
|
1274 |
|
|
|
1275 |
|
|
the marker id is composed of joining the first two arguments to the
|
1276 |
|
|
`trace_mark' call with a slash, which translates to:
|
1277 |
|
|
|
1278 |
|
|
(gdb) info static-tracepoint-markers
|
1279 |
|
|
Cnt Enb ID Address What
|
1280 |
|
|
1 n ust/bar33 0x0000000000400ddc in main at stexample.c:22
|
1281 |
|
|
Data: "str %s"
|
1282 |
|
|
[etc...]
|
1283 |
|
|
|
1284 |
|
|
so you may probe the marker above with:
|
1285 |
|
|
|
1286 |
|
|
(gdb) strace -m ust/bar33
|
1287 |
|
|
|
1288 |
|
|
Static tracepoints accept an extra collect action -- `collect
|
1289 |
|
|
$_sdata'. This collects arbitrary user data passed in the probe
|
1290 |
|
|
point call to the tracing library. In the UST example above,
|
1291 |
|
|
you'll see that the third argument to `trace_mark' is a
|
1292 |
|
|
printf-like format string. The user data is then the result of
|
1293 |
|
|
running that formating string against the following arguments.
|
1294 |
|
|
Note that `info static-tracepoint-markers' command output lists
|
1295 |
|
|
that format string in the `Data:' field.
|
1296 |
|
|
|
1297 |
|
|
You can inspect this data when analyzing the trace buffer, by
|
1298 |
|
|
printing the $_sdata variable like any other variable available to
|
1299 |
|
|
GDB. *Note Tracepoint Action Lists: Tracepoint Actions.
|
1300 |
|
|
|
1301 |
|
|
The convenience variable `$tpnum' records the tracepoint number of
|
1302 |
|
|
the most recently set tracepoint.
|
1303 |
|
|
|
1304 |
|
|
`delete tracepoint [NUM]'
|
1305 |
|
|
Permanently delete one or more tracepoints. With no argument, the
|
1306 |
|
|
default is to delete all tracepoints. Note that the regular
|
1307 |
|
|
`delete' command can remove tracepoints also.
|
1308 |
|
|
|
1309 |
|
|
Examples:
|
1310 |
|
|
|
1311 |
|
|
(gdb) delete trace 1 2 3 // remove three tracepoints
|
1312 |
|
|
|
1313 |
|
|
(gdb) delete trace // remove all tracepoints
|
1314 |
|
|
|
1315 |
|
|
You can abbreviate this command as `del tr'.
|
1316 |
|
|
|
1317 |
|
|
|
1318 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Enable and Disable Tracepoints, Next: Tracepoint Passcounts, Prev: Create and Delete Tracepoints, Up: Set Tracepoints
|
1319 |
|
|
|
1320 |
|
|
13.1.2 Enable and Disable Tracepoints
|
1321 |
|
|
-------------------------------------
|
1322 |
|
|
|
1323 |
|
|
These commands are deprecated; they are equivalent to plain `disable'
|
1324 |
|
|
and `enable'.
|
1325 |
|
|
|
1326 |
|
|
`disable tracepoint [NUM]'
|
1327 |
|
|
Disable tracepoint NUM, or all tracepoints if no argument NUM is
|
1328 |
|
|
given. A disabled tracepoint will have no effect during the next
|
1329 |
|
|
trace experiment, but it is not forgotten. You can re-enable a
|
1330 |
|
|
disabled tracepoint using the `enable tracepoint' command.
|
1331 |
|
|
|
1332 |
|
|
`enable tracepoint [NUM]'
|
1333 |
|
|
Enable tracepoint NUM, or all tracepoints. The enabled
|
1334 |
|
|
tracepoints will become effective the next time a trace experiment
|
1335 |
|
|
is run.
|
1336 |
|
|
|
1337 |
|
|
|
1338 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Tracepoint Passcounts, Next: Tracepoint Conditions, Prev: Enable and Disable Tracepoints, Up: Set Tracepoints
|
1339 |
|
|
|
1340 |
|
|
13.1.3 Tracepoint Passcounts
|
1341 |
|
|
----------------------------
|
1342 |
|
|
|
1343 |
|
|
`passcount [N [NUM]]'
|
1344 |
|
|
Set the "passcount" of a tracepoint. The passcount is a way to
|
1345 |
|
|
automatically stop a trace experiment. If a tracepoint's
|
1346 |
|
|
passcount is N, then the trace experiment will be automatically
|
1347 |
|
|
stopped on the N'th time that tracepoint is hit. If the
|
1348 |
|
|
tracepoint number NUM is not specified, the `passcount' command
|
1349 |
|
|
sets the passcount of the most recently defined tracepoint. If no
|
1350 |
|
|
passcount is given, the trace experiment will run until stopped
|
1351 |
|
|
explicitly by the user.
|
1352 |
|
|
|
1353 |
|
|
Examples:
|
1354 |
|
|
|
1355 |
|
|
(gdb) passcount 5 2 // Stop on the 5th execution of
|
1356 |
|
|
`// tracepoint 2'
|
1357 |
|
|
|
1358 |
|
|
(gdb) passcount 12 // Stop on the 12th execution of the
|
1359 |
|
|
`// most recently defined tracepoint.'
|
1360 |
|
|
(gdb) trace foo
|
1361 |
|
|
(gdb) pass 3
|
1362 |
|
|
(gdb) trace bar
|
1363 |
|
|
(gdb) pass 2
|
1364 |
|
|
(gdb) trace baz
|
1365 |
|
|
(gdb) pass 1 // Stop tracing when foo has been
|
1366 |
|
|
`// executed 3 times OR when bar has'
|
1367 |
|
|
`// been executed 2 times'
|
1368 |
|
|
`// OR when baz has been executed 1 time.'
|
1369 |
|
|
|
1370 |
|
|
|
1371 |
|
|
|
1372 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Tracepoint Conditions, Next: Trace State Variables, Prev: Tracepoint Passcounts, Up: Set Tracepoints
|
1373 |
|
|
|
1374 |
|
|
13.1.4 Tracepoint Conditions
|
1375 |
|
|
----------------------------
|
1376 |
|
|
|
1377 |
|
|
The simplest sort of tracepoint collects data every time your program
|
1378 |
|
|
reaches a specified place. You can also specify a "condition" for a
|
1379 |
|
|
tracepoint. A condition is just a Boolean expression in your
|
1380 |
|
|
programming language (*note Expressions: Expressions.). A tracepoint
|
1381 |
|
|
with a condition evaluates the expression each time your program
|
1382 |
|
|
reaches it, and data collection happens only if the condition is true.
|
1383 |
|
|
|
1384 |
|
|
Tracepoint conditions can be specified when a tracepoint is set, by
|
1385 |
|
|
using `if' in the arguments to the `trace' command. *Note Setting
|
1386 |
|
|
Tracepoints: Create and Delete Tracepoints. They can also be set or
|
1387 |
|
|
changed at any time with the `condition' command, just as with
|
1388 |
|
|
breakpoints.
|
1389 |
|
|
|
1390 |
|
|
Unlike breakpoint conditions, GDB does not actually evaluate the
|
1391 |
|
|
conditional expression itself. Instead, GDB encodes the expression
|
1392 |
|
|
into an agent expression (*note Agent Expressions:: suitable for
|
1393 |
|
|
execution on the target, independently of GDB. Global variables become
|
1394 |
|
|
raw memory locations, locals become stack accesses, and so forth.
|
1395 |
|
|
|
1396 |
|
|
For instance, suppose you have a function that is usually called
|
1397 |
|
|
frequently, but should not be called after an error has occurred. You
|
1398 |
|
|
could use the following tracepoint command to collect data about calls
|
1399 |
|
|
of that function that happen while the error code is propagating
|
1400 |
|
|
through the program; an unconditional tracepoint could end up
|
1401 |
|
|
collecting thousands of useless trace frames that you would have to
|
1402 |
|
|
search through.
|
1403 |
|
|
|
1404 |
|
|
(gdb) trace normal_operation if errcode > 0
|
1405 |
|
|
|
1406 |
|
|
|
1407 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Trace State Variables, Next: Tracepoint Actions, Prev: Tracepoint Conditions, Up: Set Tracepoints
|
1408 |
|
|
|
1409 |
|
|
13.1.5 Trace State Variables
|
1410 |
|
|
----------------------------
|
1411 |
|
|
|
1412 |
|
|
A "trace state variable" is a special type of variable that is created
|
1413 |
|
|
and managed by target-side code. The syntax is the same as that for
|
1414 |
|
|
GDB's convenience variables (a string prefixed with "$"), but they are
|
1415 |
|
|
stored on the target. They must be created explicitly, using a
|
1416 |
|
|
`tvariable' command. They are always 64-bit signed integers.
|
1417 |
|
|
|
1418 |
|
|
Trace state variables are remembered by GDB, and downloaded to the
|
1419 |
|
|
target along with tracepoint information when the trace experiment
|
1420 |
|
|
starts. There are no intrinsic limits on the number of trace state
|
1421 |
|
|
variables, beyond memory limitations of the target.
|
1422 |
|
|
|
1423 |
|
|
Although trace state variables are managed by the target, you can use
|
1424 |
|
|
them in print commands and expressions as if they were convenience
|
1425 |
|
|
variables; GDB will get the current value from the target while the
|
1426 |
|
|
trace experiment is running. Trace state variables share the same
|
1427 |
|
|
namespace as other "$" variables, which means that you cannot have
|
1428 |
|
|
trace state variables with names like `$23' or `$pc', nor can you have
|
1429 |
|
|
a trace state variable and a convenience variable with the same name.
|
1430 |
|
|
|
1431 |
|
|
`tvariable $NAME [ = EXPRESSION ]'
|
1432 |
|
|
The `tvariable' command creates a new trace state variable named
|
1433 |
|
|
`$NAME', and optionally gives it an initial value of EXPRESSION.
|
1434 |
|
|
EXPRESSION is evaluated when this command is entered; the result
|
1435 |
|
|
will be converted to an integer if possible, otherwise GDB will
|
1436 |
|
|
report an error. A subsequent `tvariable' command specifying the
|
1437 |
|
|
same name does not create a variable, but instead assigns the
|
1438 |
|
|
supplied initial value to the existing variable of that name,
|
1439 |
|
|
overwriting any previous initial value. The default initial value
|
1440 |
|
|
is 0.
|
1441 |
|
|
|
1442 |
|
|
`info tvariables'
|
1443 |
|
|
List all the trace state variables along with their initial values.
|
1444 |
|
|
Their current values may also be displayed, if the trace
|
1445 |
|
|
experiment is currently running.
|
1446 |
|
|
|
1447 |
|
|
`delete tvariable [ $NAME ... ]'
|
1448 |
|
|
Delete the given trace state variables, or all of them if no
|
1449 |
|
|
arguments are specified.
|
1450 |
|
|
|
1451 |
|
|
|
1452 |
|
|
|
1453 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Tracepoint Actions, Next: Listing Tracepoints, Prev: Trace State Variables, Up: Set Tracepoints
|
1454 |
|
|
|
1455 |
|
|
13.1.6 Tracepoint Action Lists
|
1456 |
|
|
------------------------------
|
1457 |
|
|
|
1458 |
|
|
`actions [NUM]'
|
1459 |
|
|
This command will prompt for a list of actions to be taken when the
|
1460 |
|
|
tracepoint is hit. If the tracepoint number NUM is not specified,
|
1461 |
|
|
this command sets the actions for the one that was most recently
|
1462 |
|
|
defined (so that you can define a tracepoint and then say
|
1463 |
|
|
`actions' without bothering about its number). You specify the
|
1464 |
|
|
actions themselves on the following lines, one action at a time,
|
1465 |
|
|
and terminate the actions list with a line containing just `end'.
|
1466 |
|
|
So far, the only defined actions are `collect', `teval', and
|
1467 |
|
|
`while-stepping'.
|
1468 |
|
|
|
1469 |
|
|
`actions' is actually equivalent to `commands' (*note Breakpoint
|
1470 |
|
|
Command Lists: Break Commands.), except that only the defined
|
1471 |
|
|
actions are allowed; any other GDB command is rejected.
|
1472 |
|
|
|
1473 |
|
|
To remove all actions from a tracepoint, type `actions NUM' and
|
1474 |
|
|
follow it immediately with `end'.
|
1475 |
|
|
|
1476 |
|
|
(gdb) collect DATA // collect some data
|
1477 |
|
|
|
1478 |
|
|
(gdb) while-stepping 5 // single-step 5 times, collect data
|
1479 |
|
|
|
1480 |
|
|
(gdb) end // signals the end of actions.
|
1481 |
|
|
|
1482 |
|
|
In the following example, the action list begins with `collect'
|
1483 |
|
|
commands indicating the things to be collected when the tracepoint
|
1484 |
|
|
is hit. Then, in order to single-step and collect additional data
|
1485 |
|
|
following the tracepoint, a `while-stepping' command is used,
|
1486 |
|
|
followed by the list of things to be collected after each step in a
|
1487 |
|
|
sequence of single steps. The `while-stepping' command is
|
1488 |
|
|
terminated by its own separate `end' command. Lastly, the action
|
1489 |
|
|
list is terminated by an `end' command.
|
1490 |
|
|
|
1491 |
|
|
(gdb) trace foo
|
1492 |
|
|
(gdb) actions
|
1493 |
|
|
Enter actions for tracepoint 1, one per line:
|
1494 |
|
|
> collect bar,baz
|
1495 |
|
|
> collect $regs
|
1496 |
|
|
> while-stepping 12
|
1497 |
|
|
> collect $pc, arr[i]
|
1498 |
|
|
> end
|
1499 |
|
|
end
|
1500 |
|
|
|
1501 |
|
|
`collect EXPR1, EXPR2, ...'
|
1502 |
|
|
Collect values of the given expressions when the tracepoint is hit.
|
1503 |
|
|
This command accepts a comma-separated list of any valid
|
1504 |
|
|
expressions. In addition to global, static, or local variables,
|
1505 |
|
|
the following special arguments are supported:
|
1506 |
|
|
|
1507 |
|
|
`$regs'
|
1508 |
|
|
Collect all registers.
|
1509 |
|
|
|
1510 |
|
|
`$args'
|
1511 |
|
|
Collect all function arguments.
|
1512 |
|
|
|
1513 |
|
|
`$locals'
|
1514 |
|
|
Collect all local variables.
|
1515 |
|
|
|
1516 |
|
|
`$_sdata'
|
1517 |
|
|
Collect static tracepoint marker specific data. Only
|
1518 |
|
|
available for static tracepoints. *Note Tracepoint Action
|
1519 |
|
|
Lists: Tracepoint Actions. On the UST static tracepoints
|
1520 |
|
|
library backend, an instrumentation point resembles a
|
1521 |
|
|
`printf' function call. The tracing library is able to
|
1522 |
|
|
collect user specified data formatted to a character string
|
1523 |
|
|
using the format provided by the programmer that instrumented
|
1524 |
|
|
the program. Other backends have similar mechanisms. Here's
|
1525 |
|
|
an example of a UST marker call:
|
1526 |
|
|
|
1527 |
|
|
const char master_name[] = "$your_name";
|
1528 |
|
|
trace_mark(channel1, marker1, "hello %s", master_name)
|
1529 |
|
|
|
1530 |
|
|
In this case, collecting `$_sdata' collects the string `hello
|
1531 |
|
|
$yourname'. When analyzing the trace buffer, you can inspect
|
1532 |
|
|
`$_sdata' like any other variable available to GDB.
|
1533 |
|
|
|
1534 |
|
|
You can give several consecutive `collect' commands, each one with
|
1535 |
|
|
a single argument, or one `collect' command with several arguments
|
1536 |
|
|
separated by commas; the effect is the same.
|
1537 |
|
|
|
1538 |
|
|
The command `info scope' (*note info scope: Symbols.) is
|
1539 |
|
|
particularly useful for figuring out what data to collect.
|
1540 |
|
|
|
1541 |
|
|
`teval EXPR1, EXPR2, ...'
|
1542 |
|
|
Evaluate the given expressions when the tracepoint is hit. This
|
1543 |
|
|
command accepts a comma-separated list of expressions. The results
|
1544 |
|
|
are discarded, so this is mainly useful for assigning values to
|
1545 |
|
|
trace state variables (*note Trace State Variables::) without
|
1546 |
|
|
adding those values to the trace buffer, as would be the case if
|
1547 |
|
|
the `collect' action were used.
|
1548 |
|
|
|
1549 |
|
|
`while-stepping N'
|
1550 |
|
|
Perform N single-step instruction traces after the tracepoint,
|
1551 |
|
|
collecting new data after each step. The `while-stepping' command
|
1552 |
|
|
is followed by the list of what to collect while stepping
|
1553 |
|
|
(followed by its own `end' command):
|
1554 |
|
|
|
1555 |
|
|
> while-stepping 12
|
1556 |
|
|
> collect $regs, myglobal
|
1557 |
|
|
> end
|
1558 |
|
|
>
|
1559 |
|
|
|
1560 |
|
|
Note that `$pc' is not automatically collected by
|
1561 |
|
|
`while-stepping'; you need to explicitly collect that register if
|
1562 |
|
|
you need it. You may abbreviate `while-stepping' as `ws' or
|
1563 |
|
|
`stepping'.
|
1564 |
|
|
|
1565 |
|
|
`set default-collect EXPR1, EXPR2, ...'
|
1566 |
|
|
This variable is a list of expressions to collect at each
|
1567 |
|
|
tracepoint hit. It is effectively an additional `collect' action
|
1568 |
|
|
prepended to every tracepoint action list. The expressions are
|
1569 |
|
|
parsed individually for each tracepoint, so for instance a
|
1570 |
|
|
variable named `xyz' may be interpreted as a global for one
|
1571 |
|
|
tracepoint, and a local for another, as appropriate to the
|
1572 |
|
|
tracepoint's location.
|
1573 |
|
|
|
1574 |
|
|
`show default-collect'
|
1575 |
|
|
Show the list of expressions that are collected by default at each
|
1576 |
|
|
tracepoint hit.
|
1577 |
|
|
|
1578 |
|
|
|
1579 |
|
|
|
1580 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Listing Tracepoints, Next: Listing Static Tracepoint Markers, Prev: Tracepoint Actions, Up: Set Tracepoints
|
1581 |
|
|
|
1582 |
|
|
13.1.7 Listing Tracepoints
|
1583 |
|
|
--------------------------
|
1584 |
|
|
|
1585 |
|
|
`info tracepoints [NUM]'
|
1586 |
|
|
Display information about the tracepoint NUM. If you don't
|
1587 |
|
|
specify a tracepoint number, displays information about all the
|
1588 |
|
|
tracepoints defined so far. The format is similar to that used for
|
1589 |
|
|
`info breakpoints'; in fact, `info tracepoints' is the same
|
1590 |
|
|
command, simply restricting itself to tracepoints.
|
1591 |
|
|
|
1592 |
|
|
A tracepoint's listing may include additional information specific
|
1593 |
|
|
to tracing:
|
1594 |
|
|
|
1595 |
|
|
* its passcount as given by the `passcount N' command
|
1596 |
|
|
|
1597 |
|
|
(gdb) info trace
|
1598 |
|
|
Num Type Disp Enb Address What
|
1599 |
|
|
1 tracepoint keep y 0x0804ab57 in foo() at main.cxx:7
|
1600 |
|
|
while-stepping 20
|
1601 |
|
|
collect globfoo, $regs
|
1602 |
|
|
end
|
1603 |
|
|
collect globfoo2
|
1604 |
|
|
end
|
1605 |
|
|
pass count 1200
|
1606 |
|
|
(gdb)
|
1607 |
|
|
|
1608 |
|
|
This command can be abbreviated `info tp'.
|
1609 |
|
|
|
1610 |
|
|
|
1611 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Listing Static Tracepoint Markers, Next: Starting and Stopping Trace Experiments, Prev: Listing Tracepoints, Up: Set Tracepoints
|
1612 |
|
|
|
1613 |
|
|
13.1.8 Listing Static Tracepoint Markers
|
1614 |
|
|
----------------------------------------
|
1615 |
|
|
|
1616 |
|
|
`info static-tracepoint-markers'
|
1617 |
|
|
Display information about all static tracepoint markers defined in
|
1618 |
|
|
the program.
|
1619 |
|
|
|
1620 |
|
|
For each marker, the following columns are printed:
|
1621 |
|
|
|
1622 |
|
|
_Count_
|
1623 |
|
|
An incrementing counter, output to help readability. This is
|
1624 |
|
|
not a stable identifier.
|
1625 |
|
|
|
1626 |
|
|
_ID_
|
1627 |
|
|
The marker ID, as reported by the target.
|
1628 |
|
|
|
1629 |
|
|
_Enabled or Disabled_
|
1630 |
|
|
Probed markers are tagged with `y'. `n' identifies marks
|
1631 |
|
|
that are not enabled.
|
1632 |
|
|
|
1633 |
|
|
_Address_
|
1634 |
|
|
Where the marker is in your program, as a memory address.
|
1635 |
|
|
|
1636 |
|
|
_What_
|
1637 |
|
|
Where the marker is in the source for your program, as a file
|
1638 |
|
|
and line number. If the debug information included in the
|
1639 |
|
|
program does not allow GDB to locate the source of the
|
1640 |
|
|
marker, this column will be left blank.
|
1641 |
|
|
|
1642 |
|
|
In addition, the following information may be printed for each
|
1643 |
|
|
marker:
|
1644 |
|
|
|
1645 |
|
|
_Data_
|
1646 |
|
|
User data passed to the tracing library by the marker call.
|
1647 |
|
|
In the UST backend, this is the format string passed as
|
1648 |
|
|
argument to the marker call.
|
1649 |
|
|
|
1650 |
|
|
_Static tracepoints probing the marker_
|
1651 |
|
|
The list of static tracepoints attached to the marker.
|
1652 |
|
|
|
1653 |
|
|
(gdb) info static-tracepoint-markers
|
1654 |
|
|
Cnt ID Enb Address What
|
1655 |
|
|
1 ust/bar2 y 0x0000000000400e1a in main at stexample.c:25
|
1656 |
|
|
Data: number1 %d number2 %d
|
1657 |
|
|
Probed by static tracepoints: #2
|
1658 |
|
|
2 ust/bar33 n 0x0000000000400c87 in main at stexample.c:24
|
1659 |
|
|
Data: str %s
|
1660 |
|
|
(gdb)
|
1661 |
|
|
|
1662 |
|
|
|
1663 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Starting and Stopping Trace Experiments, Next: Tracepoint Restrictions, Prev: Listing Static Tracepoint Markers, Up: Set Tracepoints
|
1664 |
|
|
|
1665 |
|
|
13.1.9 Starting and Stopping Trace Experiments
|
1666 |
|
|
----------------------------------------------
|
1667 |
|
|
|
1668 |
|
|
`tstart'
|
1669 |
|
|
This command takes no arguments. It starts the trace experiment,
|
1670 |
|
|
and begins collecting data. This has the side effect of
|
1671 |
|
|
discarding all the data collected in the trace buffer during the
|
1672 |
|
|
previous trace experiment.
|
1673 |
|
|
|
1674 |
|
|
`tstop'
|
1675 |
|
|
This command takes no arguments. It ends the trace experiment, and
|
1676 |
|
|
stops collecting data.
|
1677 |
|
|
|
1678 |
|
|
*Note*: a trace experiment and data collection may stop
|
1679 |
|
|
automatically if any tracepoint's passcount is reached (*note
|
1680 |
|
|
Tracepoint Passcounts::), or if the trace buffer becomes full.
|
1681 |
|
|
|
1682 |
|
|
`tstatus'
|
1683 |
|
|
This command displays the status of the current trace data
|
1684 |
|
|
collection.
|
1685 |
|
|
|
1686 |
|
|
Here is an example of the commands we described so far:
|
1687 |
|
|
|
1688 |
|
|
(gdb) trace gdb_c_test
|
1689 |
|
|
(gdb) actions
|
1690 |
|
|
Enter actions for tracepoint #1, one per line.
|
1691 |
|
|
> collect $regs,$locals,$args
|
1692 |
|
|
> while-stepping 11
|
1693 |
|
|
> collect $regs
|
1694 |
|
|
> end
|
1695 |
|
|
> end
|
1696 |
|
|
(gdb) tstart
|
1697 |
|
|
[time passes ...]
|
1698 |
|
|
(gdb) tstop
|
1699 |
|
|
|
1700 |
|
|
You can choose to continue running the trace experiment even if GDB
|
1701 |
|
|
disconnects from the target, voluntarily or involuntarily. For
|
1702 |
|
|
commands such as `detach', the debugger will ask what you want to do
|
1703 |
|
|
with the trace. But for unexpected terminations (GDB crash, network
|
1704 |
|
|
outage), it would be unfortunate to lose hard-won trace data, so the
|
1705 |
|
|
variable `disconnected-tracing' lets you decide whether the trace should
|
1706 |
|
|
continue running without GDB.
|
1707 |
|
|
|
1708 |
|
|
`set disconnected-tracing on'
|
1709 |
|
|
`set disconnected-tracing off'
|
1710 |
|
|
Choose whether a tracing run should continue to run if GDB has
|
1711 |
|
|
disconnected from the target. Note that `detach' or `quit' will
|
1712 |
|
|
ask you directly what to do about a running trace no matter what
|
1713 |
|
|
this variable's setting, so the variable is mainly useful for
|
1714 |
|
|
handling unexpected situations, such as loss of the network.
|
1715 |
|
|
|
1716 |
|
|
`show disconnected-tracing'
|
1717 |
|
|
Show the current choice for disconnected tracing.
|
1718 |
|
|
|
1719 |
|
|
|
1720 |
|
|
When you reconnect to the target, the trace experiment may or may not
|
1721 |
|
|
still be running; it might have filled the trace buffer in the
|
1722 |
|
|
meantime, or stopped for one of the other reasons. If it is running,
|
1723 |
|
|
it will continue after reconnection.
|
1724 |
|
|
|
1725 |
|
|
Upon reconnection, the target will upload information about the
|
1726 |
|
|
tracepoints in effect. GDB will then compare that information to the
|
1727 |
|
|
set of tracepoints currently defined, and attempt to match them up,
|
1728 |
|
|
allowing for the possibility that the numbers may have changed due to
|
1729 |
|
|
creation and deletion in the meantime. If one of the target's
|
1730 |
|
|
tracepoints does not match any in GDB, the debugger will create a new
|
1731 |
|
|
tracepoint, so that you have a number with which to specify that
|
1732 |
|
|
tracepoint. This matching-up process is necessarily heuristic, and it
|
1733 |
|
|
may result in useless tracepoints being created; you may simply delete
|
1734 |
|
|
them if they are of no use.
|
1735 |
|
|
|
1736 |
|
|
If your target agent supports a "circular trace buffer", then you
|
1737 |
|
|
can run a trace experiment indefinitely without filling the trace
|
1738 |
|
|
buffer; when space runs out, the agent deletes already-collected trace
|
1739 |
|
|
frames, oldest first, until there is enough room to continue
|
1740 |
|
|
collecting. This is especially useful if your tracepoints are being
|
1741 |
|
|
hit too often, and your trace gets terminated prematurely because the
|
1742 |
|
|
buffer is full. To ask for a circular trace buffer, simply set
|
1743 |
|
|
`circular_trace_buffer' to on. You can set this at any time, including
|
1744 |
|
|
during tracing; if the agent can do it, it will change buffer handling
|
1745 |
|
|
on the fly, otherwise it will not take effect until the next run.
|
1746 |
|
|
|
1747 |
|
|
`set circular-trace-buffer on'
|
1748 |
|
|
`set circular-trace-buffer off'
|
1749 |
|
|
Choose whether a tracing run should use a linear or circular buffer
|
1750 |
|
|
for trace data. A linear buffer will not lose any trace data, but
|
1751 |
|
|
may fill up prematurely, while a circular buffer will discard old
|
1752 |
|
|
trace data, but it will have always room for the latest tracepoint
|
1753 |
|
|
hits.
|
1754 |
|
|
|
1755 |
|
|
`show circular-trace-buffer'
|
1756 |
|
|
Show the current choice for the trace buffer. Note that this may
|
1757 |
|
|
not match the agent's current buffer handling, nor is it
|
1758 |
|
|
guaranteed to match the setting that might have been in effect
|
1759 |
|
|
during a past run, for instance if you are looking at frames from
|
1760 |
|
|
a trace file.
|
1761 |
|
|
|
1762 |
|
|
|
1763 |
|
|
|
1764 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Tracepoint Restrictions, Prev: Starting and Stopping Trace Experiments, Up: Set Tracepoints
|
1765 |
|
|
|
1766 |
|
|
13.1.10 Tracepoint Restrictions
|
1767 |
|
|
-------------------------------
|
1768 |
|
|
|
1769 |
|
|
There are a number of restrictions on the use of tracepoints. As
|
1770 |
|
|
described above, tracepoint data gathering occurs on the target without
|
1771 |
|
|
interaction from GDB. Thus the full capabilities of the debugger are
|
1772 |
|
|
not available during data gathering, and then at data examination time,
|
1773 |
|
|
you will be limited by only having what was collected. The following
|
1774 |
|
|
items describe some common problems, but it is not exhaustive, and you
|
1775 |
|
|
may run into additional difficulties not mentioned here.
|
1776 |
|
|
|
1777 |
|
|
* Tracepoint expressions are intended to gather objects (lvalues).
|
1778 |
|
|
Thus the full flexibility of GDB's expression evaluator is not
|
1779 |
|
|
available. You cannot call functions, cast objects to aggregate
|
1780 |
|
|
types, access convenience variables or modify values (except by
|
1781 |
|
|
assignment to trace state variables). Some language features may
|
1782 |
|
|
implicitly call functions (for instance Objective-C fields with
|
1783 |
|
|
accessors), and therefore cannot be collected either.
|
1784 |
|
|
|
1785 |
|
|
* Collection of local variables, either individually or in bulk with
|
1786 |
|
|
`$locals' or `$args', during `while-stepping' may behave
|
1787 |
|
|
erratically. The stepping action may enter a new scope (for
|
1788 |
|
|
instance by stepping into a function), or the location of the
|
1789 |
|
|
variable may change (for instance it is loaded into a register).
|
1790 |
|
|
The tracepoint data recorded uses the location information for the
|
1791 |
|
|
variables that is correct for the tracepoint location. When the
|
1792 |
|
|
tracepoint is created, it is not possible, in general, to determine
|
1793 |
|
|
where the steps of a `while-stepping' sequence will advance the
|
1794 |
|
|
program--particularly if a conditional branch is stepped.
|
1795 |
|
|
|
1796 |
|
|
* Collection of an incompletely-initialized or partially-destroyed
|
1797 |
|
|
object may result in something that GDB cannot display, or displays
|
1798 |
|
|
in a misleading way.
|
1799 |
|
|
|
1800 |
|
|
* When GDB displays a pointer to character it automatically
|
1801 |
|
|
dereferences the pointer to also display characters of the string
|
1802 |
|
|
being pointed to. However, collecting the pointer during tracing
|
1803 |
|
|
does not automatically collect the string. You need to explicitly
|
1804 |
|
|
dereference the pointer and provide size information if you want to
|
1805 |
|
|
collect not only the pointer, but the memory pointed to. For
|
1806 |
|
|
example, `*ptr@50' can be used to collect the 50 element array
|
1807 |
|
|
pointed to by `ptr'.
|
1808 |
|
|
|
1809 |
|
|
* It is not possible to collect a complete stack backtrace at a
|
1810 |
|
|
tracepoint. Instead, you may collect the registers and a few
|
1811 |
|
|
hundred bytes from the stack pointer with something like
|
1812 |
|
|
`*$esp@300' (adjust to use the name of the actual stack pointer
|
1813 |
|
|
register on your target architecture, and the amount of stack you
|
1814 |
|
|
wish to capture). Then the `backtrace' command will show a
|
1815 |
|
|
partial backtrace when using a trace frame. The number of stack
|
1816 |
|
|
frames that can be examined depends on the sizes of the frames in
|
1817 |
|
|
the collected stack. Note that if you ask for a block so large
|
1818 |
|
|
that it goes past the bottom of the stack, the target agent may
|
1819 |
|
|
report an error trying to read from an invalid address.
|
1820 |
|
|
|
1821 |
|
|
* If you do not collect registers at a tracepoint, GDB can infer
|
1822 |
|
|
that the value of `$pc' must be the same as the address of the
|
1823 |
|
|
tracepoint and use that when you are looking at a trace frame for
|
1824 |
|
|
that tracepoint. However, this cannot work if the tracepoint has
|
1825 |
|
|
multiple locations (for instance if it was set in a function that
|
1826 |
|
|
was inlined), or if it has a `while-stepping' loop. In those cases
|
1827 |
|
|
GDB will warn you that it can't infer `$pc', and default it to
|
1828 |
|
|
zero.
|
1829 |
|
|
|
1830 |
|
|
|
1831 |
|
|
|
1832 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Analyze Collected Data, Next: Tracepoint Variables, Prev: Set Tracepoints, Up: Tracepoints
|
1833 |
|
|
|
1834 |
|
|
13.2 Using the Collected Data
|
1835 |
|
|
=============================
|
1836 |
|
|
|
1837 |
|
|
After the tracepoint experiment ends, you use GDB commands for
|
1838 |
|
|
examining the trace data. The basic idea is that each tracepoint
|
1839 |
|
|
collects a trace "snapshot" every time it is hit and another snapshot
|
1840 |
|
|
every time it single-steps. All these snapshots are consecutively
|
1841 |
|
|
numbered from zero and go into a buffer, and you can examine them
|
1842 |
|
|
later. The way you examine them is to "focus" on a specific trace
|
1843 |
|
|
snapshot. When the remote stub is focused on a trace snapshot, it will
|
1844 |
|
|
respond to all GDB requests for memory and registers by reading from
|
1845 |
|
|
the buffer which belongs to that snapshot, rather than from _real_
|
1846 |
|
|
memory or registers of the program being debugged. This means that
|
1847 |
|
|
*all* GDB commands (`print', `info registers', `backtrace', etc.) will
|
1848 |
|
|
behave as if we were currently debugging the program state as it was
|
1849 |
|
|
when the tracepoint occurred. Any requests for data that are not in
|
1850 |
|
|
the buffer will fail.
|
1851 |
|
|
|
1852 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
1853 |
|
|
|
1854 |
|
|
* tfind:: How to select a trace snapshot
|
1855 |
|
|
* tdump:: How to display all data for a snapshot
|
1856 |
|
|
* save tracepoints:: How to save tracepoints for a future run
|
1857 |
|
|
|
1858 |
|
|
|
1859 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: tfind, Next: tdump, Up: Analyze Collected Data
|
1860 |
|
|
|
1861 |
|
|
13.2.1 `tfind N'
|
1862 |
|
|
----------------
|
1863 |
|
|
|
1864 |
|
|
The basic command for selecting a trace snapshot from the buffer is
|
1865 |
|
|
`tfind N', which finds trace snapshot number N, counting from zero. If
|
1866 |
|
|
no argument N is given, the next snapshot is selected.
|
1867 |
|
|
|
1868 |
|
|
Here are the various forms of using the `tfind' command.
|
1869 |
|
|
|
1870 |
|
|
`tfind start'
|
1871 |
|
|
Find the first snapshot in the buffer. This is a synonym for
|
1872 |
|
|
`tfind 0' (since 0 is the number of the first snapshot).
|
1873 |
|
|
|
1874 |
|
|
`tfind none'
|
1875 |
|
|
Stop debugging trace snapshots, resume _live_ debugging.
|
1876 |
|
|
|
1877 |
|
|
`tfind end'
|
1878 |
|
|
Same as `tfind none'.
|
1879 |
|
|
|
1880 |
|
|
`tfind'
|
1881 |
|
|
No argument means find the next trace snapshot.
|
1882 |
|
|
|
1883 |
|
|
`tfind -'
|
1884 |
|
|
Find the previous trace snapshot before the current one. This
|
1885 |
|
|
permits retracing earlier steps.
|
1886 |
|
|
|
1887 |
|
|
`tfind tracepoint NUM'
|
1888 |
|
|
Find the next snapshot associated with tracepoint NUM. Search
|
1889 |
|
|
proceeds forward from the last examined trace snapshot. If no
|
1890 |
|
|
argument NUM is given, it means find the next snapshot collected
|
1891 |
|
|
for the same tracepoint as the current snapshot.
|
1892 |
|
|
|
1893 |
|
|
`tfind pc ADDR'
|
1894 |
|
|
Find the next snapshot associated with the value ADDR of the
|
1895 |
|
|
program counter. Search proceeds forward from the last examined
|
1896 |
|
|
trace snapshot. If no argument ADDR is given, it means find the
|
1897 |
|
|
next snapshot with the same value of PC as the current snapshot.
|
1898 |
|
|
|
1899 |
|
|
`tfind outside ADDR1, ADDR2'
|
1900 |
|
|
Find the next snapshot whose PC is outside the given range of
|
1901 |
|
|
addresses (exclusive).
|
1902 |
|
|
|
1903 |
|
|
`tfind range ADDR1, ADDR2'
|
1904 |
|
|
Find the next snapshot whose PC is between ADDR1 and ADDR2
|
1905 |
|
|
(inclusive).
|
1906 |
|
|
|
1907 |
|
|
`tfind line [FILE:]N'
|
1908 |
|
|
Find the next snapshot associated with the source line N. If the
|
1909 |
|
|
optional argument FILE is given, refer to line N in that source
|
1910 |
|
|
file. Search proceeds forward from the last examined trace
|
1911 |
|
|
snapshot. If no argument N is given, it means find the next line
|
1912 |
|
|
other than the one currently being examined; thus saying `tfind
|
1913 |
|
|
line' repeatedly can appear to have the same effect as stepping
|
1914 |
|
|
from line to line in a _live_ debugging session.
|
1915 |
|
|
|
1916 |
|
|
The default arguments for the `tfind' commands are specifically
|
1917 |
|
|
designed to make it easy to scan through the trace buffer. For
|
1918 |
|
|
instance, `tfind' with no argument selects the next trace snapshot, and
|
1919 |
|
|
`tfind -' with no argument selects the previous trace snapshot. So, by
|
1920 |
|
|
giving one `tfind' command, and then simply hitting repeatedly
|
1921 |
|
|
you can examine all the trace snapshots in order. Or, by saying `tfind
|
1922 |
|
|
-' and then hitting repeatedly you can examine the snapshots in
|
1923 |
|
|
reverse order. The `tfind line' command with no argument selects the
|
1924 |
|
|
snapshot for the next source line executed. The `tfind pc' command with
|
1925 |
|
|
no argument selects the next snapshot with the same program counter
|
1926 |
|
|
(PC) as the current frame. The `tfind tracepoint' command with no
|
1927 |
|
|
argument selects the next trace snapshot collected by the same
|
1928 |
|
|
tracepoint as the current one.
|
1929 |
|
|
|
1930 |
|
|
In addition to letting you scan through the trace buffer manually,
|
1931 |
|
|
these commands make it easy to construct GDB scripts that scan through
|
1932 |
|
|
the trace buffer and print out whatever collected data you are
|
1933 |
|
|
interested in. Thus, if we want to examine the PC, FP, and SP
|
1934 |
|
|
registers from each trace frame in the buffer, we can say this:
|
1935 |
|
|
|
1936 |
|
|
(gdb) tfind start
|
1937 |
|
|
(gdb) while ($trace_frame != -1)
|
1938 |
|
|
> printf "Frame %d, PC = %08X, SP = %08X, FP = %08X\n", \
|
1939 |
|
|
$trace_frame, $pc, $sp, $fp
|
1940 |
|
|
> tfind
|
1941 |
|
|
> end
|
1942 |
|
|
|
1943 |
|
|
Frame 0, PC = 0020DC64, SP = 0030BF3C, FP = 0030BF44
|
1944 |
|
|
Frame 1, PC = 0020DC6C, SP = 0030BF38, FP = 0030BF44
|
1945 |
|
|
Frame 2, PC = 0020DC70, SP = 0030BF34, FP = 0030BF44
|
1946 |
|
|
Frame 3, PC = 0020DC74, SP = 0030BF30, FP = 0030BF44
|
1947 |
|
|
Frame 4, PC = 0020DC78, SP = 0030BF2C, FP = 0030BF44
|
1948 |
|
|
Frame 5, PC = 0020DC7C, SP = 0030BF28, FP = 0030BF44
|
1949 |
|
|
Frame 6, PC = 0020DC80, SP = 0030BF24, FP = 0030BF44
|
1950 |
|
|
Frame 7, PC = 0020DC84, SP = 0030BF20, FP = 0030BF44
|
1951 |
|
|
Frame 8, PC = 0020DC88, SP = 0030BF1C, FP = 0030BF44
|
1952 |
|
|
Frame 9, PC = 0020DC8E, SP = 0030BF18, FP = 0030BF44
|
1953 |
|
|
Frame 10, PC = 00203F6C, SP = 0030BE3C, FP = 0030BF14
|
1954 |
|
|
|
1955 |
|
|
Or, if we want to examine the variable `X' at each source line in
|
1956 |
|
|
the buffer:
|
1957 |
|
|
|
1958 |
|
|
(gdb) tfind start
|
1959 |
|
|
(gdb) while ($trace_frame != -1)
|
1960 |
|
|
> printf "Frame %d, X == %d\n", $trace_frame, X
|
1961 |
|
|
> tfind line
|
1962 |
|
|
> end
|
1963 |
|
|
|
1964 |
|
|
Frame 0, X = 1
|
1965 |
|
|
Frame 7, X = 2
|
1966 |
|
|
Frame 13, X = 255
|
1967 |
|
|
|
1968 |
|
|
|
1969 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: tdump, Next: save tracepoints, Prev: tfind, Up: Analyze Collected Data
|
1970 |
|
|
|
1971 |
|
|
13.2.2 `tdump'
|
1972 |
|
|
--------------
|
1973 |
|
|
|
1974 |
|
|
This command takes no arguments. It prints all the data collected at
|
1975 |
|
|
the current trace snapshot.
|
1976 |
|
|
|
1977 |
|
|
(gdb) trace 444
|
1978 |
|
|
(gdb) actions
|
1979 |
|
|
Enter actions for tracepoint #2, one per line:
|
1980 |
|
|
> collect $regs, $locals, $args, gdb_long_test
|
1981 |
|
|
> end
|
1982 |
|
|
|
1983 |
|
|
(gdb) tstart
|
1984 |
|
|
|
1985 |
|
|
(gdb) tfind line 444
|
1986 |
|
|
#0 gdb_test (p1=0x11, p2=0x22, p3=0x33, p4=0x44, p5=0x55, p6=0x66)
|
1987 |
|
|
at gdb_test.c:444
|
1988 |
|
|
444 printp( "%s: arguments = 0x%X 0x%X 0x%X 0x%X 0x%X 0x%X\n", )
|
1989 |
|
|
|
1990 |
|
|
(gdb) tdump
|
1991 |
|
|
Data collected at tracepoint 2, trace frame 1:
|
1992 |
|
|
d0 0xc4aa0085 -995491707
|
1993 |
|
|
d1 0x18 24
|
1994 |
|
|
d2 0x80 128
|
1995 |
|
|
d3 0x33 51
|
1996 |
|
|
d4 0x71aea3d 119204413
|
1997 |
|
|
d5 0x22 34
|
1998 |
|
|
d6 0xe0 224
|
1999 |
|
|
d7 0x380035 3670069
|
2000 |
|
|
a0 0x19e24a 1696330
|
2001 |
|
|
a1 0x3000668 50333288
|
2002 |
|
|
a2 0x100 256
|
2003 |
|
|
a3 0x322000 3284992
|
2004 |
|
|
a4 0x3000698 50333336
|
2005 |
|
|
a5 0x1ad3cc 1758156
|
2006 |
|
|
fp 0x30bf3c 0x30bf3c
|
2007 |
|
|
sp 0x30bf34 0x30bf34
|
2008 |
|
|
ps 0x0 0
|
2009 |
|
|
pc 0x20b2c8 0x20b2c8
|
2010 |
|
|
fpcontrol 0x0 0
|
2011 |
|
|
fpstatus 0x0 0
|
2012 |
|
|
fpiaddr 0x0 0
|
2013 |
|
|
p = 0x20e5b4 "gdb-test"
|
2014 |
|
|
p1 = (void *) 0x11
|
2015 |
|
|
p2 = (void *) 0x22
|
2016 |
|
|
p3 = (void *) 0x33
|
2017 |
|
|
p4 = (void *) 0x44
|
2018 |
|
|
p5 = (void *) 0x55
|
2019 |
|
|
p6 = (void *) 0x66
|
2020 |
|
|
gdb_long_test = 17 '\021'
|
2021 |
|
|
|
2022 |
|
|
(gdb)
|
2023 |
|
|
|
2024 |
|
|
`tdump' works by scanning the tracepoint's current collection
|
2025 |
|
|
actions and printing the value of each expression listed. So `tdump'
|
2026 |
|
|
can fail, if after a run, you change the tracepoint's actions to
|
2027 |
|
|
mention variables that were not collected during the run.
|
2028 |
|
|
|
2029 |
|
|
Also, for tracepoints with `while-stepping' loops, `tdump' uses the
|
2030 |
|
|
collected value of `$pc' to distinguish between trace frames that were
|
2031 |
|
|
collected at the tracepoint hit, and frames that were collected while
|
2032 |
|
|
stepping. This allows it to correctly choose whether to display the
|
2033 |
|
|
basic list of collections, or the collections from the body of the
|
2034 |
|
|
while-stepping loop. However, if `$pc' was not collected, then `tdump'
|
2035 |
|
|
will always attempt to dump using the basic collection list, and may
|
2036 |
|
|
fail if a while-stepping frame does not include all the same data that
|
2037 |
|
|
is collected at the tracepoint hit.
|
2038 |
|
|
|
2039 |
|
|
|
2040 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: save tracepoints, Prev: tdump, Up: Analyze Collected Data
|
2041 |
|
|
|
2042 |
|
|
13.2.3 `save tracepoints FILENAME'
|
2043 |
|
|
----------------------------------
|
2044 |
|
|
|
2045 |
|
|
This command saves all current tracepoint definitions together with
|
2046 |
|
|
their actions and passcounts, into a file `FILENAME' suitable for use
|
2047 |
|
|
in a later debugging session. To read the saved tracepoint
|
2048 |
|
|
definitions, use the `source' command (*note Command Files::). The
|
2049 |
|
|
`save-tracepoints' command is a deprecated alias for `save tracepoints'
|
2050 |
|
|
|
2051 |
|
|
|
2052 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Tracepoint Variables, Next: Trace Files, Prev: Analyze Collected Data, Up: Tracepoints
|
2053 |
|
|
|
2054 |
|
|
13.3 Convenience Variables for Tracepoints
|
2055 |
|
|
==========================================
|
2056 |
|
|
|
2057 |
|
|
`(int) $trace_frame'
|
2058 |
|
|
The current trace snapshot (a.k.a. "frame") number, or -1 if no
|
2059 |
|
|
snapshot is selected.
|
2060 |
|
|
|
2061 |
|
|
`(int) $tracepoint'
|
2062 |
|
|
The tracepoint for the current trace snapshot.
|
2063 |
|
|
|
2064 |
|
|
`(int) $trace_line'
|
2065 |
|
|
The line number for the current trace snapshot.
|
2066 |
|
|
|
2067 |
|
|
`(char []) $trace_file'
|
2068 |
|
|
The source file for the current trace snapshot.
|
2069 |
|
|
|
2070 |
|
|
`(char []) $trace_func'
|
2071 |
|
|
The name of the function containing `$tracepoint'.
|
2072 |
|
|
|
2073 |
|
|
Note: `$trace_file' is not suitable for use in `printf', use
|
2074 |
|
|
`output' instead.
|
2075 |
|
|
|
2076 |
|
|
Here's a simple example of using these convenience variables for
|
2077 |
|
|
stepping through all the trace snapshots and printing some of their
|
2078 |
|
|
data. Note that these are not the same as trace state variables, which
|
2079 |
|
|
are managed by the target.
|
2080 |
|
|
|
2081 |
|
|
(gdb) tfind start
|
2082 |
|
|
|
2083 |
|
|
(gdb) while $trace_frame != -1
|
2084 |
|
|
> output $trace_file
|
2085 |
|
|
> printf ", line %d (tracepoint #%d)\n", $trace_line, $tracepoint
|
2086 |
|
|
> tfind
|
2087 |
|
|
> end
|
2088 |
|
|
|
2089 |
|
|
|
2090 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Trace Files, Prev: Tracepoint Variables, Up: Tracepoints
|
2091 |
|
|
|
2092 |
|
|
13.4 Using Trace Files
|
2093 |
|
|
======================
|
2094 |
|
|
|
2095 |
|
|
In some situations, the target running a trace experiment may no longer
|
2096 |
|
|
be available; perhaps it crashed, or the hardware was needed for a
|
2097 |
|
|
different activity. To handle these cases, you can arrange to dump the
|
2098 |
|
|
trace data into a file, and later use that file as a source of trace
|
2099 |
|
|
data, via the `target tfile' command.
|
2100 |
|
|
|
2101 |
|
|
`tsave [ -r ] FILENAME'
|
2102 |
|
|
Save the trace data to FILENAME. By default, this command assumes
|
2103 |
|
|
that FILENAME refers to the host filesystem, so if necessary GDB
|
2104 |
|
|
will copy raw trace data up from the target and then save it. If
|
2105 |
|
|
the target supports it, you can also supply the optional argument
|
2106 |
|
|
`-r' ("remote") to direct the target to save the data directly
|
2107 |
|
|
into FILENAME in its own filesystem, which may be more efficient
|
2108 |
|
|
if the trace buffer is very large. (Note, however, that `target
|
2109 |
|
|
tfile' can only read from files accessible to the host.)
|
2110 |
|
|
|
2111 |
|
|
`target tfile FILENAME'
|
2112 |
|
|
Use the file named FILENAME as a source of trace data. Commands
|
2113 |
|
|
that examine data work as they do with a live target, but it is not
|
2114 |
|
|
possible to run any new trace experiments. `tstatus' will report
|
2115 |
|
|
the state of the trace run at the moment the data was saved, as
|
2116 |
|
|
well as the current trace frame you are examining. FILENAME must
|
2117 |
|
|
be on a filesystem accessible to the host.
|
2118 |
|
|
|
2119 |
|
|
|
2120 |
|
|
|
2121 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Overlays, Next: Languages, Prev: Tracepoints, Up: Top
|
2122 |
|
|
|
2123 |
|
|
14 Debugging Programs That Use Overlays
|
2124 |
|
|
***************************************
|
2125 |
|
|
|
2126 |
|
|
If your program is too large to fit completely in your target system's
|
2127 |
|
|
memory, you can sometimes use "overlays" to work around this problem.
|
2128 |
|
|
GDB provides some support for debugging programs that use overlays.
|
2129 |
|
|
|
2130 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
2131 |
|
|
|
2132 |
|
|
* How Overlays Work:: A general explanation of overlays.
|
2133 |
|
|
* Overlay Commands:: Managing overlays in GDB.
|
2134 |
|
|
* Automatic Overlay Debugging:: GDB can find out which overlays are
|
2135 |
|
|
mapped by asking the inferior.
|
2136 |
|
|
* Overlay Sample Program:: A sample program using overlays.
|
2137 |
|
|
|
2138 |
|
|
|
2139 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: How Overlays Work, Next: Overlay Commands, Up: Overlays
|
2140 |
|
|
|
2141 |
|
|
14.1 How Overlays Work
|
2142 |
|
|
======================
|
2143 |
|
|
|
2144 |
|
|
Suppose you have a computer whose instruction address space is only 64
|
2145 |
|
|
kilobytes long, but which has much more memory which can be accessed by
|
2146 |
|
|
other means: special instructions, segment registers, or memory
|
2147 |
|
|
management hardware, for example. Suppose further that you want to
|
2148 |
|
|
adapt a program which is larger than 64 kilobytes to run on this system.
|
2149 |
|
|
|
2150 |
|
|
One solution is to identify modules of your program which are
|
2151 |
|
|
relatively independent, and need not call each other directly; call
|
2152 |
|
|
these modules "overlays". Separate the overlays from the main program,
|
2153 |
|
|
and place their machine code in the larger memory. Place your main
|
2154 |
|
|
program in instruction memory, but leave at least enough space there to
|
2155 |
|
|
hold the largest overlay as well.
|
2156 |
|
|
|
2157 |
|
|
Now, to call a function located in an overlay, you must first copy
|
2158 |
|
|
that overlay's machine code from the large memory into the space set
|
2159 |
|
|
aside for it in the instruction memory, and then jump to its entry point
|
2160 |
|
|
there.
|
2161 |
|
|
|
2162 |
|
|
Data Instruction Larger
|
2163 |
|
|
Address Space Address Space Address Space
|
2164 |
|
|
+-----------+ +-----------+ +-----------+
|
2165 |
|
|
| | | | | |
|
2166 |
|
|
+-----------+ +-----------+ +-----------+<-- overlay 1
|
2167 |
|
|
| program | | main | .----| overlay 1 | load address
|
2168 |
|
|
| variables | | program | | +-----------+
|
2169 |
|
|
| and heap | | | | | |
|
2170 |
|
|
+-----------+ | | | +-----------+<-- overlay 2
|
2171 |
|
|
| | +-----------+ | | | load address
|
2172 |
|
|
+-----------+ | | | .-| overlay 2 |
|
2173 |
|
|
| | | | | |
|
2174 |
|
|
mapped --->+-----------+ | | +-----------+
|
2175 |
|
|
address | | | | | |
|
2176 |
|
|
| overlay | <-' | | |
|
2177 |
|
|
| area | <---' +-----------+<-- overlay 3
|
2178 |
|
|
| | <---. | | load address
|
2179 |
|
|
+-----------+ `--| overlay 3 |
|
2180 |
|
|
| | | |
|
2181 |
|
|
+-----------+ | |
|
2182 |
|
|
+-----------+
|
2183 |
|
|
| |
|
2184 |
|
|
+-----------+
|
2185 |
|
|
|
2186 |
|
|
A code overlay
|
2187 |
|
|
|
2188 |
|
|
The diagram (*note A code overlay::) shows a system with separate
|
2189 |
|
|
data and instruction address spaces. To map an overlay, the program
|
2190 |
|
|
copies its code from the larger address space to the instruction
|
2191 |
|
|
address space. Since the overlays shown here all use the same mapped
|
2192 |
|
|
address, only one may be mapped at a time. For a system with a single
|
2193 |
|
|
address space for data and instructions, the diagram would be similar,
|
2194 |
|
|
except that the program variables and heap would share an address space
|
2195 |
|
|
with the main program and the overlay area.
|
2196 |
|
|
|
2197 |
|
|
An overlay loaded into instruction memory and ready for use is
|
2198 |
|
|
called a "mapped" overlay; its "mapped address" is its address in the
|
2199 |
|
|
instruction memory. An overlay not present (or only partially present)
|
2200 |
|
|
in instruction memory is called "unmapped"; its "load address" is its
|
2201 |
|
|
address in the larger memory. The mapped address is also called the
|
2202 |
|
|
"virtual memory address", or "VMA"; the load address is also called the
|
2203 |
|
|
"load memory address", or "LMA".
|
2204 |
|
|
|
2205 |
|
|
Unfortunately, overlays are not a completely transparent way to
|
2206 |
|
|
adapt a program to limited instruction memory. They introduce a new
|
2207 |
|
|
set of global constraints you must keep in mind as you design your
|
2208 |
|
|
program:
|
2209 |
|
|
|
2210 |
|
|
* Before calling or returning to a function in an overlay, your
|
2211 |
|
|
program must make sure that overlay is actually mapped.
|
2212 |
|
|
Otherwise, the call or return will transfer control to the right
|
2213 |
|
|
address, but in the wrong overlay, and your program will probably
|
2214 |
|
|
crash.
|
2215 |
|
|
|
2216 |
|
|
* If the process of mapping an overlay is expensive on your system,
|
2217 |
|
|
you will need to choose your overlays carefully to minimize their
|
2218 |
|
|
effect on your program's performance.
|
2219 |
|
|
|
2220 |
|
|
* The executable file you load onto your system must contain each
|
2221 |
|
|
overlay's instructions, appearing at the overlay's load address,
|
2222 |
|
|
not its mapped address. However, each overlay's instructions must
|
2223 |
|
|
be relocated and its symbols defined as if the overlay were at its
|
2224 |
|
|
mapped address. You can use GNU linker scripts to specify
|
2225 |
|
|
different load and relocation addresses for pieces of your
|
2226 |
342 |
jeremybenn |
program; see *note Overlay Description: (ld.info)Overlay
|
2227 |
330 |
jeremybenn |
Description.
|
2228 |
|
|
|
2229 |
|
|
* The procedure for loading executable files onto your system must
|
2230 |
|
|
be able to load their contents into the larger address space as
|
2231 |
|
|
well as the instruction and data spaces.
|
2232 |
|
|
|
2233 |
|
|
|
2234 |
|
|
The overlay system described above is rather simple, and could be
|
2235 |
|
|
improved in many ways:
|
2236 |
|
|
|
2237 |
|
|
* If your system has suitable bank switch registers or memory
|
2238 |
|
|
management hardware, you could use those facilities to make an
|
2239 |
|
|
overlay's load area contents simply appear at their mapped address
|
2240 |
|
|
in instruction space. This would probably be faster than copying
|
2241 |
|
|
the overlay to its mapped area in the usual way.
|
2242 |
|
|
|
2243 |
|
|
* If your overlays are small enough, you could set aside more than
|
2244 |
|
|
one overlay area, and have more than one overlay mapped at a time.
|
2245 |
|
|
|
2246 |
|
|
* You can use overlays to manage data, as well as instructions. In
|
2247 |
|
|
general, data overlays are even less transparent to your design
|
2248 |
|
|
than code overlays: whereas code overlays only require care when
|
2249 |
|
|
you call or return to functions, data overlays require care every
|
2250 |
|
|
time you access the data. Also, if you change the contents of a
|
2251 |
|
|
data overlay, you must copy its contents back out to its load
|
2252 |
|
|
address before you can copy a different data overlay into the same
|
2253 |
|
|
mapped area.
|
2254 |
|
|
|
2255 |
|
|
|
2256 |
|
|
|
2257 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Overlay Commands, Next: Automatic Overlay Debugging, Prev: How Overlays Work, Up: Overlays
|
2258 |
|
|
|
2259 |
|
|
14.2 Overlay Commands
|
2260 |
|
|
=====================
|
2261 |
|
|
|
2262 |
|
|
To use GDB's overlay support, each overlay in your program must
|
2263 |
|
|
correspond to a separate section of the executable file. The section's
|
2264 |
|
|
virtual memory address and load memory address must be the overlay's
|
2265 |
|
|
mapped and load addresses. Identifying overlays with sections allows
|
2266 |
|
|
GDB to determine the appropriate address of a function or variable,
|
2267 |
|
|
depending on whether the overlay is mapped or not.
|
2268 |
|
|
|
2269 |
|
|
GDB's overlay commands all start with the word `overlay'; you can
|
2270 |
|
|
abbreviate this as `ov' or `ovly'. The commands are:
|
2271 |
|
|
|
2272 |
|
|
`overlay off'
|
2273 |
|
|
Disable GDB's overlay support. When overlay support is disabled,
|
2274 |
|
|
GDB assumes that all functions and variables are always present at
|
2275 |
|
|
their mapped addresses. By default, GDB's overlay support is
|
2276 |
|
|
disabled.
|
2277 |
|
|
|
2278 |
|
|
`overlay manual'
|
2279 |
|
|
Enable "manual" overlay debugging. In this mode, GDB relies on
|
2280 |
|
|
you to tell it which overlays are mapped, and which are not, using
|
2281 |
|
|
the `overlay map-overlay' and `overlay unmap-overlay' commands
|
2282 |
|
|
described below.
|
2283 |
|
|
|
2284 |
|
|
`overlay map-overlay OVERLAY'
|
2285 |
|
|
`overlay map OVERLAY'
|
2286 |
|
|
Tell GDB that OVERLAY is now mapped; OVERLAY must be the name of
|
2287 |
|
|
the object file section containing the overlay. When an overlay
|
2288 |
|
|
is mapped, GDB assumes it can find the overlay's functions and
|
2289 |
|
|
variables at their mapped addresses. GDB assumes that any other
|
2290 |
|
|
overlays whose mapped ranges overlap that of OVERLAY are now
|
2291 |
|
|
unmapped.
|
2292 |
|
|
|
2293 |
|
|
`overlay unmap-overlay OVERLAY'
|
2294 |
|
|
`overlay unmap OVERLAY'
|
2295 |
|
|
Tell GDB that OVERLAY is no longer mapped; OVERLAY must be the
|
2296 |
|
|
name of the object file section containing the overlay. When an
|
2297 |
|
|
overlay is unmapped, GDB assumes it can find the overlay's
|
2298 |
|
|
functions and variables at their load addresses.
|
2299 |
|
|
|
2300 |
|
|
`overlay auto'
|
2301 |
|
|
Enable "automatic" overlay debugging. In this mode, GDB consults
|
2302 |
|
|
a data structure the overlay manager maintains in the inferior to
|
2303 |
342 |
jeremybenn |
see which overlays are mapped. For details, see *note Automatic
|
2304 |
330 |
jeremybenn |
Overlay Debugging::.
|
2305 |
|
|
|
2306 |
|
|
`overlay load-target'
|
2307 |
|
|
`overlay load'
|
2308 |
|
|
Re-read the overlay table from the inferior. Normally, GDB
|
2309 |
|
|
re-reads the table GDB automatically each time the inferior stops,
|
2310 |
|
|
so this command should only be necessary if you have changed the
|
2311 |
|
|
overlay mapping yourself using GDB. This command is only useful
|
2312 |
|
|
when using automatic overlay debugging.
|
2313 |
|
|
|
2314 |
|
|
`overlay list-overlays'
|
2315 |
|
|
`overlay list'
|
2316 |
|
|
Display a list of the overlays currently mapped, along with their
|
2317 |
|
|
mapped addresses, load addresses, and sizes.
|
2318 |
|
|
|
2319 |
|
|
|
2320 |
|
|
Normally, when GDB prints a code address, it includes the name of
|
2321 |
|
|
the function the address falls in:
|
2322 |
|
|
|
2323 |
|
|
(gdb) print main
|
2324 |
|
|
$3 = {int ()} 0x11a0
|
2325 |
|
|
When overlay debugging is enabled, GDB recognizes code in unmapped
|
2326 |
|
|
overlays, and prints the names of unmapped functions with asterisks
|
2327 |
|
|
around them. For example, if `foo' is a function in an unmapped
|
2328 |
|
|
overlay, GDB prints it this way:
|
2329 |
|
|
|
2330 |
|
|
(gdb) overlay list
|
2331 |
|
|
No sections are mapped.
|
2332 |
|
|
(gdb) print foo
|
2333 |
|
|
$5 = {int (int)} 0x100000 <*foo*>
|
2334 |
|
|
When `foo''s overlay is mapped, GDB prints the function's name
|
2335 |
|
|
normally:
|
2336 |
|
|
|
2337 |
|
|
(gdb) overlay list
|
2338 |
|
|
Section .ov.foo.text, loaded at 0x100000 - 0x100034,
|
2339 |
|
|
mapped at 0x1016 - 0x104a
|
2340 |
|
|
(gdb) print foo
|
2341 |
|
|
$6 = {int (int)} 0x1016
|
2342 |
|
|
|
2343 |
|
|
When overlay debugging is enabled, GDB can find the correct address
|
2344 |
|
|
for functions and variables in an overlay, whether or not the overlay
|
2345 |
|
|
is mapped. This allows most GDB commands, like `break' and
|
2346 |
|
|
`disassemble', to work normally, even on unmapped code. However, GDB's
|
2347 |
|
|
breakpoint support has some limitations:
|
2348 |
|
|
|
2349 |
|
|
* You can set breakpoints in functions in unmapped overlays, as long
|
2350 |
|
|
as GDB can write to the overlay at its load address.
|
2351 |
|
|
|
2352 |
|
|
* GDB can not set hardware or simulator-based breakpoints in
|
2353 |
|
|
unmapped overlays. However, if you set a breakpoint at the end of
|
2354 |
|
|
your overlay manager (and tell GDB which overlays are now mapped,
|
2355 |
|
|
if you are using manual overlay management), GDB will re-set its
|
2356 |
|
|
breakpoints properly.
|
2357 |
|
|
|
2358 |
|
|
|
2359 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Automatic Overlay Debugging, Next: Overlay Sample Program, Prev: Overlay Commands, Up: Overlays
|
2360 |
|
|
|
2361 |
|
|
14.3 Automatic Overlay Debugging
|
2362 |
|
|
================================
|
2363 |
|
|
|
2364 |
|
|
GDB can automatically track which overlays are mapped and which are
|
2365 |
|
|
not, given some simple co-operation from the overlay manager in the
|
2366 |
|
|
inferior. If you enable automatic overlay debugging with the `overlay
|
2367 |
|
|
auto' command (*note Overlay Commands::), GDB looks in the inferior's
|
2368 |
|
|
memory for certain variables describing the current state of the
|
2369 |
|
|
overlays.
|
2370 |
|
|
|
2371 |
|
|
Here are the variables your overlay manager must define to support
|
2372 |
|
|
GDB's automatic overlay debugging:
|
2373 |
|
|
|
2374 |
|
|
`_ovly_table':
|
2375 |
|
|
This variable must be an array of the following structures:
|
2376 |
|
|
|
2377 |
|
|
struct
|
2378 |
|
|
{
|
2379 |
|
|
/* The overlay's mapped address. */
|
2380 |
|
|
unsigned long vma;
|
2381 |
|
|
|
2382 |
|
|
/* The size of the overlay, in bytes. */
|
2383 |
|
|
unsigned long size;
|
2384 |
|
|
|
2385 |
|
|
/* The overlay's load address. */
|
2386 |
|
|
unsigned long lma;
|
2387 |
|
|
|
2388 |
|
|
/* Non-zero if the overlay is currently mapped;
|
2389 |
|
|
zero otherwise. */
|
2390 |
|
|
unsigned long mapped;
|
2391 |
|
|
}
|
2392 |
|
|
|
2393 |
|
|
`_novlys':
|
2394 |
|
|
This variable must be a four-byte signed integer, holding the total
|
2395 |
|
|
number of elements in `_ovly_table'.
|
2396 |
|
|
|
2397 |
|
|
|
2398 |
|
|
To decide whether a particular overlay is mapped or not, GDB looks
|
2399 |
|
|
for an entry in `_ovly_table' whose `vma' and `lma' members equal the
|
2400 |
|
|
VMA and LMA of the overlay's section in the executable file. When GDB
|
2401 |
|
|
finds a matching entry, it consults the entry's `mapped' member to
|
2402 |
|
|
determine whether the overlay is currently mapped.
|
2403 |
|
|
|
2404 |
|
|
In addition, your overlay manager may define a function called
|
2405 |
|
|
`_ovly_debug_event'. If this function is defined, GDB will silently
|
2406 |
|
|
set a breakpoint there. If the overlay manager then calls this
|
2407 |
|
|
function whenever it has changed the overlay table, this will enable
|
2408 |
|
|
GDB to accurately keep track of which overlays are in program memory,
|
2409 |
|
|
and update any breakpoints that may be set in overlays. This will
|
2410 |
|
|
allow breakpoints to work even if the overlays are kept in ROM or other
|
2411 |
|
|
non-writable memory while they are not being executed.
|
2412 |
|
|
|
2413 |
|
|
|
2414 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Overlay Sample Program, Prev: Automatic Overlay Debugging, Up: Overlays
|
2415 |
|
|
|
2416 |
|
|
14.4 Overlay Sample Program
|
2417 |
|
|
===========================
|
2418 |
|
|
|
2419 |
|
|
When linking a program which uses overlays, you must place the overlays
|
2420 |
|
|
at their load addresses, while relocating them to run at their mapped
|
2421 |
|
|
addresses. To do this, you must write a linker script (*note Overlay
|
2422 |
|
|
Description: (ld.info)Overlay Description.). Unfortunately, since
|
2423 |
|
|
linker scripts are specific to a particular host system, target
|
2424 |
|
|
architecture, and target memory layout, this manual cannot provide
|
2425 |
|
|
portable sample code demonstrating GDB's overlay support.
|
2426 |
|
|
|
2427 |
|
|
However, the GDB source distribution does contain an overlaid
|
2428 |
|
|
program, with linker scripts for a few systems, as part of its test
|
2429 |
|
|
suite. The program consists of the following files from
|
2430 |
|
|
`gdb/testsuite/gdb.base':
|
2431 |
|
|
|
2432 |
|
|
`overlays.c'
|
2433 |
|
|
The main program file.
|
2434 |
|
|
|
2435 |
|
|
`ovlymgr.c'
|
2436 |
|
|
A simple overlay manager, used by `overlays.c'.
|
2437 |
|
|
|
2438 |
|
|
`foo.c'
|
2439 |
|
|
`bar.c'
|
2440 |
|
|
`baz.c'
|
2441 |
|
|
`grbx.c'
|
2442 |
|
|
Overlay modules, loaded and used by `overlays.c'.
|
2443 |
|
|
|
2444 |
|
|
`d10v.ld'
|
2445 |
|
|
`m32r.ld'
|
2446 |
|
|
Linker scripts for linking the test program on the `d10v-elf' and
|
2447 |
|
|
`m32r-elf' targets.
|
2448 |
|
|
|
2449 |
|
|
You can build the test program using the `d10v-elf' GCC
|
2450 |
|
|
cross-compiler like this:
|
2451 |
|
|
|
2452 |
|
|
$ d10v-elf-gcc -g -c overlays.c
|
2453 |
|
|
$ d10v-elf-gcc -g -c ovlymgr.c
|
2454 |
|
|
$ d10v-elf-gcc -g -c foo.c
|
2455 |
|
|
$ d10v-elf-gcc -g -c bar.c
|
2456 |
|
|
$ d10v-elf-gcc -g -c baz.c
|
2457 |
|
|
$ d10v-elf-gcc -g -c grbx.c
|
2458 |
|
|
$ d10v-elf-gcc -g overlays.o ovlymgr.o foo.o bar.o \
|
2459 |
|
|
baz.o grbx.o -Wl,-Td10v.ld -o overlays
|
2460 |
|
|
|
2461 |
|
|
The build process is identical for any other architecture, except
|
2462 |
|
|
that you must substitute the appropriate compiler and linker script for
|
2463 |
|
|
the target system for `d10v-elf-gcc' and `d10v.ld'.
|
2464 |
|
|
|
2465 |
|
|
|
2466 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Languages, Next: Symbols, Prev: Overlays, Up: Top
|
2467 |
|
|
|
2468 |
|
|
15 Using GDB with Different Languages
|
2469 |
|
|
*************************************
|
2470 |
|
|
|
2471 |
|
|
Although programming languages generally have common aspects, they are
|
2472 |
|
|
rarely expressed in the same manner. For instance, in ANSI C,
|
2473 |
|
|
dereferencing a pointer `p' is accomplished by `*p', but in Modula-2,
|
2474 |
|
|
it is accomplished by `p^'. Values can also be represented (and
|
2475 |
|
|
displayed) differently. Hex numbers in C appear as `0x1ae', while in
|
2476 |
|
|
Modula-2 they appear as `1AEH'.
|
2477 |
|
|
|
2478 |
|
|
Language-specific information is built into GDB for some languages,
|
2479 |
|
|
allowing you to express operations like the above in your program's
|
2480 |
|
|
native language, and allowing GDB to output values in a manner
|
2481 |
|
|
consistent with the syntax of your program's native language. The
|
2482 |
|
|
language you use to build expressions is called the "working language".
|
2483 |
|
|
|
2484 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
2485 |
|
|
|
2486 |
|
|
* Setting:: Switching between source languages
|
2487 |
|
|
* Show:: Displaying the language
|
2488 |
|
|
* Checks:: Type and range checks
|
2489 |
|
|
* Supported Languages:: Supported languages
|
2490 |
|
|
* Unsupported Languages:: Unsupported languages
|
2491 |
|
|
|
2492 |
|
|
|
2493 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Setting, Next: Show, Up: Languages
|
2494 |
|
|
|
2495 |
|
|
15.1 Switching Between Source Languages
|
2496 |
|
|
=======================================
|
2497 |
|
|
|
2498 |
|
|
There are two ways to control the working language--either have GDB set
|
2499 |
|
|
it automatically, or select it manually yourself. You can use the `set
|
2500 |
|
|
language' command for either purpose. On startup, GDB defaults to
|
2501 |
|
|
setting the language automatically. The working language is used to
|
2502 |
|
|
determine how expressions you type are interpreted, how values are
|
2503 |
|
|
printed, etc.
|
2504 |
|
|
|
2505 |
|
|
In addition to the working language, every source file that GDB
|
2506 |
|
|
knows about has its own working language. For some object file
|
2507 |
|
|
formats, the compiler might indicate which language a particular source
|
2508 |
|
|
file is in. However, most of the time GDB infers the language from the
|
2509 |
|
|
name of the file. The language of a source file controls whether C++
|
2510 |
|
|
names are demangled--this way `backtrace' can show each frame
|
2511 |
|
|
appropriately for its own language. There is no way to set the
|
2512 |
|
|
language of a source file from within GDB, but you can set the language
|
2513 |
|
|
associated with a filename extension. *Note Displaying the Language:
|
2514 |
|
|
Show.
|
2515 |
|
|
|
2516 |
|
|
This is most commonly a problem when you use a program, such as
|
2517 |
|
|
`cfront' or `f2c', that generates C but is written in another language.
|
2518 |
|
|
In that case, make the program use `#line' directives in its C output;
|
2519 |
|
|
that way GDB will know the correct language of the source code of the
|
2520 |
|
|
original program, and will display that source code, not the generated
|
2521 |
|
|
C code.
|
2522 |
|
|
|
2523 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
2524 |
|
|
|
2525 |
|
|
* Filenames:: Filename extensions and languages.
|
2526 |
|
|
* Manually:: Setting the working language manually
|
2527 |
|
|
* Automatically:: Having GDB infer the source language
|
2528 |
|
|
|
2529 |
|
|
|
2530 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Filenames, Next: Manually, Up: Setting
|
2531 |
|
|
|
2532 |
|
|
15.1.1 List of Filename Extensions and Languages
|
2533 |
|
|
------------------------------------------------
|
2534 |
|
|
|
2535 |
|
|
If a source file name ends in one of the following extensions, then GDB
|
2536 |
|
|
infers that its language is the one indicated.
|
2537 |
|
|
|
2538 |
|
|
`.ada'
|
2539 |
|
|
`.ads'
|
2540 |
|
|
`.adb'
|
2541 |
|
|
`.a'
|
2542 |
|
|
Ada source file.
|
2543 |
|
|
|
2544 |
|
|
`.c'
|
2545 |
|
|
C source file
|
2546 |
|
|
|
2547 |
|
|
`.C'
|
2548 |
|
|
`.cc'
|
2549 |
|
|
`.cp'
|
2550 |
|
|
`.cpp'
|
2551 |
|
|
`.cxx'
|
2552 |
|
|
`.c++'
|
2553 |
|
|
C++ source file
|
2554 |
|
|
|
2555 |
|
|
`.d'
|
2556 |
|
|
D source file
|
2557 |
|
|
|
2558 |
|
|
`.m'
|
2559 |
|
|
Objective-C source file
|
2560 |
|
|
|
2561 |
|
|
`.f'
|
2562 |
|
|
`.F'
|
2563 |
|
|
Fortran source file
|
2564 |
|
|
|
2565 |
|
|
`.mod'
|
2566 |
|
|
Modula-2 source file
|
2567 |
|
|
|
2568 |
|
|
`.s'
|
2569 |
|
|
`.S'
|
2570 |
|
|
Assembler source file. This actually behaves almost like C, but
|
2571 |
|
|
GDB does not skip over function prologues when stepping.
|
2572 |
|
|
|
2573 |
|
|
In addition, you may set the language associated with a filename
|
2574 |
|
|
extension. *Note Displaying the Language: Show.
|
2575 |
|
|
|
2576 |
|
|
|
2577 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Manually, Next: Automatically, Prev: Filenames, Up: Setting
|
2578 |
|
|
|
2579 |
|
|
15.1.2 Setting the Working Language
|
2580 |
|
|
-----------------------------------
|
2581 |
|
|
|
2582 |
|
|
If you allow GDB to set the language automatically, expressions are
|
2583 |
|
|
interpreted the same way in your debugging session and your program.
|
2584 |
|
|
|
2585 |
|
|
If you wish, you may set the language manually. To do this, issue
|
2586 |
|
|
the command `set language LANG', where LANG is the name of a language,
|
2587 |
|
|
such as `c' or `modula-2'. For a list of the supported languages, type
|
2588 |
|
|
`set language'.
|
2589 |
|
|
|
2590 |
|
|
Setting the language manually prevents GDB from updating the working
|
2591 |
|
|
language automatically. This can lead to confusion if you try to debug
|
2592 |
|
|
a program when the working language is not the same as the source
|
2593 |
|
|
language, when an expression is acceptable to both languages--but means
|
2594 |
|
|
different things. For instance, if the current source file were
|
2595 |
|
|
written in C, and GDB was parsing Modula-2, a command such as:
|
2596 |
|
|
|
2597 |
|
|
print a = b + c
|
2598 |
|
|
|
2599 |
|
|
might not have the effect you intended. In C, this means to add `b'
|
2600 |
|
|
and `c' and place the result in `a'. The result printed would be the
|
2601 |
|
|
value of `a'. In Modula-2, this means to compare `a' to the result of
|
2602 |
|
|
`b+c', yielding a `BOOLEAN' value.
|
2603 |
|
|
|
2604 |
|
|
|
2605 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Automatically, Prev: Manually, Up: Setting
|
2606 |
|
|
|
2607 |
|
|
15.1.3 Having GDB Infer the Source Language
|
2608 |
|
|
-------------------------------------------
|
2609 |
|
|
|
2610 |
|
|
To have GDB set the working language automatically, use `set language
|
2611 |
|
|
local' or `set language auto'. GDB then infers the working language.
|
2612 |
|
|
That is, when your program stops in a frame (usually by encountering a
|
2613 |
|
|
breakpoint), GDB sets the working language to the language recorded for
|
2614 |
|
|
the function in that frame. If the language for a frame is unknown
|
2615 |
|
|
(that is, if the function or block corresponding to the frame was
|
2616 |
|
|
defined in a source file that does not have a recognized extension),
|
2617 |
|
|
the current working language is not changed, and GDB issues a warning.
|
2618 |
|
|
|
2619 |
|
|
This may not seem necessary for most programs, which are written
|
2620 |
|
|
entirely in one source language. However, program modules and libraries
|
2621 |
|
|
written in one source language can be used by a main program written in
|
2622 |
|
|
a different source language. Using `set language auto' in this case
|
2623 |
|
|
frees you from having to set the working language manually.
|
2624 |
|
|
|
2625 |
|
|
|
2626 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Show, Next: Checks, Prev: Setting, Up: Languages
|
2627 |
|
|
|
2628 |
|
|
15.2 Displaying the Language
|
2629 |
|
|
============================
|
2630 |
|
|
|
2631 |
|
|
The following commands help you find out which language is the working
|
2632 |
|
|
language, and also what language source files were written in.
|
2633 |
|
|
|
2634 |
|
|
`show language'
|
2635 |
|
|
Display the current working language. This is the language you
|
2636 |
|
|
can use with commands such as `print' to build and compute
|
2637 |
|
|
expressions that may involve variables in your program.
|
2638 |
|
|
|
2639 |
|
|
`info frame'
|
2640 |
|
|
Display the source language for this frame. This language becomes
|
2641 |
|
|
the working language if you use an identifier from this frame.
|
2642 |
|
|
*Note Information about a Frame: Frame Info, to identify the other
|
2643 |
|
|
information listed here.
|
2644 |
|
|
|
2645 |
|
|
`info source'
|
2646 |
|
|
Display the source language of this source file. *Note Examining
|
2647 |
|
|
the Symbol Table: Symbols, to identify the other information
|
2648 |
|
|
listed here.
|
2649 |
|
|
|
2650 |
|
|
In unusual circumstances, you may have source files with extensions
|
2651 |
|
|
not in the standard list. You can then set the extension associated
|
2652 |
|
|
with a language explicitly:
|
2653 |
|
|
|
2654 |
|
|
`set extension-language EXT LANGUAGE'
|
2655 |
|
|
Tell GDB that source files with extension EXT are to be assumed as
|
2656 |
|
|
written in the source language LANGUAGE.
|
2657 |
|
|
|
2658 |
|
|
`info extensions'
|
2659 |
|
|
List all the filename extensions and the associated languages.
|
2660 |
|
|
|
2661 |
|
|
|
2662 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Checks, Next: Supported Languages, Prev: Show, Up: Languages
|
2663 |
|
|
|
2664 |
|
|
15.3 Type and Range Checking
|
2665 |
|
|
============================
|
2666 |
|
|
|
2667 |
|
|
_Warning:_ In this release, the GDB commands for type and range
|
2668 |
|
|
checking are included, but they do not yet have any effect. This
|
2669 |
|
|
section documents the intended facilities.
|
2670 |
|
|
|
2671 |
|
|
Some languages are designed to guard you against making seemingly
|
2672 |
|
|
common errors through a series of compile- and run-time checks. These
|
2673 |
|
|
include checking the type of arguments to functions and operators, and
|
2674 |
|
|
making sure mathematical overflows are caught at run time. Checks such
|
2675 |
|
|
as these help to ensure a program's correctness once it has been
|
2676 |
|
|
compiled by eliminating type mismatches, and providing active checks
|
2677 |
|
|
for range errors when your program is running.
|
2678 |
|
|
|
2679 |
|
|
GDB can check for conditions like the above if you wish. Although
|
2680 |
|
|
GDB does not check the statements in your program, it can check
|
2681 |
|
|
expressions entered directly into GDB for evaluation via the `print'
|
2682 |
|
|
command, for example. As with the working language, GDB can also
|
2683 |
|
|
decide whether or not to check automatically based on your program's
|
2684 |
|
|
source language. *Note Supported Languages: Supported Languages, for
|
2685 |
|
|
the default settings of supported languages.
|
2686 |
|
|
|
2687 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
2688 |
|
|
|
2689 |
|
|
* Type Checking:: An overview of type checking
|
2690 |
|
|
* Range Checking:: An overview of range checking
|
2691 |
|
|
|
2692 |
|
|
|
2693 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Type Checking, Next: Range Checking, Up: Checks
|
2694 |
|
|
|
2695 |
|
|
15.3.1 An Overview of Type Checking
|
2696 |
|
|
-----------------------------------
|
2697 |
|
|
|
2698 |
|
|
Some languages, such as Modula-2, are strongly typed, meaning that the
|
2699 |
|
|
arguments to operators and functions have to be of the correct type,
|
2700 |
|
|
otherwise an error occurs. These checks prevent type mismatch errors
|
2701 |
|
|
from ever causing any run-time problems. For example,
|
2702 |
|
|
|
2703 |
|
|
1 + 2 => 3
|
2704 |
|
|
but
|
2705 |
|
|
error--> 1 + 2.3
|
2706 |
|
|
|
2707 |
|
|
The second example fails because the `CARDINAL' 1 is not
|
2708 |
|
|
type-compatible with the `REAL' 2.3.
|
2709 |
|
|
|
2710 |
|
|
For the expressions you use in GDB commands, you can tell the GDB
|
2711 |
|
|
type checker to skip checking; to treat any mismatches as errors and
|
2712 |
|
|
abandon the expression; or to only issue warnings when type mismatches
|
2713 |
|
|
occur, but evaluate the expression anyway. When you choose the last of
|
2714 |
|
|
these, GDB evaluates expressions like the second example above, but
|
2715 |
|
|
also issues a warning.
|
2716 |
|
|
|
2717 |
|
|
Even if you turn type checking off, there may be other reasons
|
2718 |
|
|
related to type that prevent GDB from evaluating an expression. For
|
2719 |
|
|
instance, GDB does not know how to add an `int' and a `struct foo'.
|
2720 |
|
|
These particular type errors have nothing to do with the language in
|
2721 |
|
|
use, and usually arise from expressions, such as the one described
|
2722 |
|
|
above, which make little sense to evaluate anyway.
|
2723 |
|
|
|
2724 |
|
|
Each language defines to what degree it is strict about type. For
|
2725 |
|
|
instance, both Modula-2 and C require the arguments to arithmetical
|
2726 |
|
|
operators to be numbers. In C, enumerated types and pointers can be
|
2727 |
|
|
represented as numbers, so that they are valid arguments to mathematical
|
2728 |
|
|
operators. *Note Supported Languages: Supported Languages, for further
|
2729 |
|
|
details on specific languages.
|
2730 |
|
|
|
2731 |
|
|
GDB provides some additional commands for controlling the type
|
2732 |
|
|
checker:
|
2733 |
|
|
|
2734 |
|
|
`set check type auto'
|
2735 |
|
|
Set type checking on or off based on the current working language.
|
2736 |
|
|
*Note Supported Languages: Supported Languages, for the default
|
2737 |
|
|
settings for each language.
|
2738 |
|
|
|
2739 |
|
|
`set check type on'
|
2740 |
|
|
`set check type off'
|
2741 |
|
|
Set type checking on or off, overriding the default setting for the
|
2742 |
|
|
current working language. Issue a warning if the setting does not
|
2743 |
|
|
match the language default. If any type mismatches occur in
|
2744 |
|
|
evaluating an expression while type checking is on, GDB prints a
|
2745 |
|
|
message and aborts evaluation of the expression.
|
2746 |
|
|
|
2747 |
|
|
`set check type warn'
|
2748 |
|
|
Cause the type checker to issue warnings, but to always attempt to
|
2749 |
|
|
evaluate the expression. Evaluating the expression may still be
|
2750 |
|
|
impossible for other reasons. For example, GDB cannot add numbers
|
2751 |
|
|
and structures.
|
2752 |
|
|
|
2753 |
|
|
`show type'
|
2754 |
|
|
Show the current setting of the type checker, and whether or not
|
2755 |
|
|
GDB is setting it automatically.
|
2756 |
|
|
|
2757 |
|
|
|
2758 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Range Checking, Prev: Type Checking, Up: Checks
|
2759 |
|
|
|
2760 |
|
|
15.3.2 An Overview of Range Checking
|
2761 |
|
|
------------------------------------
|
2762 |
|
|
|
2763 |
|
|
In some languages (such as Modula-2), it is an error to exceed the
|
2764 |
|
|
bounds of a type; this is enforced with run-time checks. Such range
|
2765 |
|
|
checking is meant to ensure program correctness by making sure
|
2766 |
|
|
computations do not overflow, or indices on an array element access do
|
2767 |
|
|
not exceed the bounds of the array.
|
2768 |
|
|
|
2769 |
|
|
For expressions you use in GDB commands, you can tell GDB to treat
|
2770 |
|
|
range errors in one of three ways: ignore them, always treat them as
|
2771 |
|
|
errors and abandon the expression, or issue warnings but evaluate the
|
2772 |
|
|
expression anyway.
|
2773 |
|
|
|
2774 |
|
|
A range error can result from numerical overflow, from exceeding an
|
2775 |
|
|
array index bound, or when you type a constant that is not a member of
|
2776 |
|
|
any type. Some languages, however, do not treat overflows as an error.
|
2777 |
|
|
In many implementations of C, mathematical overflow causes the result
|
2778 |
|
|
to "wrap around" to lower values--for example, if M is the largest
|
2779 |
|
|
integer value, and S is the smallest, then
|
2780 |
|
|
|
2781 |
|
|
M + 1 => S
|
2782 |
|
|
|
2783 |
|
|
This, too, is specific to individual languages, and in some cases
|
2784 |
|
|
specific to individual compilers or machines. *Note Supported
|
2785 |
|
|
Languages: Supported Languages, for further details on specific
|
2786 |
|
|
languages.
|
2787 |
|
|
|
2788 |
|
|
GDB provides some additional commands for controlling the range
|
2789 |
|
|
checker:
|
2790 |
|
|
|
2791 |
|
|
`set check range auto'
|
2792 |
|
|
Set range checking on or off based on the current working language.
|
2793 |
|
|
*Note Supported Languages: Supported Languages, for the default
|
2794 |
|
|
settings for each language.
|
2795 |
|
|
|
2796 |
|
|
`set check range on'
|
2797 |
|
|
`set check range off'
|
2798 |
|
|
Set range checking on or off, overriding the default setting for
|
2799 |
|
|
the current working language. A warning is issued if the setting
|
2800 |
|
|
does not match the language default. If a range error occurs and
|
2801 |
|
|
range checking is on, then a message is printed and evaluation of
|
2802 |
|
|
the expression is aborted.
|
2803 |
|
|
|
2804 |
|
|
`set check range warn'
|
2805 |
|
|
Output messages when the GDB range checker detects a range error,
|
2806 |
|
|
but attempt to evaluate the expression anyway. Evaluating the
|
2807 |
|
|
expression may still be impossible for other reasons, such as
|
2808 |
|
|
accessing memory that the process does not own (a typical example
|
2809 |
|
|
from many Unix systems).
|
2810 |
|
|
|
2811 |
|
|
`show range'
|
2812 |
|
|
Show the current setting of the range checker, and whether or not
|
2813 |
|
|
it is being set automatically by GDB.
|
2814 |
|
|
|
2815 |
|
|
|
2816 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Supported Languages, Next: Unsupported Languages, Prev: Checks, Up: Languages
|
2817 |
|
|
|
2818 |
|
|
15.4 Supported Languages
|
2819 |
|
|
========================
|
2820 |
|
|
|
2821 |
|
|
GDB supports C, C++, D, Objective-C, Fortran, Java, Pascal, assembly,
|
2822 |
|
|
Modula-2, and Ada. Some GDB features may be used in expressions
|
2823 |
|
|
regardless of the language you use: the GDB `@' and `::' operators, and
|
2824 |
|
|
the `{type}addr' construct (*note Expressions: Expressions.) can be
|
2825 |
|
|
used with the constructs of any supported language.
|
2826 |
|
|
|
2827 |
|
|
The following sections detail to what degree each source language is
|
2828 |
|
|
supported by GDB. These sections are not meant to be language
|
2829 |
|
|
tutorials or references, but serve only as a reference guide to what the
|
2830 |
|
|
GDB expression parser accepts, and what input and output formats should
|
2831 |
|
|
look like for different languages. There are many good books written
|
2832 |
|
|
on each of these languages; please look to these for a language
|
2833 |
|
|
reference or tutorial.
|
2834 |
|
|
|
2835 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
2836 |
|
|
|
2837 |
|
|
* C:: C and C++
|
2838 |
|
|
* D:: D
|
2839 |
|
|
* Objective-C:: Objective-C
|
2840 |
|
|
* Fortran:: Fortran
|
2841 |
|
|
* Pascal:: Pascal
|
2842 |
|
|
* Modula-2:: Modula-2
|
2843 |
|
|
* Ada:: Ada
|
2844 |
|
|
|
2845 |
|
|
|
2846 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: C, Next: D, Up: Supported Languages
|
2847 |
|
|
|
2848 |
|
|
15.4.1 C and C++
|
2849 |
|
|
----------------
|
2850 |
|
|
|
2851 |
|
|
Since C and C++ are so closely related, many features of GDB apply to
|
2852 |
|
|
both languages. Whenever this is the case, we discuss those languages
|
2853 |
|
|
together.
|
2854 |
|
|
|
2855 |
|
|
The C++ debugging facilities are jointly implemented by the C++
|
2856 |
|
|
compiler and GDB. Therefore, to debug your C++ code effectively, you
|
2857 |
|
|
must compile your C++ programs with a supported C++ compiler, such as
|
2858 |
|
|
GNU `g++', or the HP ANSI C++ compiler (`aCC').
|
2859 |
|
|
|
2860 |
|
|
For best results when using GNU C++, use the DWARF 2 debugging
|
2861 |
|
|
format; if it doesn't work on your system, try the stabs+ debugging
|
2862 |
|
|
format. You can select those formats explicitly with the `g++'
|
2863 |
|
|
command-line options `-gdwarf-2' and `-gstabs+'. *Note Options for
|
2864 |
|
|
Debugging Your Program or GCC: (gcc.info)Debugging Options.
|
2865 |
|
|
|
2866 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
2867 |
|
|
|
2868 |
|
|
* C Operators:: C and C++ operators
|
2869 |
|
|
* C Constants:: C and C++ constants
|
2870 |
|
|
* C Plus Plus Expressions:: C++ expressions
|
2871 |
|
|
* C Defaults:: Default settings for C and C++
|
2872 |
|
|
* C Checks:: C and C++ type and range checks
|
2873 |
|
|
* Debugging C:: GDB and C
|
2874 |
|
|
* Debugging C Plus Plus:: GDB features for C++
|
2875 |
|
|
* Decimal Floating Point:: Numbers in Decimal Floating Point format
|
2876 |
|
|
|
2877 |
|
|
|
2878 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: C Operators, Next: C Constants, Up: C
|
2879 |
|
|
|
2880 |
|
|
15.4.1.1 C and C++ Operators
|
2881 |
|
|
............................
|
2882 |
|
|
|
2883 |
|
|
Operators must be defined on values of specific types. For instance,
|
2884 |
|
|
`+' is defined on numbers, but not on structures. Operators are often
|
2885 |
|
|
defined on groups of types.
|
2886 |
|
|
|
2887 |
|
|
For the purposes of C and C++, the following definitions hold:
|
2888 |
|
|
|
2889 |
|
|
* _Integral types_ include `int' with any of its storage-class
|
2890 |
|
|
specifiers; `char'; `enum'; and, for C++, `bool'.
|
2891 |
|
|
|
2892 |
|
|
* _Floating-point types_ include `float', `double', and `long
|
2893 |
|
|
double' (if supported by the target platform).
|
2894 |
|
|
|
2895 |
|
|
* _Pointer types_ include all types defined as `(TYPE *)'.
|
2896 |
|
|
|
2897 |
|
|
* _Scalar types_ include all of the above.
|
2898 |
|
|
|
2899 |
|
|
|
2900 |
|
|
The following operators are supported. They are listed here in order
|
2901 |
|
|
of increasing precedence:
|
2902 |
|
|
|
2903 |
|
|
`,'
|
2904 |
|
|
The comma or sequencing operator. Expressions in a
|
2905 |
|
|
comma-separated list are evaluated from left to right, with the
|
2906 |
|
|
result of the entire expression being the last expression
|
2907 |
|
|
evaluated.
|
2908 |
|
|
|
2909 |
|
|
`='
|
2910 |
|
|
Assignment. The value of an assignment expression is the value
|
2911 |
|
|
assigned. Defined on scalar types.
|
2912 |
|
|
|
2913 |
|
|
`OP='
|
2914 |
|
|
Used in an expression of the form `A OP= B', and translated to
|
2915 |
|
|
`A = A OP B'. `OP=' and `=' have the same precedence. OP is any
|
2916 |
|
|
one of the operators `|', `^', `&', `<<', `>>', `+', `-', `*',
|
2917 |
|
|
`/', `%'.
|
2918 |
|
|
|
2919 |
|
|
`?:'
|
2920 |
|
|
The ternary operator. `A ? B : C' can be thought of as: if A
|
2921 |
|
|
then B else C. A should be of an integral type.
|
2922 |
|
|
|
2923 |
|
|
`||'
|
2924 |
|
|
Logical OR. Defined on integral types.
|
2925 |
|
|
|
2926 |
|
|
`&&'
|
2927 |
|
|
Logical AND. Defined on integral types.
|
2928 |
|
|
|
2929 |
|
|
`|'
|
2930 |
|
|
Bitwise OR. Defined on integral types.
|
2931 |
|
|
|
2932 |
|
|
`^'
|
2933 |
|
|
Bitwise exclusive-OR. Defined on integral types.
|
2934 |
|
|
|
2935 |
|
|
`&'
|
2936 |
|
|
Bitwise AND. Defined on integral types.
|
2937 |
|
|
|
2938 |
|
|
`==, !='
|
2939 |
|
|
Equality and inequality. Defined on scalar types. The value of
|
2940 |
|
|
these expressions is 0 for false and non-zero for true.
|
2941 |
|
|
|
2942 |
|
|
`<, >, <=, >='
|
2943 |
|
|
Less than, greater than, less than or equal, greater than or equal.
|
2944 |
|
|
Defined on scalar types. The value of these expressions is 0 for
|
2945 |
|
|
false and non-zero for true.
|
2946 |
|
|
|
2947 |
|
|
`<<, >>'
|
2948 |
|
|
left shift, and right shift. Defined on integral types.
|
2949 |
|
|
|
2950 |
|
|
`@'
|
2951 |
|
|
The GDB "artificial array" operator (*note Expressions:
|
2952 |
|
|
Expressions.).
|
2953 |
|
|
|
2954 |
|
|
`+, -'
|
2955 |
|
|
Addition and subtraction. Defined on integral types,
|
2956 |
|
|
floating-point types and pointer types.
|
2957 |
|
|
|
2958 |
|
|
`*, /, %'
|
2959 |
|
|
Multiplication, division, and modulus. Multiplication and
|
2960 |
|
|
division are defined on integral and floating-point types.
|
2961 |
|
|
Modulus is defined on integral types.
|
2962 |
|
|
|
2963 |
|
|
`++, --'
|
2964 |
|
|
Increment and decrement. When appearing before a variable, the
|
2965 |
|
|
operation is performed before the variable is used in an
|
2966 |
|
|
expression; when appearing after it, the variable's value is used
|
2967 |
|
|
before the operation takes place.
|
2968 |
|
|
|
2969 |
|
|
`*'
|
2970 |
|
|
Pointer dereferencing. Defined on pointer types. Same precedence
|
2971 |
|
|
as `++'.
|
2972 |
|
|
|
2973 |
|
|
`&'
|
2974 |
|
|
Address operator. Defined on variables. Same precedence as `++'.
|
2975 |
|
|
|
2976 |
|
|
For debugging C++, GDB implements a use of `&' beyond what is
|
2977 |
|
|
allowed in the C++ language itself: you can use `&(&REF)' to
|
2978 |
|
|
examine the address where a C++ reference variable (declared with
|
2979 |
|
|
`&REF') is stored.
|
2980 |
|
|
|
2981 |
|
|
`-'
|
2982 |
|
|
Negative. Defined on integral and floating-point types. Same
|
2983 |
|
|
precedence as `++'.
|
2984 |
|
|
|
2985 |
|
|
`!'
|
2986 |
|
|
Logical negation. Defined on integral types. Same precedence as
|
2987 |
|
|
`++'.
|
2988 |
|
|
|
2989 |
|
|
`~'
|
2990 |
|
|
Bitwise complement operator. Defined on integral types. Same
|
2991 |
|
|
precedence as `++'.
|
2992 |
|
|
|
2993 |
|
|
`., ->'
|
2994 |
|
|
Structure member, and pointer-to-structure member. For
|
2995 |
|
|
convenience, GDB regards the two as equivalent, choosing whether
|
2996 |
|
|
to dereference a pointer based on the stored type information.
|
2997 |
|
|
Defined on `struct' and `union' data.
|
2998 |
|
|
|
2999 |
|
|
`.*, ->*'
|
3000 |
|
|
Dereferences of pointers to members.
|
3001 |
|
|
|
3002 |
|
|
`[]'
|
3003 |
|
|
Array indexing. `A[I]' is defined as `*(A+I)'. Same precedence
|
3004 |
|
|
as `->'.
|
3005 |
|
|
|
3006 |
|
|
`()'
|
3007 |
|
|
Function parameter list. Same precedence as `->'.
|
3008 |
|
|
|
3009 |
|
|
`::'
|
3010 |
|
|
C++ scope resolution operator. Defined on `struct', `union', and
|
3011 |
|
|
`class' types.
|
3012 |
|
|
|
3013 |
|
|
`::'
|
3014 |
|
|
Doubled colons also represent the GDB scope operator (*note
|
3015 |
|
|
Expressions: Expressions.). Same precedence as `::', above.
|
3016 |
|
|
|
3017 |
|
|
If an operator is redefined in the user code, GDB usually attempts
|
3018 |
|
|
to invoke the redefined version instead of using the operator's
|
3019 |
|
|
predefined meaning.
|
3020 |
|
|
|
3021 |
|
|
|
3022 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: C Constants, Next: C Plus Plus Expressions, Prev: C Operators, Up: C
|
3023 |
|
|
|
3024 |
|
|
15.4.1.2 C and C++ Constants
|
3025 |
|
|
............................
|
3026 |
|
|
|
3027 |
|
|
GDB allows you to express the constants of C and C++ in the following
|
3028 |
|
|
ways:
|
3029 |
|
|
|
3030 |
|
|
* Integer constants are a sequence of digits. Octal constants are
|
3031 |
|
|
specified by a leading `0' (i.e. zero), and hexadecimal constants
|
3032 |
|
|
by a leading `0x' or `0X'. Constants may also end with a letter
|
3033 |
|
|
`l', specifying that the constant should be treated as a `long'
|
3034 |
|
|
value.
|
3035 |
|
|
|
3036 |
|
|
* Floating point constants are a sequence of digits, followed by a
|
3037 |
|
|
decimal point, followed by a sequence of digits, and optionally
|
3038 |
|
|
followed by an exponent. An exponent is of the form:
|
3039 |
|
|
`e[[+]|-]NNN', where NNN is another sequence of digits. The `+'
|
3040 |
|
|
is optional for positive exponents. A floating-point constant may
|
3041 |
|
|
also end with a letter `f' or `F', specifying that the constant
|
3042 |
|
|
should be treated as being of the `float' (as opposed to the
|
3043 |
|
|
default `double') type; or with a letter `l' or `L', which
|
3044 |
|
|
specifies a `long double' constant.
|
3045 |
|
|
|
3046 |
|
|
* Enumerated constants consist of enumerated identifiers, or their
|
3047 |
|
|
integral equivalents.
|
3048 |
|
|
|
3049 |
|
|
* Character constants are a single character surrounded by single
|
3050 |
|
|
quotes (`''), or a number--the ordinal value of the corresponding
|
3051 |
|
|
character (usually its ASCII value). Within quotes, the single
|
3052 |
|
|
character may be represented by a letter or by "escape sequences",
|
3053 |
|
|
which are of the form `\NNN', where NNN is the octal representation
|
3054 |
|
|
of the character's ordinal value; or of the form `\X', where `X'
|
3055 |
|
|
is a predefined special character--for example, `\n' for newline.
|
3056 |
|
|
|
3057 |
|
|
* String constants are a sequence of character constants surrounded
|
3058 |
|
|
by double quotes (`"'). Any valid character constant (as described
|
3059 |
|
|
above) may appear. Double quotes within the string must be
|
3060 |
|
|
preceded by a backslash, so for instance `"a\"b'c"' is a string of
|
3061 |
|
|
five characters.
|
3062 |
|
|
|
3063 |
|
|
* Pointer constants are an integral value. You can also write
|
3064 |
|
|
pointers to constants using the C operator `&'.
|
3065 |
|
|
|
3066 |
|
|
* Array constants are comma-separated lists surrounded by braces `{'
|
3067 |
|
|
and `}'; for example, `{1,2,3}' is a three-element array of
|
3068 |
|
|
integers, `{{1,2}, {3,4}, {5,6}}' is a three-by-two array, and
|
3069 |
|
|
`{&"hi", &"there", &"fred"}' is a three-element array of pointers.
|
3070 |
|
|
|
3071 |
|
|
|
3072 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: C Plus Plus Expressions, Next: C Defaults, Prev: C Constants, Up: C
|
3073 |
|
|
|
3074 |
|
|
15.4.1.3 C++ Expressions
|
3075 |
|
|
........................
|
3076 |
|
|
|
3077 |
|
|
GDB expression handling can interpret most C++ expressions.
|
3078 |
|
|
|
3079 |
|
|
_Warning:_ GDB can only debug C++ code if you use the proper
|
3080 |
|
|
compiler and the proper debug format. Currently, GDB works best
|
3081 |
|
|
when debugging C++ code that is compiled with GCC 2.95.3 or with
|
3082 |
|
|
GCC 3.1 or newer, using the options `-gdwarf-2' or `-gstabs+'.
|
3083 |
|
|
DWARF 2 is preferred over stabs+. Most configurations of GCC emit
|
3084 |
|
|
either DWARF 2 or stabs+ as their default debug format, so you
|
3085 |
|
|
usually don't need to specify a debug format explicitly. Other
|
3086 |
|
|
compilers and/or debug formats are likely to work badly or not at
|
3087 |
|
|
all when using GDB to debug C++ code.
|
3088 |
|
|
|
3089 |
|
|
1. Member function calls are allowed; you can use expressions like
|
3090 |
|
|
|
3091 |
|
|
count = aml->GetOriginal(x, y)
|
3092 |
|
|
|
3093 |
|
|
2. While a member function is active (in the selected stack frame),
|
3094 |
|
|
your expressions have the same namespace available as the member
|
3095 |
|
|
function; that is, GDB allows implicit references to the class
|
3096 |
|
|
instance pointer `this' following the same rules as C++.
|
3097 |
|
|
|
3098 |
|
|
3. You can call overloaded functions; GDB resolves the function call
|
3099 |
|
|
to the right definition, with some restrictions. GDB does not
|
3100 |
|
|
perform overload resolution involving user-defined type
|
3101 |
|
|
conversions, calls to constructors, or instantiations of templates
|
3102 |
|
|
that do not exist in the program. It also cannot handle ellipsis
|
3103 |
|
|
argument lists or default arguments.
|
3104 |
|
|
|
3105 |
|
|
It does perform integral conversions and promotions, floating-point
|
3106 |
|
|
promotions, arithmetic conversions, pointer conversions,
|
3107 |
|
|
conversions of class objects to base classes, and standard
|
3108 |
|
|
conversions such as those of functions or arrays to pointers; it
|
3109 |
|
|
requires an exact match on the number of function arguments.
|
3110 |
|
|
|
3111 |
|
|
Overload resolution is always performed, unless you have specified
|
3112 |
|
|
`set overload-resolution off'. *Note GDB Features for C++:
|
3113 |
|
|
Debugging C Plus Plus.
|
3114 |
|
|
|
3115 |
|
|
You must specify `set overload-resolution off' in order to use an
|
3116 |
|
|
explicit function signature to call an overloaded function, as in
|
3117 |
|
|
p 'foo(char,int)'('x', 13)
|
3118 |
|
|
|
3119 |
342 |
jeremybenn |
The GDB command-completion facility can simplify this; see *note
|
3120 |
330 |
jeremybenn |
Command Completion: Completion.
|
3121 |
|
|
|
3122 |
|
|
4. GDB understands variables declared as C++ references; you can use
|
3123 |
|
|
them in expressions just as you do in C++ source--they are
|
3124 |
|
|
automatically dereferenced.
|
3125 |
|
|
|
3126 |
|
|
In the parameter list shown when GDB displays a frame, the values
|
3127 |
|
|
of reference variables are not displayed (unlike other variables);
|
3128 |
|
|
this avoids clutter, since references are often used for large
|
3129 |
|
|
structures. The _address_ of a reference variable is always
|
3130 |
|
|
shown, unless you have specified `set print address off'.
|
3131 |
|
|
|
3132 |
|
|
5. GDB supports the C++ name resolution operator `::'--your
|
3133 |
|
|
expressions can use it just as expressions in your program do.
|
3134 |
|
|
Since one scope may be defined in another, you can use `::'
|
3135 |
|
|
repeatedly if necessary, for example in an expression like
|
3136 |
|
|
`SCOPE1::SCOPE2::NAME'. GDB also allows resolving name scope by
|
3137 |
|
|
reference to source files, in both C and C++ debugging (*note
|
3138 |
|
|
Program Variables: Variables.).
|
3139 |
|
|
|
3140 |
|
|
In addition, when used with HP's C++ compiler, GDB supports calling
|
3141 |
|
|
virtual functions correctly, printing out virtual bases of objects,
|
3142 |
|
|
calling functions in a base subobject, casting objects, and invoking
|
3143 |
|
|
user-defined operators.
|
3144 |
|
|
|
3145 |
|
|
|
3146 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: C Defaults, Next: C Checks, Prev: C Plus Plus Expressions, Up: C
|
3147 |
|
|
|
3148 |
|
|
15.4.1.4 C and C++ Defaults
|
3149 |
|
|
...........................
|
3150 |
|
|
|
3151 |
|
|
If you allow GDB to set type and range checking automatically, they
|
3152 |
|
|
both default to `off' whenever the working language changes to C or
|
3153 |
|
|
C++. This happens regardless of whether you or GDB selects the working
|
3154 |
|
|
language.
|
3155 |
|
|
|
3156 |
|
|
If you allow GDB to set the language automatically, it recognizes
|
3157 |
|
|
source files whose names end with `.c', `.C', or `.cc', etc, and when
|
3158 |
|
|
GDB enters code compiled from one of these files, it sets the working
|
3159 |
|
|
language to C or C++. *Note Having GDB Infer the Source Language:
|
3160 |
|
|
Automatically, for further details.
|
3161 |
|
|
|
3162 |
|
|
|
3163 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: C Checks, Next: Debugging C, Prev: C Defaults, Up: C
|
3164 |
|
|
|
3165 |
|
|
15.4.1.5 C and C++ Type and Range Checks
|
3166 |
|
|
........................................
|
3167 |
|
|
|
3168 |
|
|
By default, when GDB parses C or C++ expressions, type checking is not
|
3169 |
|
|
used. However, if you turn type checking on, GDB considers two
|
3170 |
|
|
variables type equivalent if:
|
3171 |
|
|
|
3172 |
|
|
* The two variables are structured and have the same structure,
|
3173 |
|
|
union, or enumerated tag.
|
3174 |
|
|
|
3175 |
|
|
* The two variables have the same type name, or types that have been
|
3176 |
|
|
declared equivalent through `typedef'.
|
3177 |
|
|
|
3178 |
|
|
|
3179 |
|
|
Range checking, if turned on, is done on mathematical operations.
|
3180 |
|
|
Array indices are not checked, since they are often used to index a
|
3181 |
|
|
pointer that is not itself an array.
|
3182 |
|
|
|
3183 |
|
|
|
3184 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Debugging C, Next: Debugging C Plus Plus, Prev: C Checks, Up: C
|
3185 |
|
|
|
3186 |
|
|
15.4.1.6 GDB and C
|
3187 |
|
|
..................
|
3188 |
|
|
|
3189 |
|
|
The `set print union' and `show print union' commands apply to the
|
3190 |
|
|
`union' type. When set to `on', any `union' that is inside a `struct'
|
3191 |
|
|
or `class' is also printed. Otherwise, it appears as `{...}'.
|
3192 |
|
|
|
3193 |
|
|
The `@' operator aids in the debugging of dynamic arrays, formed
|
3194 |
|
|
with pointers and a memory allocation function. *Note Expressions:
|
3195 |
|
|
Expressions.
|
3196 |
|
|
|
3197 |
|
|
|
3198 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Debugging C Plus Plus, Next: Decimal Floating Point, Prev: Debugging C, Up: C
|
3199 |
|
|
|
3200 |
|
|
15.4.1.7 GDB Features for C++
|
3201 |
|
|
.............................
|
3202 |
|
|
|
3203 |
|
|
Some GDB commands are particularly useful with C++, and some are
|
3204 |
|
|
designed specifically for use with C++. Here is a summary:
|
3205 |
|
|
|
3206 |
|
|
`breakpoint menus'
|
3207 |
|
|
When you want a breakpoint in a function whose name is overloaded,
|
3208 |
|
|
GDB has the capability to display a menu of possible breakpoint
|
3209 |
|
|
locations to help you specify which function definition you want.
|
3210 |
|
|
*Note Ambiguous Expressions: Ambiguous Expressions.
|
3211 |
|
|
|
3212 |
|
|
`rbreak REGEX'
|
3213 |
|
|
Setting breakpoints using regular expressions is helpful for
|
3214 |
|
|
setting breakpoints on overloaded functions that are not members
|
3215 |
|
|
of any special classes. *Note Setting Breakpoints: Set Breaks.
|
3216 |
|
|
|
3217 |
|
|
`catch throw'
|
3218 |
|
|
`catch catch'
|
3219 |
|
|
Debug C++ exception handling using these commands. *Note Setting
|
3220 |
|
|
Catchpoints: Set Catchpoints.
|
3221 |
|
|
|
3222 |
|
|
`ptype TYPENAME'
|
3223 |
|
|
Print inheritance relationships as well as other information for
|
3224 |
|
|
type TYPENAME. *Note Examining the Symbol Table: Symbols.
|
3225 |
|
|
|
3226 |
|
|
`set print demangle'
|
3227 |
|
|
`show print demangle'
|
3228 |
|
|
`set print asm-demangle'
|
3229 |
|
|
`show print asm-demangle'
|
3230 |
|
|
Control whether C++ symbols display in their source form, both when
|
3231 |
|
|
displaying code as C++ source and when displaying disassemblies.
|
3232 |
|
|
*Note Print Settings: Print Settings.
|
3233 |
|
|
|
3234 |
|
|
`set print object'
|
3235 |
|
|
`show print object'
|
3236 |
|
|
Choose whether to print derived (actual) or declared types of
|
3237 |
|
|
objects. *Note Print Settings: Print Settings.
|
3238 |
|
|
|
3239 |
|
|
`set print vtbl'
|
3240 |
|
|
`show print vtbl'
|
3241 |
|
|
Control the format for printing virtual function tables. *Note
|
3242 |
|
|
Print Settings: Print Settings. (The `vtbl' commands do not work
|
3243 |
|
|
on programs compiled with the HP ANSI C++ compiler (`aCC').)
|
3244 |
|
|
|
3245 |
|
|
`set overload-resolution on'
|
3246 |
|
|
Enable overload resolution for C++ expression evaluation. The
|
3247 |
|
|
default is on. For overloaded functions, GDB evaluates the
|
3248 |
|
|
arguments and searches for a function whose signature matches the
|
3249 |
342 |
jeremybenn |
argument types, using the standard C++ conversion rules (see *note
|
3250 |
330 |
jeremybenn |
C++ Expressions: C Plus Plus Expressions, for details). If it
|
3251 |
|
|
cannot find a match, it emits a message.
|
3252 |
|
|
|
3253 |
|
|
`set overload-resolution off'
|
3254 |
|
|
Disable overload resolution for C++ expression evaluation. For
|
3255 |
|
|
overloaded functions that are not class member functions, GDB
|
3256 |
|
|
chooses the first function of the specified name that it finds in
|
3257 |
|
|
the symbol table, whether or not its arguments are of the correct
|
3258 |
|
|
type. For overloaded functions that are class member functions,
|
3259 |
|
|
GDB searches for a function whose signature _exactly_ matches the
|
3260 |
|
|
argument types.
|
3261 |
|
|
|
3262 |
|
|
`show overload-resolution'
|
3263 |
|
|
Show the current setting of overload resolution.
|
3264 |
|
|
|
3265 |
|
|
`Overloaded symbol names'
|
3266 |
|
|
You can specify a particular definition of an overloaded symbol,
|
3267 |
|
|
using the same notation that is used to declare such symbols in
|
3268 |
|
|
C++: type `SYMBOL(TYPES)' rather than just SYMBOL. You can also
|
3269 |
|
|
use the GDB command-line word completion facilities to list the
|
3270 |
|
|
available choices, or to finish the type list for you. *Note
|
3271 |
|
|
Command Completion: Completion, for details on how to do this.
|
3272 |
|
|
|
3273 |
|
|
|
3274 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Decimal Floating Point, Prev: Debugging C Plus Plus, Up: C
|
3275 |
|
|
|
3276 |
|
|
15.4.1.8 Decimal Floating Point format
|
3277 |
|
|
......................................
|
3278 |
|
|
|
3279 |
|
|
GDB can examine, set and perform computations with numbers in decimal
|
3280 |
|
|
floating point format, which in the C language correspond to the
|
3281 |
|
|
`_Decimal32', `_Decimal64' and `_Decimal128' types as specified by the
|
3282 |
|
|
extension to support decimal floating-point arithmetic.
|
3283 |
|
|
|
3284 |
|
|
There are two encodings in use, depending on the architecture: BID
|
3285 |
|
|
(Binary Integer Decimal) for x86 and x86-64, and DPD (Densely Packed
|
3286 |
|
|
Decimal) for PowerPC. GDB will use the appropriate encoding for the
|
3287 |
|
|
configured target.
|
3288 |
|
|
|
3289 |
|
|
Because of a limitation in `libdecnumber', the library used by GDB
|
3290 |
|
|
to manipulate decimal floating point numbers, it is not possible to
|
3291 |
|
|
convert (using a cast, for example) integers wider than 32-bit to
|
3292 |
|
|
decimal float.
|
3293 |
|
|
|
3294 |
|
|
In addition, in order to imitate GDB's behaviour with binary floating
|
3295 |
|
|
point computations, error checking in decimal float operations ignores
|
3296 |
|
|
underflow, overflow and divide by zero exceptions.
|
3297 |
|
|
|
3298 |
|
|
In the PowerPC architecture, GDB provides a set of pseudo-registers
|
3299 |
|
|
to inspect `_Decimal128' values stored in floating point registers.
|
3300 |
342 |
jeremybenn |
See *note PowerPC: PowerPC. for more details.
|
3301 |
330 |
jeremybenn |
|
3302 |
|
|
|
3303 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: D, Next: Objective-C, Prev: C, Up: Supported Languages
|
3304 |
|
|
|
3305 |
|
|
15.4.2 D
|
3306 |
|
|
--------
|
3307 |
|
|
|
3308 |
|
|
GDB can be used to debug programs written in D and compiled with GDC,
|
3309 |
|
|
LDC or DMD compilers. Currently GDB supports only one D specific
|
3310 |
|
|
feature -- dynamic arrays.
|
3311 |
|
|
|
3312 |
|
|
|
3313 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Objective-C, Next: Fortran, Prev: D, Up: Supported Languages
|
3314 |
|
|
|
3315 |
|
|
15.4.3 Objective-C
|
3316 |
|
|
------------------
|
3317 |
|
|
|
3318 |
|
|
This section provides information about some commands and command
|
3319 |
342 |
jeremybenn |
options that are useful for debugging Objective-C code. See also *note
|
3320 |
|
|
info classes: Symbols, and *note info selectors: Symbols, for a few
|
3321 |
330 |
jeremybenn |
more commands specific to Objective-C support.
|
3322 |
|
|
|
3323 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
3324 |
|
|
|
3325 |
|
|
* Method Names in Commands::
|
3326 |
|
|
* The Print Command with Objective-C::
|
3327 |
|
|
|
3328 |
|
|
|
3329 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Method Names in Commands, Next: The Print Command with Objective-C, Up: Objective-C
|
3330 |
|
|
|
3331 |
|
|
15.4.3.1 Method Names in Commands
|
3332 |
|
|
.................................
|
3333 |
|
|
|
3334 |
|
|
The following commands have been extended to accept Objective-C method
|
3335 |
|
|
names as line specifications:
|
3336 |
|
|
|
3337 |
|
|
* `clear'
|
3338 |
|
|
|
3339 |
|
|
* `break'
|
3340 |
|
|
|
3341 |
|
|
* `info line'
|
3342 |
|
|
|
3343 |
|
|
* `jump'
|
3344 |
|
|
|
3345 |
|
|
* `list'
|
3346 |
|
|
|
3347 |
|
|
A fully qualified Objective-C method name is specified as
|
3348 |
|
|
|
3349 |
|
|
-[CLASS METHODNAME]
|
3350 |
|
|
|
3351 |
|
|
where the minus sign is used to indicate an instance method and a
|
3352 |
|
|
plus sign (not shown) is used to indicate a class method. The class
|
3353 |
|
|
name CLASS and method name METHODNAME are enclosed in brackets, similar
|
3354 |
|
|
to the way messages are specified in Objective-C source code. For
|
3355 |
|
|
example, to set a breakpoint at the `create' instance method of class
|
3356 |
|
|
`Fruit' in the program currently being debugged, enter:
|
3357 |
|
|
|
3358 |
|
|
break -[Fruit create]
|
3359 |
|
|
|
3360 |
|
|
To list ten program lines around the `initialize' class method,
|
3361 |
|
|
enter:
|
3362 |
|
|
|
3363 |
|
|
list +[NSText initialize]
|
3364 |
|
|
|
3365 |
|
|
In the current version of GDB, the plus or minus sign is required.
|
3366 |
|
|
In future versions of GDB, the plus or minus sign will be optional, but
|
3367 |
|
|
you can use it to narrow the search. It is also possible to specify
|
3368 |
|
|
just a method name:
|
3369 |
|
|
|
3370 |
|
|
break create
|
3371 |
|
|
|
3372 |
|
|
You must specify the complete method name, including any colons. If
|
3373 |
|
|
your program's source files contain more than one `create' method,
|
3374 |
|
|
you'll be presented with a numbered list of classes that implement that
|
3375 |
|
|
method. Indicate your choice by number, or type `0' to exit if none
|
3376 |
|
|
apply.
|
3377 |
|
|
|
3378 |
|
|
As another example, to clear a breakpoint established at the
|
3379 |
|
|
`makeKeyAndOrderFront:' method of the `NSWindow' class, enter:
|
3380 |
|
|
|
3381 |
|
|
clear -[NSWindow makeKeyAndOrderFront:]
|
3382 |
|
|
|
3383 |
|
|
|
3384 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: The Print Command with Objective-C, Prev: Method Names in Commands, Up: Objective-C
|
3385 |
|
|
|
3386 |
|
|
15.4.3.2 The Print Command With Objective-C
|
3387 |
|
|
...........................................
|
3388 |
|
|
|
3389 |
|
|
The print command has also been extended to accept methods. For
|
3390 |
|
|
example:
|
3391 |
|
|
|
3392 |
|
|
print -[OBJECT hash]
|
3393 |
|
|
|
3394 |
|
|
will tell GDB to send the `hash' message to OBJECT and print the
|
3395 |
|
|
result. Also, an additional command has been added, `print-object' or
|
3396 |
|
|
`po' for short, which is meant to print the description of an object.
|
3397 |
|
|
However, this command may only work with certain Objective-C libraries
|
3398 |
|
|
that have a particular hook function, `_NSPrintForDebugger', defined.
|
3399 |
|
|
|
3400 |
|
|
|
3401 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Fortran, Next: Pascal, Prev: Objective-C, Up: Supported Languages
|
3402 |
|
|
|
3403 |
|
|
15.4.4 Fortran
|
3404 |
|
|
--------------
|
3405 |
|
|
|
3406 |
|
|
GDB can be used to debug programs written in Fortran, but it currently
|
3407 |
|
|
supports only the features of Fortran 77 language.
|
3408 |
|
|
|
3409 |
|
|
Some Fortran compilers (GNU Fortran 77 and Fortran 95 compilers
|
3410 |
|
|
among them) append an underscore to the names of variables and
|
3411 |
|
|
functions. When you debug programs compiled by those compilers, you
|
3412 |
|
|
will need to refer to variables and functions with a trailing
|
3413 |
|
|
underscore.
|
3414 |
|
|
|
3415 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
3416 |
|
|
|
3417 |
|
|
* Fortran Operators:: Fortran operators and expressions
|
3418 |
|
|
* Fortran Defaults:: Default settings for Fortran
|
3419 |
|
|
* Special Fortran Commands:: Special GDB commands for Fortran
|
3420 |
|
|
|
3421 |
|
|
|
3422 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Fortran Operators, Next: Fortran Defaults, Up: Fortran
|
3423 |
|
|
|
3424 |
|
|
15.4.4.1 Fortran Operators and Expressions
|
3425 |
|
|
..........................................
|
3426 |
|
|
|
3427 |
|
|
Operators must be defined on values of specific types. For instance,
|
3428 |
|
|
`+' is defined on numbers, but not on characters or other non-
|
3429 |
|
|
arithmetic types. Operators are often defined on groups of types.
|
3430 |
|
|
|
3431 |
|
|
`**'
|
3432 |
|
|
The exponentiation operator. It raises the first operand to the
|
3433 |
|
|
power of the second one.
|
3434 |
|
|
|
3435 |
|
|
`:'
|
3436 |
|
|
The range operator. Normally used in the form of array(low:high)
|
3437 |
|
|
to represent a section of array.
|
3438 |
|
|
|
3439 |
|
|
`%'
|
3440 |
|
|
The access component operator. Normally used to access elements
|
3441 |
|
|
in derived types. Also suitable for unions. As unions aren't
|
3442 |
|
|
part of regular Fortran, this can only happen when accessing a
|
3443 |
|
|
register that uses a gdbarch-defined union type.
|
3444 |
|
|
|
3445 |
|
|
|
3446 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Fortran Defaults, Next: Special Fortran Commands, Prev: Fortran Operators, Up: Fortran
|
3447 |
|
|
|
3448 |
|
|
15.4.4.2 Fortran Defaults
|
3449 |
|
|
.........................
|
3450 |
|
|
|
3451 |
|
|
Fortran symbols are usually case-insensitive, so GDB by default uses
|
3452 |
|
|
case-insensitive matches for Fortran symbols. You can change that with
|
3453 |
342 |
jeremybenn |
the `set case-insensitive' command, see *note Symbols::, for the
|
3454 |
330 |
jeremybenn |
details.
|
3455 |
|
|
|
3456 |
|
|
|
3457 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Special Fortran Commands, Prev: Fortran Defaults, Up: Fortran
|
3458 |
|
|
|
3459 |
|
|
15.4.4.3 Special Fortran Commands
|
3460 |
|
|
.................................
|
3461 |
|
|
|
3462 |
|
|
GDB has some commands to support Fortran-specific features, such as
|
3463 |
|
|
displaying common blocks.
|
3464 |
|
|
|
3465 |
|
|
`info common [COMMON-NAME]'
|
3466 |
|
|
This command prints the values contained in the Fortran `COMMON'
|
3467 |
|
|
block whose name is COMMON-NAME. With no argument, the names of
|
3468 |
|
|
all `COMMON' blocks visible at the current program location are
|
3469 |
|
|
printed.
|
3470 |
|
|
|
3471 |
|
|
|
3472 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Pascal, Next: Modula-2, Prev: Fortran, Up: Supported Languages
|
3473 |
|
|
|
3474 |
|
|
15.4.5 Pascal
|
3475 |
|
|
-------------
|
3476 |
|
|
|
3477 |
|
|
Debugging Pascal programs which use sets, subranges, file variables, or
|
3478 |
|
|
nested functions does not currently work. GDB does not support
|
3479 |
|
|
entering expressions, printing values, or similar features using Pascal
|
3480 |
|
|
syntax.
|
3481 |
|
|
|
3482 |
|
|
The Pascal-specific command `set print pascal_static-members'
|
3483 |
|
|
controls whether static members of Pascal objects are displayed. *Note
|
3484 |
|
|
pascal_static-members: Print Settings.
|
3485 |
|
|
|
3486 |
|
|
|
3487 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Modula-2, Next: Ada, Prev: Pascal, Up: Supported Languages
|
3488 |
|
|
|
3489 |
|
|
15.4.6 Modula-2
|
3490 |
|
|
---------------
|
3491 |
|
|
|
3492 |
|
|
The extensions made to GDB to support Modula-2 only support output from
|
3493 |
|
|
the GNU Modula-2 compiler (which is currently being developed). Other
|
3494 |
|
|
Modula-2 compilers are not currently supported, and attempting to debug
|
3495 |
|
|
executables produced by them is most likely to give an error as GDB
|
3496 |
|
|
reads in the executable's symbol table.
|
3497 |
|
|
|
3498 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
3499 |
|
|
|
3500 |
|
|
* M2 Operators:: Built-in operators
|
3501 |
|
|
* Built-In Func/Proc:: Built-in functions and procedures
|
3502 |
|
|
* M2 Constants:: Modula-2 constants
|
3503 |
|
|
* M2 Types:: Modula-2 types
|
3504 |
|
|
* M2 Defaults:: Default settings for Modula-2
|
3505 |
|
|
* Deviations:: Deviations from standard Modula-2
|
3506 |
|
|
* M2 Checks:: Modula-2 type and range checks
|
3507 |
|
|
* M2 Scope:: The scope operators `::' and `.'
|
3508 |
|
|
* GDB/M2:: GDB and Modula-2
|
3509 |
|
|
|
3510 |
|
|
|
3511 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: M2 Operators, Next: Built-In Func/Proc, Up: Modula-2
|
3512 |
|
|
|
3513 |
|
|
15.4.6.1 Operators
|
3514 |
|
|
..................
|
3515 |
|
|
|
3516 |
|
|
Operators must be defined on values of specific types. For instance,
|
3517 |
|
|
`+' is defined on numbers, but not on structures. Operators are often
|
3518 |
|
|
defined on groups of types. For the purposes of Modula-2, the
|
3519 |
|
|
following definitions hold:
|
3520 |
|
|
|
3521 |
|
|
* _Integral types_ consist of `INTEGER', `CARDINAL', and their
|
3522 |
|
|
subranges.
|
3523 |
|
|
|
3524 |
|
|
* _Character types_ consist of `CHAR' and its subranges.
|
3525 |
|
|
|
3526 |
|
|
* _Floating-point types_ consist of `REAL'.
|
3527 |
|
|
|
3528 |
|
|
* _Pointer types_ consist of anything declared as `POINTER TO TYPE'.
|
3529 |
|
|
|
3530 |
|
|
* _Scalar types_ consist of all of the above.
|
3531 |
|
|
|
3532 |
|
|
* _Set types_ consist of `SET' and `BITSET' types.
|
3533 |
|
|
|
3534 |
|
|
* _Boolean types_ consist of `BOOLEAN'.
|
3535 |
|
|
|
3536 |
|
|
The following operators are supported, and appear in order of
|
3537 |
|
|
increasing precedence:
|
3538 |
|
|
|
3539 |
|
|
`,'
|
3540 |
|
|
Function argument or array index separator.
|
3541 |
|
|
|
3542 |
|
|
`:='
|
3543 |
|
|
Assignment. The value of VAR `:=' VALUE is VALUE.
|
3544 |
|
|
|
3545 |
|
|
`<, >'
|
3546 |
|
|
Less than, greater than on integral, floating-point, or enumerated
|
3547 |
|
|
types.
|
3548 |
|
|
|
3549 |
|
|
`<=, >='
|
3550 |
|
|
Less than or equal to, greater than or equal to on integral,
|
3551 |
|
|
floating-point and enumerated types, or set inclusion on set
|
3552 |
|
|
types. Same precedence as `<'.
|
3553 |
|
|
|
3554 |
|
|
`=, <>, #'
|
3555 |
|
|
Equality and two ways of expressing inequality, valid on scalar
|
3556 |
|
|
types. Same precedence as `<'. In GDB scripts, only `<>' is
|
3557 |
|
|
available for inequality, since `#' conflicts with the script
|
3558 |
|
|
comment character.
|
3559 |
|
|
|
3560 |
|
|
`IN'
|
3561 |
|
|
Set membership. Defined on set types and the types of their
|
3562 |
|
|
members. Same precedence as `<'.
|
3563 |
|
|
|
3564 |
|
|
`OR'
|
3565 |
|
|
Boolean disjunction. Defined on boolean types.
|
3566 |
|
|
|
3567 |
|
|
`AND, &'
|
3568 |
|
|
Boolean conjunction. Defined on boolean types.
|
3569 |
|
|
|
3570 |
|
|
`@'
|
3571 |
|
|
The GDB "artificial array" operator (*note Expressions:
|
3572 |
|
|
Expressions.).
|
3573 |
|
|
|
3574 |
|
|
`+, -'
|
3575 |
|
|
Addition and subtraction on integral and floating-point types, or
|
3576 |
|
|
union and difference on set types.
|
3577 |
|
|
|
3578 |
|
|
`*'
|
3579 |
|
|
Multiplication on integral and floating-point types, or set
|
3580 |
|
|
intersection on set types.
|
3581 |
|
|
|
3582 |
|
|
`/'
|
3583 |
|
|
Division on floating-point types, or symmetric set difference on
|
3584 |
|
|
set types. Same precedence as `*'.
|
3585 |
|
|
|
3586 |
|
|
`DIV, MOD'
|
3587 |
|
|
Integer division and remainder. Defined on integral types. Same
|
3588 |
|
|
precedence as `*'.
|
3589 |
|
|
|
3590 |
|
|
`-'
|
3591 |
|
|
Negative. Defined on `INTEGER' and `REAL' data.
|
3592 |
|
|
|
3593 |
|
|
`^'
|
3594 |
|
|
Pointer dereferencing. Defined on pointer types.
|
3595 |
|
|
|
3596 |
|
|
`NOT'
|
3597 |
|
|
Boolean negation. Defined on boolean types. Same precedence as
|
3598 |
|
|
`^'.
|
3599 |
|
|
|
3600 |
|
|
`.'
|
3601 |
|
|
`RECORD' field selector. Defined on `RECORD' data. Same
|
3602 |
|
|
precedence as `^'.
|
3603 |
|
|
|
3604 |
|
|
`[]'
|
3605 |
|
|
Array indexing. Defined on `ARRAY' data. Same precedence as `^'.
|
3606 |
|
|
|
3607 |
|
|
`()'
|
3608 |
|
|
Procedure argument list. Defined on `PROCEDURE' objects. Same
|
3609 |
|
|
precedence as `^'.
|
3610 |
|
|
|
3611 |
|
|
`::, .'
|
3612 |
|
|
GDB and Modula-2 scope operators.
|
3613 |
|
|
|
3614 |
|
|
_Warning:_ Set expressions and their operations are not yet
|
3615 |
|
|
supported, so GDB treats the use of the operator `IN', or the use
|
3616 |
|
|
of operators `+', `-', `*', `/', `=', , `<>', `#', `<=', and `>='
|
3617 |
|
|
on sets as an error.
|
3618 |
|
|
|
3619 |
|
|
|
3620 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Built-In Func/Proc, Next: M2 Constants, Prev: M2 Operators, Up: Modula-2
|
3621 |
|
|
|
3622 |
|
|
15.4.6.2 Built-in Functions and Procedures
|
3623 |
|
|
..........................................
|
3624 |
|
|
|
3625 |
|
|
Modula-2 also makes available several built-in procedures and functions.
|
3626 |
|
|
In describing these, the following metavariables are used:
|
3627 |
|
|
|
3628 |
|
|
A
|
3629 |
|
|
represents an `ARRAY' variable.
|
3630 |
|
|
|
3631 |
|
|
C
|
3632 |
|
|
represents a `CHAR' constant or variable.
|
3633 |
|
|
|
3634 |
|
|
I
|
3635 |
|
|
represents a variable or constant of integral type.
|
3636 |
|
|
|
3637 |
|
|
M
|
3638 |
|
|
represents an identifier that belongs to a set. Generally used in
|
3639 |
|
|
the same function with the metavariable S. The type of S should
|
3640 |
|
|
be `SET OF MTYPE' (where MTYPE is the type of M).
|
3641 |
|
|
|
3642 |
|
|
N
|
3643 |
|
|
represents a variable or constant of integral or floating-point
|
3644 |
|
|
type.
|
3645 |
|
|
|
3646 |
|
|
R
|
3647 |
|
|
represents a variable or constant of floating-point type.
|
3648 |
|
|
|
3649 |
|
|
T
|
3650 |
|
|
represents a type.
|
3651 |
|
|
|
3652 |
|
|
V
|
3653 |
|
|
represents a variable.
|
3654 |
|
|
|
3655 |
|
|
X
|
3656 |
|
|
represents a variable or constant of one of many types. See the
|
3657 |
|
|
explanation of the function for details.
|
3658 |
|
|
|
3659 |
|
|
All Modula-2 built-in procedures also return a result, described
|
3660 |
|
|
below.
|
3661 |
|
|
|
3662 |
|
|
`ABS(N)'
|
3663 |
|
|
Returns the absolute value of N.
|
3664 |
|
|
|
3665 |
|
|
`CAP(C)'
|
3666 |
|
|
If C is a lower case letter, it returns its upper case equivalent,
|
3667 |
|
|
otherwise it returns its argument.
|
3668 |
|
|
|
3669 |
|
|
`CHR(I)'
|
3670 |
|
|
Returns the character whose ordinal value is I.
|
3671 |
|
|
|
3672 |
|
|
`DEC(V)'
|
3673 |
|
|
Decrements the value in the variable V by one. Returns the new
|
3674 |
|
|
value.
|
3675 |
|
|
|
3676 |
|
|
`DEC(V,I)'
|
3677 |
|
|
Decrements the value in the variable V by I. Returns the new
|
3678 |
|
|
value.
|
3679 |
|
|
|
3680 |
|
|
`EXCL(M,S)'
|
3681 |
|
|
Removes the element M from the set S. Returns the new set.
|
3682 |
|
|
|
3683 |
|
|
`FLOAT(I)'
|
3684 |
|
|
Returns the floating point equivalent of the integer I.
|
3685 |
|
|
|
3686 |
|
|
`HIGH(A)'
|
3687 |
|
|
Returns the index of the last member of A.
|
3688 |
|
|
|
3689 |
|
|
`INC(V)'
|
3690 |
|
|
Increments the value in the variable V by one. Returns the new
|
3691 |
|
|
value.
|
3692 |
|
|
|
3693 |
|
|
`INC(V,I)'
|
3694 |
|
|
Increments the value in the variable V by I. Returns the new
|
3695 |
|
|
value.
|
3696 |
|
|
|
3697 |
|
|
`INCL(M,S)'
|
3698 |
|
|
Adds the element M to the set S if it is not already there.
|
3699 |
|
|
Returns the new set.
|
3700 |
|
|
|
3701 |
|
|
`MAX(T)'
|
3702 |
|
|
Returns the maximum value of the type T.
|
3703 |
|
|
|
3704 |
|
|
`MIN(T)'
|
3705 |
|
|
Returns the minimum value of the type T.
|
3706 |
|
|
|
3707 |
|
|
`ODD(I)'
|
3708 |
|
|
Returns boolean TRUE if I is an odd number.
|
3709 |
|
|
|
3710 |
|
|
`ORD(X)'
|
3711 |
|
|
Returns the ordinal value of its argument. For example, the
|
3712 |
|
|
ordinal value of a character is its ASCII value (on machines
|
3713 |
|
|
supporting the ASCII character set). X must be of an ordered
|
3714 |
|
|
type, which include integral, character and enumerated types.
|
3715 |
|
|
|
3716 |
|
|
`SIZE(X)'
|
3717 |
|
|
Returns the size of its argument. X can be a variable or a type.
|
3718 |
|
|
|
3719 |
|
|
`TRUNC(R)'
|
3720 |
|
|
Returns the integral part of R.
|
3721 |
|
|
|
3722 |
|
|
`TSIZE(X)'
|
3723 |
|
|
Returns the size of its argument. X can be a variable or a type.
|
3724 |
|
|
|
3725 |
|
|
`VAL(T,I)'
|
3726 |
|
|
Returns the member of the type T whose ordinal value is I.
|
3727 |
|
|
|
3728 |
|
|
_Warning:_ Sets and their operations are not yet supported, so
|
3729 |
|
|
GDB treats the use of procedures `INCL' and `EXCL' as an error.
|
3730 |
|
|
|
3731 |
|
|
|
3732 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: M2 Constants, Next: M2 Types, Prev: Built-In Func/Proc, Up: Modula-2
|
3733 |
|
|
|
3734 |
|
|
15.4.6.3 Constants
|
3735 |
|
|
..................
|
3736 |
|
|
|
3737 |
|
|
GDB allows you to express the constants of Modula-2 in the following
|
3738 |
|
|
ways:
|
3739 |
|
|
|
3740 |
|
|
* Integer constants are simply a sequence of digits. When used in an
|
3741 |
|
|
expression, a constant is interpreted to be type-compatible with
|
3742 |
|
|
the rest of the expression. Hexadecimal integers are specified by
|
3743 |
|
|
a trailing `H', and octal integers by a trailing `B'.
|
3744 |
|
|
|
3745 |
|
|
* Floating point constants appear as a sequence of digits, followed
|
3746 |
|
|
by a decimal point and another sequence of digits. An optional
|
3747 |
|
|
exponent can then be specified, in the form `E[+|-]NNN', where
|
3748 |
|
|
`[+|-]NNN' is the desired exponent. All of the digits of the
|
3749 |
|
|
floating point constant must be valid decimal (base 10) digits.
|
3750 |
|
|
|
3751 |
|
|
* Character constants consist of a single character enclosed by a
|
3752 |
|
|
pair of like quotes, either single (`'') or double (`"'). They may
|
3753 |
|
|
also be expressed by their ordinal value (their ASCII value,
|
3754 |
|
|
usually) followed by a `C'.
|
3755 |
|
|
|
3756 |
|
|
* String constants consist of a sequence of characters enclosed by a
|
3757 |
|
|
pair of like quotes, either single (`'') or double (`"'). Escape
|
3758 |
|
|
sequences in the style of C are also allowed. *Note C and C++
|
3759 |
|
|
Constants: C Constants, for a brief explanation of escape
|
3760 |
|
|
sequences.
|
3761 |
|
|
|
3762 |
|
|
* Enumerated constants consist of an enumerated identifier.
|
3763 |
|
|
|
3764 |
|
|
* Boolean constants consist of the identifiers `TRUE' and `FALSE'.
|
3765 |
|
|
|
3766 |
|
|
* Pointer constants consist of integral values only.
|
3767 |
|
|
|
3768 |
|
|
* Set constants are not yet supported.
|
3769 |
|
|
|
3770 |
|
|
|
3771 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: M2 Types, Next: M2 Defaults, Prev: M2 Constants, Up: Modula-2
|
3772 |
|
|
|
3773 |
|
|
15.4.6.4 Modula-2 Types
|
3774 |
|
|
.......................
|
3775 |
|
|
|
3776 |
|
|
Currently GDB can print the following data types in Modula-2 syntax:
|
3777 |
|
|
array types, record types, set types, pointer types, procedure types,
|
3778 |
|
|
enumerated types, subrange types and base types. You can also print
|
3779 |
|
|
the contents of variables declared using these type. This section
|
3780 |
|
|
gives a number of simple source code examples together with sample GDB
|
3781 |
|
|
sessions.
|
3782 |
|
|
|
3783 |
|
|
The first example contains the following section of code:
|
3784 |
|
|
|
3785 |
|
|
VAR
|
3786 |
|
|
s: SET OF CHAR ;
|
3787 |
|
|
r: [20..40] ;
|
3788 |
|
|
|
3789 |
|
|
and you can request GDB to interrogate the type and value of `r' and
|
3790 |
|
|
`s'.
|
3791 |
|
|
|
3792 |
|
|
(gdb) print s
|
3793 |
|
|
{'A'..'C', 'Z'}
|
3794 |
|
|
(gdb) ptype s
|
3795 |
|
|
SET OF CHAR
|
3796 |
|
|
(gdb) print r
|
3797 |
|
|
21
|
3798 |
|
|
(gdb) ptype r
|
3799 |
|
|
[20..40]
|
3800 |
|
|
|
3801 |
|
|
Likewise if your source code declares `s' as:
|
3802 |
|
|
|
3803 |
|
|
VAR
|
3804 |
|
|
s: SET ['A'..'Z'] ;
|
3805 |
|
|
|
3806 |
|
|
then you may query the type of `s' by:
|
3807 |
|
|
|
3808 |
|
|
(gdb) ptype s
|
3809 |
|
|
type = SET ['A'..'Z']
|
3810 |
|
|
|
3811 |
|
|
Note that at present you cannot interactively manipulate set
|
3812 |
|
|
expressions using the debugger.
|
3813 |
|
|
|
3814 |
|
|
The following example shows how you might declare an array in
|
3815 |
|
|
Modula-2 and how you can interact with GDB to print its type and
|
3816 |
|
|
contents:
|
3817 |
|
|
|
3818 |
|
|
VAR
|
3819 |
|
|
s: ARRAY [-10..10] OF CHAR ;
|
3820 |
|
|
|
3821 |
|
|
(gdb) ptype s
|
3822 |
|
|
ARRAY [-10..10] OF CHAR
|
3823 |
|
|
|
3824 |
|
|
Note that the array handling is not yet complete and although the
|
3825 |
|
|
type is printed correctly, expression handling still assumes that all
|
3826 |
|
|
arrays have a lower bound of zero and not `-10' as in the example above.
|
3827 |
|
|
|
3828 |
|
|
Here are some more type related Modula-2 examples:
|
3829 |
|
|
|
3830 |
|
|
TYPE
|
3831 |
|
|
colour = (blue, red, yellow, green) ;
|
3832 |
|
|
t = [blue..yellow] ;
|
3833 |
|
|
VAR
|
3834 |
|
|
s: t ;
|
3835 |
|
|
BEGIN
|
3836 |
|
|
s := blue ;
|
3837 |
|
|
|
3838 |
|
|
The GDB interaction shows how you can query the data type and value of
|
3839 |
|
|
a variable.
|
3840 |
|
|
|
3841 |
|
|
(gdb) print s
|
3842 |
|
|
$1 = blue
|
3843 |
|
|
(gdb) ptype t
|
3844 |
|
|
type = [blue..yellow]
|
3845 |
|
|
|
3846 |
|
|
In this example a Modula-2 array is declared and its contents
|
3847 |
|
|
displayed. Observe that the contents are written in the same way as
|
3848 |
|
|
their `C' counterparts.
|
3849 |
|
|
|
3850 |
|
|
VAR
|
3851 |
|
|
s: ARRAY [1..5] OF CARDINAL ;
|
3852 |
|
|
BEGIN
|
3853 |
|
|
s[1] := 1 ;
|
3854 |
|
|
|
3855 |
|
|
(gdb) print s
|
3856 |
|
|
$1 = {1, 0, 0, 0, 0}
|
3857 |
|
|
(gdb) ptype s
|
3858 |
|
|
type = ARRAY [1..5] OF CARDINAL
|
3859 |
|
|
|
3860 |
|
|
The Modula-2 language interface to GDB also understands pointer
|
3861 |
|
|
types as shown in this example:
|
3862 |
|
|
|
3863 |
|
|
VAR
|
3864 |
|
|
s: POINTER TO ARRAY [1..5] OF CARDINAL ;
|
3865 |
|
|
BEGIN
|
3866 |
|
|
NEW(s) ;
|
3867 |
|
|
s^[1] := 1 ;
|
3868 |
|
|
|
3869 |
|
|
and you can request that GDB describes the type of `s'.
|
3870 |
|
|
|
3871 |
|
|
(gdb) ptype s
|
3872 |
|
|
type = POINTER TO ARRAY [1..5] OF CARDINAL
|
3873 |
|
|
|
3874 |
|
|
GDB handles compound types as we can see in this example. Here we
|
3875 |
|
|
combine array types, record types, pointer types and subrange types:
|
3876 |
|
|
|
3877 |
|
|
TYPE
|
3878 |
|
|
foo = RECORD
|
3879 |
|
|
f1: CARDINAL ;
|
3880 |
|
|
f2: CHAR ;
|
3881 |
|
|
f3: myarray ;
|
3882 |
|
|
END ;
|
3883 |
|
|
|
3884 |
|
|
myarray = ARRAY myrange OF CARDINAL ;
|
3885 |
|
|
myrange = [-2..2] ;
|
3886 |
|
|
VAR
|
3887 |
|
|
s: POINTER TO ARRAY myrange OF foo ;
|
3888 |
|
|
|
3889 |
|
|
and you can ask GDB to describe the type of `s' as shown below.
|
3890 |
|
|
|
3891 |
|
|
(gdb) ptype s
|
3892 |
|
|
type = POINTER TO ARRAY [-2..2] OF foo = RECORD
|
3893 |
|
|
f1 : CARDINAL;
|
3894 |
|
|
f2 : CHAR;
|
3895 |
|
|
f3 : ARRAY [-2..2] OF CARDINAL;
|
3896 |
|
|
END
|
3897 |
|
|
|
3898 |
|
|
|
3899 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: M2 Defaults, Next: Deviations, Prev: M2 Types, Up: Modula-2
|
3900 |
|
|
|
3901 |
|
|
15.4.6.5 Modula-2 Defaults
|
3902 |
|
|
..........................
|
3903 |
|
|
|
3904 |
|
|
If type and range checking are set automatically by GDB, they both
|
3905 |
|
|
default to `on' whenever the working language changes to Modula-2.
|
3906 |
|
|
This happens regardless of whether you or GDB selected the working
|
3907 |
|
|
language.
|
3908 |
|
|
|
3909 |
|
|
If you allow GDB to set the language automatically, then entering
|
3910 |
|
|
code compiled from a file whose name ends with `.mod' sets the working
|
3911 |
|
|
language to Modula-2. *Note Having GDB Infer the Source Language:
|
3912 |
|
|
Automatically, for further details.
|
3913 |
|
|
|
3914 |
|
|
|
3915 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Deviations, Next: M2 Checks, Prev: M2 Defaults, Up: Modula-2
|
3916 |
|
|
|
3917 |
|
|
15.4.6.6 Deviations from Standard Modula-2
|
3918 |
|
|
..........................................
|
3919 |
|
|
|
3920 |
|
|
A few changes have been made to make Modula-2 programs easier to debug.
|
3921 |
|
|
This is done primarily via loosening its type strictness:
|
3922 |
|
|
|
3923 |
|
|
* Unlike in standard Modula-2, pointer constants can be formed by
|
3924 |
|
|
integers. This allows you to modify pointer variables during
|
3925 |
|
|
debugging. (In standard Modula-2, the actual address contained in
|
3926 |
|
|
a pointer variable is hidden from you; it can only be modified
|
3927 |
|
|
through direct assignment to another pointer variable or
|
3928 |
|
|
expression that returned a pointer.)
|
3929 |
|
|
|
3930 |
|
|
* C escape sequences can be used in strings and characters to
|
3931 |
|
|
represent non-printable characters. GDB prints out strings with
|
3932 |
|
|
these escape sequences embedded. Single non-printable characters
|
3933 |
|
|
are printed using the `CHR(NNN)' format.
|
3934 |
|
|
|
3935 |
|
|
* The assignment operator (`:=') returns the value of its right-hand
|
3936 |
|
|
argument.
|
3937 |
|
|
|
3938 |
|
|
* All built-in procedures both modify _and_ return their argument.
|
3939 |
|
|
|
3940 |
|
|
|
3941 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: M2 Checks, Next: M2 Scope, Prev: Deviations, Up: Modula-2
|
3942 |
|
|
|
3943 |
|
|
15.4.6.7 Modula-2 Type and Range Checks
|
3944 |
|
|
.......................................
|
3945 |
|
|
|
3946 |
|
|
_Warning:_ in this release, GDB does not yet perform type or range
|
3947 |
|
|
checking.
|
3948 |
|
|
|
3949 |
|
|
GDB considers two Modula-2 variables type equivalent if:
|
3950 |
|
|
|
3951 |
|
|
* They are of types that have been declared equivalent via a `TYPE
|
3952 |
|
|
T1 = T2' statement
|
3953 |
|
|
|
3954 |
|
|
* They have been declared on the same line. (Note: This is true of
|
3955 |
|
|
the GNU Modula-2 compiler, but it may not be true of other
|
3956 |
|
|
compilers.)
|
3957 |
|
|
|
3958 |
|
|
As long as type checking is enabled, any attempt to combine variables
|
3959 |
|
|
whose types are not equivalent is an error.
|
3960 |
|
|
|
3961 |
|
|
Range checking is done on all mathematical operations, assignment,
|
3962 |
|
|
array index bounds, and all built-in functions and procedures.
|
3963 |
|
|
|
3964 |
|
|
|
3965 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: M2 Scope, Next: GDB/M2, Prev: M2 Checks, Up: Modula-2
|
3966 |
|
|
|
3967 |
|
|
15.4.6.8 The Scope Operators `::' and `.'
|
3968 |
|
|
.........................................
|
3969 |
|
|
|
3970 |
|
|
There are a few subtle differences between the Modula-2 scope operator
|
3971 |
|
|
(`.') and the GDB scope operator (`::'). The two have similar syntax:
|
3972 |
|
|
|
3973 |
|
|
|
3974 |
|
|
MODULE . ID
|
3975 |
|
|
SCOPE :: ID
|
3976 |
|
|
|
3977 |
|
|
where SCOPE is the name of a module or a procedure, MODULE the name of
|
3978 |
|
|
a module, and ID is any declared identifier within your program, except
|
3979 |
|
|
another module.
|
3980 |
|
|
|
3981 |
|
|
Using the `::' operator makes GDB search the scope specified by
|
3982 |
|
|
SCOPE for the identifier ID. If it is not found in the specified
|
3983 |
|
|
scope, then GDB searches all scopes enclosing the one specified by
|
3984 |
|
|
SCOPE.
|
3985 |
|
|
|
3986 |
|
|
Using the `.' operator makes GDB search the current scope for the
|
3987 |
|
|
identifier specified by ID that was imported from the definition module
|
3988 |
|
|
specified by MODULE. With this operator, it is an error if the
|
3989 |
|
|
identifier ID was not imported from definition module MODULE, or if ID
|
3990 |
|
|
is not an identifier in MODULE.
|
3991 |
|
|
|
3992 |
|
|
|
3993 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: GDB/M2, Prev: M2 Scope, Up: Modula-2
|
3994 |
|
|
|
3995 |
|
|
15.4.6.9 GDB and Modula-2
|
3996 |
|
|
.........................
|
3997 |
|
|
|
3998 |
|
|
Some GDB commands have little use when debugging Modula-2 programs.
|
3999 |
|
|
Five subcommands of `set print' and `show print' apply specifically to
|
4000 |
|
|
C and C++: `vtbl', `demangle', `asm-demangle', `object', and `union'.
|
4001 |
|
|
The first four apply to C++, and the last to the C `union' type, which
|
4002 |
|
|
has no direct analogue in Modula-2.
|
4003 |
|
|
|
4004 |
|
|
The `@' operator (*note Expressions: Expressions.), while available
|
4005 |
|
|
with any language, is not useful with Modula-2. Its intent is to aid
|
4006 |
|
|
the debugging of "dynamic arrays", which cannot be created in Modula-2
|
4007 |
|
|
as they can in C or C++. However, because an address can be specified
|
4008 |
|
|
by an integral constant, the construct `{TYPE}ADREXP' is still useful.
|
4009 |
|
|
|
4010 |
|
|
In GDB scripts, the Modula-2 inequality operator `#' is interpreted
|
4011 |
|
|
as the beginning of a comment. Use `<>' instead.
|
4012 |
|
|
|
4013 |
|
|
|
4014 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Ada, Prev: Modula-2, Up: Supported Languages
|
4015 |
|
|
|
4016 |
|
|
15.4.7 Ada
|
4017 |
|
|
----------
|
4018 |
|
|
|
4019 |
|
|
The extensions made to GDB for Ada only support output from the GNU Ada
|
4020 |
|
|
(GNAT) compiler. Other Ada compilers are not currently supported, and
|
4021 |
|
|
attempting to debug executables produced by them is most likely to be
|
4022 |
|
|
difficult.
|
4023 |
|
|
|
4024 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
4025 |
|
|
|
4026 |
|
|
* Ada Mode Intro:: General remarks on the Ada syntax
|
4027 |
|
|
and semantics supported by Ada mode
|
4028 |
|
|
in GDB.
|
4029 |
|
|
* Omissions from Ada:: Restrictions on the Ada expression syntax.
|
4030 |
|
|
* Additions to Ada:: Extensions of the Ada expression syntax.
|
4031 |
|
|
* Stopping Before Main Program:: Debugging the program during elaboration.
|
4032 |
|
|
* Ada Tasks:: Listing and setting breakpoints in tasks.
|
4033 |
|
|
* Ada Tasks and Core Files:: Tasking Support when Debugging Core Files
|
4034 |
|
|
* Ada Glitches:: Known peculiarities of Ada mode.
|
4035 |
|
|
|
4036 |
|
|
|
4037 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Ada Mode Intro, Next: Omissions from Ada, Up: Ada
|
4038 |
|
|
|
4039 |
|
|
15.4.7.1 Introduction
|
4040 |
|
|
.....................
|
4041 |
|
|
|
4042 |
|
|
The Ada mode of GDB supports a fairly large subset of Ada expression
|
4043 |
|
|
syntax, with some extensions. The philosophy behind the design of this
|
4044 |
|
|
subset is
|
4045 |
|
|
|
4046 |
|
|
* That GDB should provide basic literals and access to operations for
|
4047 |
|
|
arithmetic, dereferencing, field selection, indexing, and
|
4048 |
|
|
subprogram calls, leaving more sophisticated computations to
|
4049 |
|
|
subprograms written into the program (which therefore may be
|
4050 |
|
|
called from GDB).
|
4051 |
|
|
|
4052 |
|
|
* That type safety and strict adherence to Ada language restrictions
|
4053 |
|
|
are not particularly important to the GDB user.
|
4054 |
|
|
|
4055 |
|
|
* That brevity is important to the GDB user.
|
4056 |
|
|
|
4057 |
|
|
Thus, for brevity, the debugger acts as if all names declared in
|
4058 |
|
|
user-written packages are directly visible, even if they are not visible
|
4059 |
|
|
according to Ada rules, thus making it unnecessary to fully qualify most
|
4060 |
|
|
names with their packages, regardless of context. Where this causes
|
4061 |
|
|
ambiguity, GDB asks the user's intent.
|
4062 |
|
|
|
4063 |
|
|
The debugger will start in Ada mode if it detects an Ada main
|
4064 |
|
|
program. As for other languages, it will enter Ada mode when stopped
|
4065 |
|
|
in a program that was translated from an Ada source file.
|
4066 |
|
|
|
4067 |
|
|
While in Ada mode, you may use `-' for comments. This is useful
|
4068 |
|
|
mostly for documenting command files. The standard GDB comment (`#')
|
4069 |
|
|
still works at the beginning of a line in Ada mode, but not in the
|
4070 |
|
|
middle (to allow based literals).
|
4071 |
|
|
|
4072 |
|
|
The debugger supports limited overloading. Given a subprogram call
|
4073 |
|
|
in which the function symbol has multiple definitions, it will use the
|
4074 |
|
|
number of actual parameters and some information about their types to
|
4075 |
|
|
attempt to narrow the set of definitions. It also makes very limited
|
4076 |
|
|
use of context, preferring procedures to functions in the context of
|
4077 |
|
|
the `call' command, and functions to procedures elsewhere.
|
4078 |
|
|
|
4079 |
|
|
|
4080 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Omissions from Ada, Next: Additions to Ada, Prev: Ada Mode Intro, Up: Ada
|
4081 |
|
|
|
4082 |
|
|
15.4.7.2 Omissions from Ada
|
4083 |
|
|
...........................
|
4084 |
|
|
|
4085 |
|
|
Here are the notable omissions from the subset:
|
4086 |
|
|
|
4087 |
|
|
* Only a subset of the attributes are supported:
|
4088 |
|
|
|
4089 |
|
|
- 'First, 'Last, and 'Length on array objects (not on types
|
4090 |
|
|
and subtypes).
|
4091 |
|
|
|
4092 |
|
|
- 'Min and 'Max.
|
4093 |
|
|
|
4094 |
|
|
- 'Pos and 'Val.
|
4095 |
|
|
|
4096 |
|
|
- 'Tag.
|
4097 |
|
|
|
4098 |
|
|
- 'Range on array objects (not subtypes), but only as the right
|
4099 |
|
|
operand of the membership (`in') operator.
|
4100 |
|
|
|
4101 |
|
|
- 'Access, 'Unchecked_Access, and 'Unrestricted_Access (a GNAT
|
4102 |
|
|
extension).
|
4103 |
|
|
|
4104 |
|
|
- 'Address.
|
4105 |
|
|
|
4106 |
|
|
* The names in `Characters.Latin_1' are not available and
|
4107 |
|
|
concatenation is not implemented. Thus, escape characters in
|
4108 |
|
|
strings are not currently available.
|
4109 |
|
|
|
4110 |
|
|
* Equality tests (`=' and `/=') on arrays test for bitwise equality
|
4111 |
|
|
of representations. They will generally work correctly for
|
4112 |
|
|
strings and arrays whose elements have integer or enumeration
|
4113 |
|
|
types. They may not work correctly for arrays whose element types
|
4114 |
|
|
have user-defined equality, for arrays of real values (in
|
4115 |
|
|
particular, IEEE-conformant floating point, because of negative
|
4116 |
|
|
zeroes and NaNs), and for arrays whose elements contain unused
|
4117 |
|
|
bits with indeterminate values.
|
4118 |
|
|
|
4119 |
|
|
* The other component-by-component array operations (`and', `or',
|
4120 |
|
|
`xor', `not', and relational tests other than equality) are not
|
4121 |
|
|
implemented.
|
4122 |
|
|
|
4123 |
|
|
* There is limited support for array and record aggregates. They are
|
4124 |
|
|
permitted only on the right sides of assignments, as in these
|
4125 |
|
|
examples:
|
4126 |
|
|
|
4127 |
|
|
(gdb) set An_Array := (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6)
|
4128 |
|
|
(gdb) set An_Array := (1, others => 0)
|
4129 |
|
|
(gdb) set An_Array := (0|4 => 1, 1..3 => 2, 5 => 6)
|
4130 |
|
|
(gdb) set A_2D_Array := ((1, 2, 3), (4, 5, 6), (7, 8, 9))
|
4131 |
|
|
(gdb) set A_Record := (1, "Peter", True);
|
4132 |
|
|
(gdb) set A_Record := (Name => "Peter", Id => 1, Alive => True)
|
4133 |
|
|
|
4134 |
|
|
Changing a discriminant's value by assigning an aggregate has an
|
4135 |
|
|
undefined effect if that discriminant is used within the record.
|
4136 |
|
|
However, you can first modify discriminants by directly assigning
|
4137 |
|
|
to them (which normally would not be allowed in Ada), and then
|
4138 |
|
|
performing an aggregate assignment. For example, given a variable
|
4139 |
|
|
`A_Rec' declared to have a type such as:
|
4140 |
|
|
|
4141 |
|
|
type Rec (Len : Small_Integer := 0) is record
|
4142 |
|
|
Id : Integer;
|
4143 |
|
|
Vals : IntArray (1 .. Len);
|
4144 |
|
|
end record;
|
4145 |
|
|
|
4146 |
|
|
you can assign a value with a different size of `Vals' with two
|
4147 |
|
|
assignments:
|
4148 |
|
|
|
4149 |
|
|
(gdb) set A_Rec.Len := 4
|
4150 |
|
|
(gdb) set A_Rec := (Id => 42, Vals => (1, 2, 3, 4))
|
4151 |
|
|
|
4152 |
|
|
As this example also illustrates, GDB is very loose about the usual
|
4153 |
|
|
rules concerning aggregates. You may leave out some of the
|
4154 |
|
|
components of an array or record aggregate (such as the `Len'
|
4155 |
|
|
component in the assignment to `A_Rec' above); they will retain
|
4156 |
|
|
their original values upon assignment. You may freely use dynamic
|
4157 |
|
|
values as indices in component associations. You may even use
|
4158 |
|
|
overlapping or redundant component associations, although which
|
4159 |
|
|
component values are assigned in such cases is not defined.
|
4160 |
|
|
|
4161 |
|
|
* Calls to dispatching subprograms are not implemented.
|
4162 |
|
|
|
4163 |
|
|
* The overloading algorithm is much more limited (i.e., less
|
4164 |
|
|
selective) than that of real Ada. It makes only limited use of
|
4165 |
|
|
the context in which a subexpression appears to resolve its
|
4166 |
|
|
meaning, and it is much looser in its rules for allowing type
|
4167 |
|
|
matches. As a result, some function calls will be ambiguous, and
|
4168 |
|
|
the user will be asked to choose the proper resolution.
|
4169 |
|
|
|
4170 |
|
|
* The `new' operator is not implemented.
|
4171 |
|
|
|
4172 |
|
|
* Entry calls are not implemented.
|
4173 |
|
|
|
4174 |
|
|
* Aside from printing, arithmetic operations on the native VAX
|
4175 |
|
|
floating-point formats are not supported.
|
4176 |
|
|
|
4177 |
|
|
* It is not possible to slice a packed array.
|
4178 |
|
|
|
4179 |
|
|
* The names `True' and `False', when not part of a qualified name,
|
4180 |
|
|
are interpreted as if implicitly prefixed by `Standard',
|
4181 |
|
|
regardless of context. Should your program redefine these names
|
4182 |
|
|
in a package or procedure (at best a dubious practice), you will
|
4183 |
|
|
have to use fully qualified names to access their new definitions.
|
4184 |
|
|
|
4185 |
|
|
|
4186 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Additions to Ada, Next: Stopping Before Main Program, Prev: Omissions from Ada, Up: Ada
|
4187 |
|
|
|
4188 |
|
|
15.4.7.3 Additions to Ada
|
4189 |
|
|
.........................
|
4190 |
|
|
|
4191 |
|
|
As it does for other languages, GDB makes certain generic extensions to
|
4192 |
|
|
Ada (*note Expressions::):
|
4193 |
|
|
|
4194 |
|
|
* If the expression E is a variable residing in memory (typically a
|
4195 |
|
|
local variable or array element) and N is a positive integer, then
|
4196 |
|
|
`E@N' displays the values of E and the N-1 adjacent variables
|
4197 |
|
|
following it in memory as an array. In Ada, this operator is
|
4198 |
|
|
generally not necessary, since its prime use is in displaying
|
4199 |
|
|
parts of an array, and slicing will usually do this in Ada.
|
4200 |
|
|
However, there are occasional uses when debugging programs in
|
4201 |
|
|
which certain debugging information has been optimized away.
|
4202 |
|
|
|
4203 |
|
|
* `B::VAR' means "the variable named VAR that appears in function or
|
4204 |
|
|
file B." When B is a file name, you must typically surround it in
|
4205 |
|
|
single quotes.
|
4206 |
|
|
|
4207 |
|
|
* The expression `{TYPE} ADDR' means "the variable of type TYPE that
|
4208 |
|
|
appears at address ADDR."
|
4209 |
|
|
|
4210 |
|
|
* A name starting with `$' is a convenience variable (*note
|
4211 |
|
|
Convenience Vars::) or a machine register (*note Registers::).
|
4212 |
|
|
|
4213 |
|
|
In addition, GDB provides a few other shortcuts and outright
|
4214 |
|
|
additions specific to Ada:
|
4215 |
|
|
|
4216 |
|
|
* The assignment statement is allowed as an expression, returning
|
4217 |
|
|
its right-hand operand as its value. Thus, you may enter
|
4218 |
|
|
|
4219 |
|
|
(gdb) set x := y + 3
|
4220 |
|
|
(gdb) print A(tmp := y + 1)
|
4221 |
|
|
|
4222 |
|
|
* The semicolon is allowed as an "operator," returning as its value
|
4223 |
|
|
the value of its right-hand operand. This allows, for example,
|
4224 |
|
|
complex conditional breaks:
|
4225 |
|
|
|
4226 |
|
|
(gdb) break f
|
4227 |
|
|
(gdb) condition 1 (report(i); k += 1; A(k) > 100)
|
4228 |
|
|
|
4229 |
|
|
* Rather than use catenation and symbolic character names to
|
4230 |
|
|
introduce special characters into strings, one may instead use a
|
4231 |
|
|
special bracket notation, which is also used to print strings. A
|
4232 |
|
|
sequence of characters of the form `["XX"]' within a string or
|
4233 |
|
|
character literal denotes the (single) character whose numeric
|
4234 |
|
|
encoding is XX in hexadecimal. The sequence of characters `["""]'
|
4235 |
|
|
also denotes a single quotation mark in strings. For example,
|
4236 |
|
|
"One line.["0a"]Next line.["0a"]"
|
4237 |
|
|
contains an ASCII newline character (`Ada.Characters.Latin_1.LF')
|
4238 |
|
|
after each period.
|
4239 |
|
|
|
4240 |
|
|
* The subtype used as a prefix for the attributes 'Pos, 'Min, and
|
4241 |
|
|
'Max is optional (and is ignored in any case). For example, it is
|
4242 |
|
|
valid to write
|
4243 |
|
|
|
4244 |
|
|
(gdb) print 'max(x, y)
|
4245 |
|
|
|
4246 |
|
|
* When printing arrays, GDB uses positional notation when the array
|
4247 |
|
|
has a lower bound of 1, and uses a modified named notation
|
4248 |
|
|
otherwise. For example, a one-dimensional array of three integers
|
4249 |
|
|
with a lower bound of 3 might print as
|
4250 |
|
|
|
4251 |
|
|
(3 => 10, 17, 1)
|
4252 |
|
|
|
4253 |
|
|
That is, in contrast to valid Ada, only the first component has a
|
4254 |
|
|
`=>' clause.
|
4255 |
|
|
|
4256 |
|
|
* You may abbreviate attributes in expressions with any unique,
|
4257 |
|
|
multi-character subsequence of their names (an exact match gets
|
4258 |
|
|
preference). For example, you may use a'len, a'gth, or a'lh in
|
4259 |
|
|
place of a'length.
|
4260 |
|
|
|
4261 |
|
|
* Since Ada is case-insensitive, the debugger normally maps
|
4262 |
|
|
identifiers you type to lower case. The GNAT compiler uses
|
4263 |
|
|
upper-case characters for some of its internal identifiers, which
|
4264 |
|
|
are normally of no interest to users. For the rare occasions when
|
4265 |
|
|
you actually have to look at them, enclose them in angle brackets
|
4266 |
|
|
to avoid the lower-case mapping. For example,
|
4267 |
|
|
(gdb) print [0]
|
4268 |
|
|
|
4269 |
|
|
* Printing an object of class-wide type or dereferencing an
|
4270 |
|
|
access-to-class-wide value will display all the components of the
|
4271 |
|
|
object's specific type (as indicated by its run-time tag).
|
4272 |
|
|
Likewise, component selection on such a value will operate on the
|
4273 |
|
|
specific type of the object.
|
4274 |
|
|
|
4275 |
|
|
|
4276 |
|
|
|
4277 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Stopping Before Main Program, Next: Ada Tasks, Prev: Additions to Ada, Up: Ada
|
4278 |
|
|
|
4279 |
|
|
15.4.7.4 Stopping at the Very Beginning
|
4280 |
|
|
.......................................
|
4281 |
|
|
|
4282 |
|
|
It is sometimes necessary to debug the program during elaboration, and
|
4283 |
|
|
before reaching the main procedure. As defined in the Ada Reference
|
4284 |
|
|
Manual, the elaboration code is invoked from a procedure called
|
4285 |
|
|
`adainit'. To run your program up to the beginning of elaboration,
|
4286 |
|
|
simply use the following two commands: `tbreak adainit' and `run'.
|
4287 |
|
|
|
4288 |
|
|
|
4289 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Ada Tasks, Next: Ada Tasks and Core Files, Prev: Stopping Before Main Program, Up: Ada
|
4290 |
|
|
|
4291 |
|
|
15.4.7.5 Extensions for Ada Tasks
|
4292 |
|
|
.................................
|
4293 |
|
|
|
4294 |
|
|
Support for Ada tasks is analogous to that for threads (*note
|
4295 |
|
|
Threads::). GDB provides the following task-related commands:
|
4296 |
|
|
|
4297 |
|
|
`info tasks'
|
4298 |
|
|
This command shows a list of current Ada tasks, as in the
|
4299 |
|
|
following example:
|
4300 |
|
|
|
4301 |
|
|
(gdb) info tasks
|
4302 |
|
|
ID TID P-ID Pri State Name
|
4303 |
|
|
1 8088000 0 15 Child Activation Wait main_task
|
4304 |
|
|
2 80a4000 1 15 Accept Statement b
|
4305 |
|
|
3 809a800 1 15 Child Activation Wait a
|
4306 |
|
|
* 4 80ae800 3 15 Runnable c
|
4307 |
|
|
|
4308 |
|
|
In this listing, the asterisk before the last task indicates it to
|
4309 |
|
|
be the task currently being inspected.
|
4310 |
|
|
|
4311 |
|
|
ID
|
4312 |
|
|
Represents GDB's internal task number.
|
4313 |
|
|
|
4314 |
|
|
TID
|
4315 |
|
|
The Ada task ID.
|
4316 |
|
|
|
4317 |
|
|
P-ID
|
4318 |
|
|
The parent's task ID (GDB's internal task number).
|
4319 |
|
|
|
4320 |
|
|
Pri
|
4321 |
|
|
The base priority of the task.
|
4322 |
|
|
|
4323 |
|
|
State
|
4324 |
|
|
Current state of the task.
|
4325 |
|
|
|
4326 |
|
|
`Unactivated'
|
4327 |
|
|
The task has been created but has not been activated.
|
4328 |
|
|
It cannot be executing.
|
4329 |
|
|
|
4330 |
|
|
`Runnable'
|
4331 |
|
|
The task is not blocked for any reason known to Ada.
|
4332 |
|
|
(It may be waiting for a mutex, though.) It is
|
4333 |
|
|
conceptually "executing" in normal mode.
|
4334 |
|
|
|
4335 |
|
|
`Terminated'
|
4336 |
|
|
The task is terminated, in the sense of ARM 9.3 (5).
|
4337 |
|
|
Any dependents that were waiting on terminate
|
4338 |
|
|
alternatives have been awakened and have terminated
|
4339 |
|
|
themselves.
|
4340 |
|
|
|
4341 |
|
|
`Child Activation Wait'
|
4342 |
|
|
The task is waiting for created tasks to complete
|
4343 |
|
|
activation.
|
4344 |
|
|
|
4345 |
|
|
`Accept Statement'
|
4346 |
|
|
The task is waiting on an accept or selective wait
|
4347 |
|
|
statement.
|
4348 |
|
|
|
4349 |
|
|
`Waiting on entry call'
|
4350 |
|
|
The task is waiting on an entry call.
|
4351 |
|
|
|
4352 |
|
|
`Async Select Wait'
|
4353 |
|
|
The task is waiting to start the abortable part of an
|
4354 |
|
|
asynchronous select statement.
|
4355 |
|
|
|
4356 |
|
|
`Delay Sleep'
|
4357 |
|
|
The task is waiting on a select statement with only a
|
4358 |
|
|
delay alternative open.
|
4359 |
|
|
|
4360 |
|
|
`Child Termination Wait'
|
4361 |
|
|
The task is sleeping having completed a master within
|
4362 |
|
|
itself, and is waiting for the tasks dependent on that
|
4363 |
|
|
master to become terminated or waiting on a terminate
|
4364 |
|
|
Phase.
|
4365 |
|
|
|
4366 |
|
|
`Wait Child in Term Alt'
|
4367 |
|
|
The task is sleeping waiting for tasks on terminate
|
4368 |
|
|
alternatives to finish terminating.
|
4369 |
|
|
|
4370 |
|
|
`Accepting RV with TASKNO'
|
4371 |
|
|
The task is accepting a rendez-vous with the task TASKNO.
|
4372 |
|
|
|
4373 |
|
|
Name
|
4374 |
|
|
Name of the task in the program.
|
4375 |
|
|
|
4376 |
|
|
|
4377 |
|
|
`info task TASKNO'
|
4378 |
|
|
This command shows detailled informations on the specified task,
|
4379 |
|
|
as in the following example:
|
4380 |
|
|
(gdb) info tasks
|
4381 |
|
|
ID TID P-ID Pri State Name
|
4382 |
|
|
1 8077880 0 15 Child Activation Wait main_task
|
4383 |
|
|
* 2 807c468 1 15 Runnable task_1
|
4384 |
|
|
(gdb) info task 2
|
4385 |
|
|
Ada Task: 0x807c468
|
4386 |
|
|
Name: task_1
|
4387 |
|
|
Thread: 0x807f378
|
4388 |
|
|
Parent: 1 (main_task)
|
4389 |
|
|
Base Priority: 15
|
4390 |
|
|
State: Runnable
|
4391 |
|
|
|
4392 |
|
|
`task'
|
4393 |
|
|
This command prints the ID of the current task.
|
4394 |
|
|
|
4395 |
|
|
(gdb) info tasks
|
4396 |
|
|
ID TID P-ID Pri State Name
|
4397 |
|
|
1 8077870 0 15 Child Activation Wait main_task
|
4398 |
|
|
* 2 807c458 1 15 Runnable t
|
4399 |
|
|
(gdb) task
|
4400 |
|
|
[Current task is 2]
|
4401 |
|
|
|
4402 |
|
|
`task TASKNO'
|
4403 |
|
|
This command is like the `thread THREADNO' command (*note
|
4404 |
|
|
Threads::). It switches the context of debugging from the current
|
4405 |
|
|
task to the given task.
|
4406 |
|
|
|
4407 |
|
|
(gdb) info tasks
|
4408 |
|
|
ID TID P-ID Pri State Name
|
4409 |
|
|
1 8077870 0 15 Child Activation Wait main_task
|
4410 |
|
|
* 2 807c458 1 15 Runnable t
|
4411 |
|
|
(gdb) task 1
|
4412 |
|
|
[Switching to task 1]
|
4413 |
|
|
#0 0x8067726 in pthread_cond_wait ()
|
4414 |
|
|
(gdb) bt
|
4415 |
|
|
#0 0x8067726 in pthread_cond_wait ()
|
4416 |
|
|
#1 0x8056714 in system.os_interface.pthread_cond_wait ()
|
4417 |
|
|
#2 0x805cb63 in system.task_primitives.operations.sleep ()
|
4418 |
|
|
#3 0x806153e in system.tasking.stages.activate_tasks ()
|
4419 |
|
|
#4 0x804aacc in un () at un.adb:5
|
4420 |
|
|
|
4421 |
|
|
`break LINESPEC task TASKNO'
|
4422 |
|
|
`break LINESPEC task TASKNO if ...'
|
4423 |
|
|
These commands are like the `break ... thread ...' command (*note
|
4424 |
|
|
Thread Stops::). LINESPEC specifies source lines, as described in
|
4425 |
342 |
jeremybenn |
*note Specify Location::.
|
4426 |
330 |
jeremybenn |
|
4427 |
|
|
Use the qualifier `task TASKNO' with a breakpoint command to
|
4428 |
|
|
specify that you only want GDB to stop the program when a
|
4429 |
|
|
particular Ada task reaches this breakpoint. TASKNO is one of the
|
4430 |
|
|
numeric task identifiers assigned by GDB, shown in the first
|
4431 |
|
|
column of the `info tasks' display.
|
4432 |
|
|
|
4433 |
|
|
If you do not specify `task TASKNO' when you set a breakpoint, the
|
4434 |
|
|
breakpoint applies to _all_ tasks of your program.
|
4435 |
|
|
|
4436 |
|
|
You can use the `task' qualifier on conditional breakpoints as
|
4437 |
|
|
well; in this case, place `task TASKNO' before the breakpoint
|
4438 |
|
|
condition (before the `if').
|
4439 |
|
|
|
4440 |
|
|
For example,
|
4441 |
|
|
|
4442 |
|
|
(gdb) info tasks
|
4443 |
|
|
ID TID P-ID Pri State Name
|
4444 |
|
|
1 140022020 0 15 Child Activation Wait main_task
|
4445 |
|
|
2 140045060 1 15 Accept/Select Wait t2
|
4446 |
|
|
3 140044840 1 15 Runnable t1
|
4447 |
|
|
* 4 140056040 1 15 Runnable t3
|
4448 |
|
|
(gdb) b 15 task 2
|
4449 |
|
|
Breakpoint 5 at 0x120044cb0: file test_task_debug.adb, line 15.
|
4450 |
|
|
(gdb) cont
|
4451 |
|
|
Continuing.
|
4452 |
|
|
task # 1 running
|
4453 |
|
|
task # 2 running
|
4454 |
|
|
|
4455 |
|
|
Breakpoint 5, test_task_debug () at test_task_debug.adb:15
|
4456 |
|
|
15 flush;
|
4457 |
|
|
(gdb) info tasks
|
4458 |
|
|
ID TID P-ID Pri State Name
|
4459 |
|
|
1 140022020 0 15 Child Activation Wait main_task
|
4460 |
|
|
* 2 140045060 1 15 Runnable t2
|
4461 |
|
|
3 140044840 1 15 Runnable t1
|
4462 |
|
|
4 140056040 1 15 Delay Sleep t3
|
4463 |
|
|
|
4464 |
|
|
|
4465 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Ada Tasks and Core Files, Next: Ada Glitches, Prev: Ada Tasks, Up: Ada
|
4466 |
|
|
|
4467 |
|
|
15.4.7.6 Tasking Support when Debugging Core Files
|
4468 |
|
|
..................................................
|
4469 |
|
|
|
4470 |
|
|
When inspecting a core file, as opposed to debugging a live program,
|
4471 |
|
|
tasking support may be limited or even unavailable, depending on the
|
4472 |
|
|
platform being used. For instance, on x86-linux, the list of tasks is
|
4473 |
|
|
available, but task switching is not supported. On Tru64, however,
|
4474 |
|
|
task switching will work as usual.
|
4475 |
|
|
|
4476 |
|
|
On certain platforms, including Tru64, the debugger needs to perform
|
4477 |
|
|
some memory writes in order to provide Ada tasking support. When
|
4478 |
|
|
inspecting a core file, this means that the core file must be opened
|
4479 |
|
|
with read-write privileges, using the command `"set write on"' (*note
|
4480 |
|
|
Patching::). Under these circumstances, you should make a backup copy
|
4481 |
|
|
of the core file before inspecting it with GDB.
|
4482 |
|
|
|
4483 |
|
|
|
4484 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Ada Glitches, Prev: Ada Tasks and Core Files, Up: Ada
|
4485 |
|
|
|
4486 |
|
|
15.4.7.7 Known Peculiarities of Ada Mode
|
4487 |
|
|
........................................
|
4488 |
|
|
|
4489 |
|
|
Besides the omissions listed previously (*note Omissions from Ada::),
|
4490 |
|
|
we know of several problems with and limitations of Ada mode in GDB,
|
4491 |
|
|
some of which will be fixed with planned future releases of the debugger
|
4492 |
|
|
and the GNU Ada compiler.
|
4493 |
|
|
|
4494 |
|
|
* Currently, the debugger has insufficient information to determine
|
4495 |
|
|
whether certain pointers represent pointers to objects or the
|
4496 |
|
|
objects themselves. Thus, the user may have to tack an extra
|
4497 |
|
|
`.all' after an expression to get it printed properly.
|
4498 |
|
|
|
4499 |
|
|
* Static constants that the compiler chooses not to materialize as
|
4500 |
|
|
objects in storage are invisible to the debugger.
|
4501 |
|
|
|
4502 |
|
|
* Named parameter associations in function argument lists are
|
4503 |
|
|
ignored (the argument lists are treated as positional).
|
4504 |
|
|
|
4505 |
|
|
* Many useful library packages are currently invisible to the
|
4506 |
|
|
debugger.
|
4507 |
|
|
|
4508 |
|
|
* Fixed-point arithmetic, conversions, input, and output is carried
|
4509 |
|
|
out using floating-point arithmetic, and may give results that
|
4510 |
|
|
only approximate those on the host machine.
|
4511 |
|
|
|
4512 |
|
|
* The GNAT compiler never generates the prefix `Standard' for any of
|
4513 |
|
|
the standard symbols defined by the Ada language. GDB knows about
|
4514 |
|
|
this: it will strip the prefix from names when you use it, and
|
4515 |
|
|
will never look for a name you have so qualified among local
|
4516 |
|
|
symbols, nor match against symbols in other packages or
|
4517 |
|
|
subprograms. If you have defined entities anywhere in your
|
4518 |
|
|
program other than parameters and local variables whose simple
|
4519 |
|
|
names match names in `Standard', GNAT's lack of qualification here
|
4520 |
|
|
can cause confusion. When this happens, you can usually resolve
|
4521 |
|
|
the confusion by qualifying the problematic names with package
|
4522 |
|
|
`Standard' explicitly.
|
4523 |
|
|
|
4524 |
|
|
Older versions of the compiler sometimes generate erroneous debugging
|
4525 |
|
|
information, resulting in the debugger incorrectly printing the value
|
4526 |
|
|
of affected entities. In some cases, the debugger is able to work
|
4527 |
|
|
around an issue automatically. In other cases, the debugger is able to
|
4528 |
|
|
work around the issue, but the work-around has to be specifically
|
4529 |
|
|
enabled.
|
4530 |
|
|
|
4531 |
|
|
`set ada trust-PAD-over-XVS on'
|
4532 |
|
|
Configure GDB to strictly follow the GNAT encoding when computing
|
4533 |
|
|
the value of Ada entities, particularly when `PAD' and `PAD___XVS'
|
4534 |
|
|
types are involved (see `ada/exp_dbug.ads' in the GCC sources for
|
4535 |
|
|
a complete description of the encoding used by the GNAT compiler).
|
4536 |
|
|
This is the default.
|
4537 |
|
|
|
4538 |
|
|
`set ada trust-PAD-over-XVS off'
|
4539 |
|
|
This is related to the encoding using by the GNAT compiler. If
|
4540 |
|
|
GDB sometimes prints the wrong value for certain entities,
|
4541 |
|
|
changing `ada trust-PAD-over-XVS' to `off' activates a work-around
|
4542 |
|
|
which may fix the issue. It is always safe to set `ada
|
4543 |
|
|
trust-PAD-over-XVS' to `off', but this incurs a slight performance
|
4544 |
|
|
penalty, so it is recommended to leave this setting to `on' unless
|
4545 |
|
|
necessary.
|
4546 |
|
|
|
4547 |
|
|
|
4548 |
|
|
|
4549 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Unsupported Languages, Prev: Supported Languages, Up: Languages
|
4550 |
|
|
|
4551 |
|
|
15.5 Unsupported Languages
|
4552 |
|
|
==========================
|
4553 |
|
|
|
4554 |
|
|
In addition to the other fully-supported programming languages, GDB
|
4555 |
|
|
also provides a pseudo-language, called `minimal'. It does not
|
4556 |
|
|
represent a real programming language, but provides a set of
|
4557 |
|
|
capabilities close to what the C or assembly languages provide. This
|
4558 |
|
|
should allow most simple operations to be performed while debugging an
|
4559 |
|
|
application that uses a language currently not supported by GDB.
|
4560 |
|
|
|
4561 |
|
|
If the language is set to `auto', GDB will automatically select this
|
4562 |
|
|
language if the current frame corresponds to an unsupported language.
|
4563 |
|
|
|
4564 |
|
|
|
4565 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Symbols, Next: Altering, Prev: Languages, Up: Top
|
4566 |
|
|
|
4567 |
|
|
16 Examining the Symbol Table
|
4568 |
|
|
*****************************
|
4569 |
|
|
|
4570 |
|
|
The commands described in this chapter allow you to inquire about the
|
4571 |
|
|
symbols (names of variables, functions and types) defined in your
|
4572 |
|
|
program. This information is inherent in the text of your program and
|
4573 |
|
|
does not change as your program executes. GDB finds it in your
|
4574 |
|
|
program's symbol table, in the file indicated when you started GDB
|
4575 |
|
|
(*note Choosing Files: File Options.), or by one of the file-management
|
4576 |
|
|
commands (*note Commands to Specify Files: Files.).
|
4577 |
|
|
|
4578 |
|
|
Occasionally, you may need to refer to symbols that contain unusual
|
4579 |
|
|
characters, which GDB ordinarily treats as word delimiters. The most
|
4580 |
|
|
frequent case is in referring to static variables in other source files
|
4581 |
|
|
(*note Program Variables: Variables.). File names are recorded in
|
4582 |
|
|
object files as debugging symbols, but GDB would ordinarily parse a
|
4583 |
|
|
typical file name, like `foo.c', as the three words `foo' `.' `c'. To
|
4584 |
|
|
allow GDB to recognize `foo.c' as a single symbol, enclose it in single
|
4585 |
|
|
quotes; for example,
|
4586 |
|
|
|
4587 |
|
|
p 'foo.c'::x
|
4588 |
|
|
|
4589 |
|
|
looks up the value of `x' in the scope of the file `foo.c'.
|
4590 |
|
|
|
4591 |
|
|
`set case-sensitive on'
|
4592 |
|
|
`set case-sensitive off'
|
4593 |
|
|
`set case-sensitive auto'
|
4594 |
|
|
Normally, when GDB looks up symbols, it matches their names with
|
4595 |
|
|
case sensitivity determined by the current source language.
|
4596 |
|
|
Occasionally, you may wish to control that. The command `set
|
4597 |
|
|
case-sensitive' lets you do that by specifying `on' for
|
4598 |
|
|
case-sensitive matches or `off' for case-insensitive ones. If you
|
4599 |
|
|
specify `auto', case sensitivity is reset to the default suitable
|
4600 |
|
|
for the source language. The default is case-sensitive matches
|
4601 |
|
|
for all languages except for Fortran, for which the default is
|
4602 |
|
|
case-insensitive matches.
|
4603 |
|
|
|
4604 |
|
|
`show case-sensitive'
|
4605 |
|
|
This command shows the current setting of case sensitivity for
|
4606 |
|
|
symbols lookups.
|
4607 |
|
|
|
4608 |
|
|
`info address SYMBOL'
|
4609 |
|
|
Describe where the data for SYMBOL is stored. For a register
|
4610 |
|
|
variable, this says which register it is kept in. For a
|
4611 |
|
|
non-register local variable, this prints the stack-frame offset at
|
4612 |
|
|
which the variable is always stored.
|
4613 |
|
|
|
4614 |
|
|
Note the contrast with `print &SYMBOL', which does not work at all
|
4615 |
|
|
for a register variable, and for a stack local variable prints the
|
4616 |
|
|
exact address of the current instantiation of the variable.
|
4617 |
|
|
|
4618 |
|
|
`info symbol ADDR'
|
4619 |
|
|
Print the name of a symbol which is stored at the address ADDR.
|
4620 |
|
|
If no symbol is stored exactly at ADDR, GDB prints the nearest
|
4621 |
|
|
symbol and an offset from it:
|
4622 |
|
|
|
4623 |
|
|
(gdb) info symbol 0x54320
|
4624 |
|
|
_initialize_vx + 396 in section .text
|
4625 |
|
|
|
4626 |
|
|
This is the opposite of the `info address' command. You can use
|
4627 |
|
|
it to find out the name of a variable or a function given its
|
4628 |
|
|
address.
|
4629 |
|
|
|
4630 |
|
|
For dynamically linked executables, the name of executable or
|
4631 |
|
|
shared library containing the symbol is also printed:
|
4632 |
|
|
|
4633 |
|
|
(gdb) info symbol 0x400225
|
4634 |
|
|
_start + 5 in section .text of /tmp/a.out
|
4635 |
|
|
(gdb) info symbol 0x2aaaac2811cf
|
4636 |
|
|
__read_nocancel + 6 in section .text of /usr/lib64/libc.so.6
|
4637 |
|
|
|
4638 |
|
|
`whatis [ARG]'
|
4639 |
|
|
Print the data type of ARG, which can be either an expression or a
|
4640 |
|
|
data type. With no argument, print the data type of `$', the last
|
4641 |
|
|
value in the value history. If ARG is an expression, it is not
|
4642 |
|
|
actually evaluated, and any side-effecting operations (such as
|
4643 |
|
|
assignments or function calls) inside it do not take place. If
|
4644 |
|
|
ARG is a type name, it may be the name of a type or typedef, or
|
4645 |
|
|
for C code it may have the form `class CLASS-NAME', `struct
|
4646 |
|
|
STRUCT-TAG', `union UNION-TAG' or `enum ENUM-TAG'. *Note
|
4647 |
|
|
Expressions: Expressions.
|
4648 |
|
|
|
4649 |
|
|
`ptype [ARG]'
|
4650 |
|
|
`ptype' accepts the same arguments as `whatis', but prints a
|
4651 |
|
|
detailed description of the type, instead of just the name of the
|
4652 |
|
|
type. *Note Expressions: Expressions.
|
4653 |
|
|
|
4654 |
|
|
For example, for this variable declaration:
|
4655 |
|
|
|
4656 |
|
|
struct complex {double real; double imag;} v;
|
4657 |
|
|
|
4658 |
|
|
the two commands give this output:
|
4659 |
|
|
|
4660 |
|
|
(gdb) whatis v
|
4661 |
|
|
type = struct complex
|
4662 |
|
|
(gdb) ptype v
|
4663 |
|
|
type = struct complex {
|
4664 |
|
|
double real;
|
4665 |
|
|
double imag;
|
4666 |
|
|
}
|
4667 |
|
|
|
4668 |
|
|
As with `whatis', using `ptype' without an argument refers to the
|
4669 |
|
|
type of `$', the last value in the value history.
|
4670 |
|
|
|
4671 |
|
|
Sometimes, programs use opaque data types or incomplete
|
4672 |
|
|
specifications of complex data structure. If the debug
|
4673 |
|
|
information included in the program does not allow GDB to display
|
4674 |
|
|
a full declaration of the data type, it will say `
|
4675 |
|
|
type>'. For example, given these declarations:
|
4676 |
|
|
|
4677 |
|
|
struct foo;
|
4678 |
|
|
struct foo *fooptr;
|
4679 |
|
|
|
4680 |
|
|
but no definition for `struct foo' itself, GDB will say:
|
4681 |
|
|
|
4682 |
|
|
(gdb) ptype foo
|
4683 |
|
|
$1 =
|
4684 |
|
|
|
4685 |
|
|
"Incomplete type" is C terminology for data types that are not
|
4686 |
|
|
completely specified.
|
4687 |
|
|
|
4688 |
|
|
`info types REGEXP'
|
4689 |
|
|
`info types'
|
4690 |
|
|
Print a brief description of all types whose names match the
|
4691 |
|
|
regular expression REGEXP (or all types in your program, if you
|
4692 |
|
|
supply no argument). Each complete typename is matched as though
|
4693 |
|
|
it were a complete line; thus, `i type value' gives information on
|
4694 |
|
|
all types in your program whose names include the string `value',
|
4695 |
|
|
but `i type ^value$' gives information only on types whose complete
|
4696 |
|
|
name is `value'.
|
4697 |
|
|
|
4698 |
|
|
This command differs from `ptype' in two ways: first, like
|
4699 |
|
|
`whatis', it does not print a detailed description; second, it
|
4700 |
|
|
lists all source files where a type is defined.
|
4701 |
|
|
|
4702 |
|
|
`info scope LOCATION'
|
4703 |
|
|
List all the variables local to a particular scope. This command
|
4704 |
|
|
accepts a LOCATION argument--a function name, a source line, or an
|
4705 |
|
|
address preceded by a `*', and prints all the variables local to
|
4706 |
|
|
the scope defined by that location. (*Note Specify Location::, for
|
4707 |
|
|
details about supported forms of LOCATION.) For example:
|
4708 |
|
|
|
4709 |
|
|
(gdb) info scope command_line_handler
|
4710 |
|
|
Scope for command_line_handler:
|
4711 |
|
|
Symbol rl is an argument at stack/frame offset 8, length 4.
|
4712 |
|
|
Symbol linebuffer is in static storage at address 0x150a18, length 4.
|
4713 |
|
|
Symbol linelength is in static storage at address 0x150a1c, length 4.
|
4714 |
|
|
Symbol p is a local variable in register $esi, length 4.
|
4715 |
|
|
Symbol p1 is a local variable in register $ebx, length 4.
|
4716 |
|
|
Symbol nline is a local variable in register $edx, length 4.
|
4717 |
|
|
Symbol repeat is a local variable at frame offset -8, length 4.
|
4718 |
|
|
|
4719 |
|
|
This command is especially useful for determining what data to
|
4720 |
342 |
jeremybenn |
collect during a "trace experiment", see *note collect: Tracepoint
|
4721 |
330 |
jeremybenn |
Actions.
|
4722 |
|
|
|
4723 |
|
|
`info source'
|
4724 |
|
|
Show information about the current source file--that is, the
|
4725 |
|
|
source file for the function containing the current point of
|
4726 |
|
|
execution:
|
4727 |
|
|
* the name of the source file, and the directory containing it,
|
4728 |
|
|
|
4729 |
|
|
* the directory it was compiled in,
|
4730 |
|
|
|
4731 |
|
|
* its length, in lines,
|
4732 |
|
|
|
4733 |
|
|
* which programming language it is written in,
|
4734 |
|
|
|
4735 |
|
|
* whether the executable includes debugging information for
|
4736 |
|
|
that file, and if so, what format the information is in
|
4737 |
|
|
(e.g., STABS, Dwarf 2, etc.), and
|
4738 |
|
|
|
4739 |
|
|
* whether the debugging information includes information about
|
4740 |
|
|
preprocessor macros.
|
4741 |
|
|
|
4742 |
|
|
`info sources'
|
4743 |
|
|
Print the names of all source files in your program for which
|
4744 |
|
|
there is debugging information, organized into two lists: files
|
4745 |
|
|
whose symbols have already been read, and files whose symbols will
|
4746 |
|
|
be read when needed.
|
4747 |
|
|
|
4748 |
|
|
`info functions'
|
4749 |
|
|
Print the names and data types of all defined functions.
|
4750 |
|
|
|
4751 |
|
|
`info functions REGEXP'
|
4752 |
|
|
Print the names and data types of all defined functions whose
|
4753 |
|
|
names contain a match for regular expression REGEXP. Thus, `info
|
4754 |
|
|
fun step' finds all functions whose names include `step'; `info
|
4755 |
|
|
fun ^step' finds those whose names start with `step'. If a
|
4756 |
|
|
function name contains characters that conflict with the regular
|
4757 |
|
|
expression language (e.g. `operator*()'), they may be quoted with
|
4758 |
|
|
a backslash.
|
4759 |
|
|
|
4760 |
|
|
`info variables'
|
4761 |
|
|
Print the names and data types of all variables that are defined
|
4762 |
|
|
outside of functions (i.e. excluding local variables).
|
4763 |
|
|
|
4764 |
|
|
`info variables REGEXP'
|
4765 |
|
|
Print the names and data types of all variables (except for local
|
4766 |
|
|
variables) whose names contain a match for regular expression
|
4767 |
|
|
REGEXP.
|
4768 |
|
|
|
4769 |
|
|
`info classes'
|
4770 |
|
|
`info classes REGEXP'
|
4771 |
|
|
Display all Objective-C classes in your program, or (with the
|
4772 |
|
|
REGEXP argument) all those matching a particular regular
|
4773 |
|
|
expression.
|
4774 |
|
|
|
4775 |
|
|
`info selectors'
|
4776 |
|
|
`info selectors REGEXP'
|
4777 |
|
|
Display all Objective-C selectors in your program, or (with the
|
4778 |
|
|
REGEXP argument) all those matching a particular regular
|
4779 |
|
|
expression.
|
4780 |
|
|
|
4781 |
|
|
Some systems allow individual object files that make up your
|
4782 |
|
|
program to be replaced without stopping and restarting your
|
4783 |
|
|
program. For example, in VxWorks you can simply recompile a
|
4784 |
|
|
defective object file and keep on running. If you are running on
|
4785 |
|
|
one of these systems, you can allow GDB to reload the symbols for
|
4786 |
|
|
automatically relinked modules:
|
4787 |
|
|
|
4788 |
|
|
`set symbol-reloading on'
|
4789 |
|
|
Replace symbol definitions for the corresponding source file
|
4790 |
|
|
when an object file with a particular name is seen again.
|
4791 |
|
|
|
4792 |
|
|
`set symbol-reloading off'
|
4793 |
|
|
Do not replace symbol definitions when encountering object
|
4794 |
|
|
files of the same name more than once. This is the default
|
4795 |
|
|
state; if you are not running on a system that permits
|
4796 |
|
|
automatic relinking of modules, you should leave
|
4797 |
|
|
`symbol-reloading' off, since otherwise GDB may discard
|
4798 |
|
|
symbols when linking large programs, that may contain several
|
4799 |
|
|
modules (from different directories or libraries) with the
|
4800 |
|
|
same name.
|
4801 |
|
|
|
4802 |
|
|
`show symbol-reloading'
|
4803 |
|
|
Show the current `on' or `off' setting.
|
4804 |
|
|
|
4805 |
|
|
`set opaque-type-resolution on'
|
4806 |
|
|
Tell GDB to resolve opaque types. An opaque type is a type
|
4807 |
|
|
declared as a pointer to a `struct', `class', or `union'--for
|
4808 |
|
|
example, `struct MyType *'--that is used in one source file
|
4809 |
|
|
although the full declaration of `struct MyType' is in another
|
4810 |
|
|
source file. The default is on.
|
4811 |
|
|
|
4812 |
|
|
A change in the setting of this subcommand will not take effect
|
4813 |
|
|
until the next time symbols for a file are loaded.
|
4814 |
|
|
|
4815 |
|
|
`set opaque-type-resolution off'
|
4816 |
|
|
Tell GDB not to resolve opaque types. In this case, the type is
|
4817 |
|
|
printed as follows:
|
4818 |
|
|
{}
|
4819 |
|
|
|
4820 |
|
|
`show opaque-type-resolution'
|
4821 |
|
|
Show whether opaque types are resolved or not.
|
4822 |
|
|
|
4823 |
|
|
`maint print symbols FILENAME'
|
4824 |
|
|
`maint print psymbols FILENAME'
|
4825 |
|
|
`maint print msymbols FILENAME'
|
4826 |
|
|
Write a dump of debugging symbol data into the file FILENAME.
|
4827 |
|
|
These commands are used to debug the GDB symbol-reading code. Only
|
4828 |
|
|
symbols with debugging data are included. If you use `maint print
|
4829 |
|
|
symbols', GDB includes all the symbols for which it has already
|
4830 |
|
|
collected full details: that is, FILENAME reflects symbols for
|
4831 |
|
|
only those files whose symbols GDB has read. You can use the
|
4832 |
|
|
command `info sources' to find out which files these are. If you
|
4833 |
|
|
use `maint print psymbols' instead, the dump shows information
|
4834 |
|
|
about symbols that GDB only knows partially--that is, symbols
|
4835 |
|
|
defined in files that GDB has skimmed, but not yet read
|
4836 |
|
|
completely. Finally, `maint print msymbols' dumps just the
|
4837 |
|
|
minimal symbol information required for each object file from
|
4838 |
|
|
which GDB has read some symbols. *Note Commands to Specify Files:
|
4839 |
|
|
Files, for a discussion of how GDB reads symbols (in the
|
4840 |
|
|
description of `symbol-file').
|
4841 |
|
|
|
4842 |
|
|
`maint info symtabs [ REGEXP ]'
|
4843 |
|
|
`maint info psymtabs [ REGEXP ]'
|
4844 |
|
|
List the `struct symtab' or `struct partial_symtab' structures
|
4845 |
|
|
whose names match REGEXP. If REGEXP is not given, list them all.
|
4846 |
|
|
The output includes expressions which you can copy into a GDB
|
4847 |
|
|
debugging this one to examine a particular structure in more
|
4848 |
|
|
detail. For example:
|
4849 |
|
|
|
4850 |
|
|
(gdb) maint info psymtabs dwarf2read
|
4851 |
|
|
{ objfile /home/gnu/build/gdb/gdb
|
4852 |
|
|
((struct objfile *) 0x82e69d0)
|
4853 |
|
|
{ psymtab /home/gnu/src/gdb/dwarf2read.c
|
4854 |
|
|
((struct partial_symtab *) 0x8474b10)
|
4855 |
|
|
readin no
|
4856 |
|
|
fullname (null)
|
4857 |
|
|
text addresses 0x814d3c8 -- 0x8158074
|
4858 |
|
|
globals (* (struct partial_symbol **) 0x8507a08 @ 9)
|
4859 |
|
|
statics (* (struct partial_symbol **) 0x40e95b78 @ 2882)
|
4860 |
|
|
dependencies (none)
|
4861 |
|
|
}
|
4862 |
|
|
}
|
4863 |
|
|
(gdb) maint info symtabs
|
4864 |
|
|
(gdb)
|
4865 |
|
|
We see that there is one partial symbol table whose filename
|
4866 |
|
|
contains the string `dwarf2read', belonging to the `gdb'
|
4867 |
|
|
executable; and we see that GDB has not read in any symtabs yet at
|
4868 |
|
|
all. If we set a breakpoint on a function, that will cause GDB to
|
4869 |
|
|
read the symtab for the compilation unit containing that function:
|
4870 |
|
|
|
4871 |
|
|
(gdb) break dwarf2_psymtab_to_symtab
|
4872 |
|
|
Breakpoint 1 at 0x814e5da: file /home/gnu/src/gdb/dwarf2read.c,
|
4873 |
|
|
line 1574.
|
4874 |
|
|
(gdb) maint info symtabs
|
4875 |
|
|
{ objfile /home/gnu/build/gdb/gdb
|
4876 |
|
|
((struct objfile *) 0x82e69d0)
|
4877 |
|
|
{ symtab /home/gnu/src/gdb/dwarf2read.c
|
4878 |
|
|
((struct symtab *) 0x86c1f38)
|
4879 |
|
|
dirname (null)
|
4880 |
|
|
fullname (null)
|
4881 |
|
|
blockvector ((struct blockvector *) 0x86c1bd0) (primary)
|
4882 |
|
|
linetable ((struct linetable *) 0x8370fa0)
|
4883 |
|
|
debugformat DWARF 2
|
4884 |
|
|
}
|
4885 |
|
|
}
|
4886 |
|
|
(gdb)
|
4887 |
|
|
|
4888 |
|
|
|
4889 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Altering, Next: GDB Files, Prev: Symbols, Up: Top
|
4890 |
|
|
|
4891 |
|
|
17 Altering Execution
|
4892 |
|
|
*********************
|
4893 |
|
|
|
4894 |
|
|
Once you think you have found an error in your program, you might want
|
4895 |
|
|
to find out for certain whether correcting the apparent error would
|
4896 |
|
|
lead to correct results in the rest of the run. You can find the
|
4897 |
|
|
answer by experiment, using the GDB features for altering execution of
|
4898 |
|
|
the program.
|
4899 |
|
|
|
4900 |
|
|
For example, you can store new values into variables or memory
|
4901 |
|
|
locations, give your program a signal, restart it at a different
|
4902 |
|
|
address, or even return prematurely from a function.
|
4903 |
|
|
|
4904 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
4905 |
|
|
|
4906 |
|
|
* Assignment:: Assignment to variables
|
4907 |
|
|
* Jumping:: Continuing at a different address
|
4908 |
|
|
* Signaling:: Giving your program a signal
|
4909 |
|
|
* Returning:: Returning from a function
|
4910 |
|
|
* Calling:: Calling your program's functions
|
4911 |
|
|
* Patching:: Patching your program
|
4912 |
|
|
|
4913 |
|
|
|
4914 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Assignment, Next: Jumping, Up: Altering
|
4915 |
|
|
|
4916 |
|
|
17.1 Assignment to Variables
|
4917 |
|
|
============================
|
4918 |
|
|
|
4919 |
|
|
To alter the value of a variable, evaluate an assignment expression.
|
4920 |
|
|
*Note Expressions: Expressions. For example,
|
4921 |
|
|
|
4922 |
|
|
print x=4
|
4923 |
|
|
|
4924 |
|
|
stores the value 4 into the variable `x', and then prints the value of
|
4925 |
|
|
the assignment expression (which is 4). *Note Using GDB with Different
|
4926 |
|
|
Languages: Languages, for more information on operators in supported
|
4927 |
|
|
languages.
|
4928 |
|
|
|
4929 |
|
|
If you are not interested in seeing the value of the assignment, use
|
4930 |
|
|
the `set' command instead of the `print' command. `set' is really the
|
4931 |
|
|
same as `print' except that the expression's value is not printed and
|
4932 |
|
|
is not put in the value history (*note Value History: Value History.).
|
4933 |
|
|
The expression is evaluated only for its effects.
|
4934 |
|
|
|
4935 |
|
|
If the beginning of the argument string of the `set' command appears
|
4936 |
|
|
identical to a `set' subcommand, use the `set variable' command instead
|
4937 |
|
|
of just `set'. This command is identical to `set' except for its lack
|
4938 |
|
|
of subcommands. For example, if your program has a variable `width',
|
4939 |
|
|
you get an error if you try to set a new value with just `set
|
4940 |
|
|
width=13', because GDB has the command `set width':
|
4941 |
|
|
|
4942 |
|
|
(gdb) whatis width
|
4943 |
|
|
type = double
|
4944 |
|
|
(gdb) p width
|
4945 |
|
|
$4 = 13
|
4946 |
|
|
(gdb) set width=47
|
4947 |
|
|
Invalid syntax in expression.
|
4948 |
|
|
|
4949 |
|
|
The invalid expression, of course, is `=47'. In order to actually set
|
4950 |
|
|
the program's variable `width', use
|
4951 |
|
|
|
4952 |
|
|
(gdb) set var width=47
|
4953 |
|
|
|
4954 |
|
|
Because the `set' command has many subcommands that can conflict
|
4955 |
|
|
with the names of program variables, it is a good idea to use the `set
|
4956 |
|
|
variable' command instead of just `set'. For example, if your program
|
4957 |
|
|
has a variable `g', you run into problems if you try to set a new value
|
4958 |
|
|
with just `set g=4', because GDB has the command `set gnutarget',
|
4959 |
|
|
abbreviated `set g':
|
4960 |
|
|
|
4961 |
|
|
(gdb) whatis g
|
4962 |
|
|
type = double
|
4963 |
|
|
(gdb) p g
|
4964 |
|
|
$1 = 1
|
4965 |
|
|
(gdb) set g=4
|
4966 |
|
|
(gdb) p g
|
4967 |
|
|
$2 = 1
|
4968 |
|
|
(gdb) r
|
4969 |
|
|
The program being debugged has been started already.
|
4970 |
|
|
Start it from the beginning? (y or n) y
|
4971 |
|
|
Starting program: /home/smith/cc_progs/a.out
|
4972 |
|
|
"/home/smith/cc_progs/a.out": can't open to read symbols:
|
4973 |
|
|
Invalid bfd target.
|
4974 |
|
|
(gdb) show g
|
4975 |
|
|
The current BFD target is "=4".
|
4976 |
|
|
|
4977 |
|
|
The program variable `g' did not change, and you silently set the
|
4978 |
|
|
`gnutarget' to an invalid value. In order to set the variable `g', use
|
4979 |
|
|
|
4980 |
|
|
(gdb) set var g=4
|
4981 |
|
|
|
4982 |
|
|
GDB allows more implicit conversions in assignments than C; you can
|
4983 |
|
|
freely store an integer value into a pointer variable or vice versa,
|
4984 |
|
|
and you can convert any structure to any other structure that is the
|
4985 |
|
|
same length or shorter.
|
4986 |
|
|
|
4987 |
|
|
To store values into arbitrary places in memory, use the `{...}'
|
4988 |
|
|
construct to generate a value of specified type at a specified address
|
4989 |
|
|
(*note Expressions: Expressions.). For example, `{int}0x83040' refers
|
4990 |
|
|
to memory location `0x83040' as an integer (which implies a certain size
|
4991 |
|
|
and representation in memory), and
|
4992 |
|
|
|
4993 |
|
|
set {int}0x83040 = 4
|
4994 |
|
|
|
4995 |
|
|
stores the value 4 into that memory location.
|
4996 |
|
|
|
4997 |
|
|
|
4998 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Jumping, Next: Signaling, Prev: Assignment, Up: Altering
|
4999 |
|
|
|
5000 |
|
|
17.2 Continuing at a Different Address
|
5001 |
|
|
======================================
|
5002 |
|
|
|
5003 |
|
|
Ordinarily, when you continue your program, you do so at the place where
|
5004 |
|
|
it stopped, with the `continue' command. You can instead continue at
|
5005 |
|
|
an address of your own choosing, with the following commands:
|
5006 |
|
|
|
5007 |
|
|
`jump LINESPEC'
|
5008 |
|
|
`jump LOCATION'
|
5009 |
|
|
Resume execution at line LINESPEC or at address given by LOCATION.
|
5010 |
|
|
Execution stops again immediately if there is a breakpoint there.
|
5011 |
342 |
jeremybenn |
*Note Specify Location::, for a description of the different forms
|
5012 |
|
|
of LINESPEC and LOCATION. It is common practice to use the
|
5013 |
330 |
jeremybenn |
`tbreak' command in conjunction with `jump'. *Note Setting
|
5014 |
|
|
Breakpoints: Set Breaks.
|
5015 |
|
|
|
5016 |
|
|
The `jump' command does not change the current stack frame, or the
|
5017 |
|
|
stack pointer, or the contents of any memory location or any
|
5018 |
|
|
register other than the program counter. If line LINESPEC is in a
|
5019 |
|
|
different function from the one currently executing, the results
|
5020 |
|
|
may be bizarre if the two functions expect different patterns of
|
5021 |
|
|
arguments or of local variables. For this reason, the `jump'
|
5022 |
|
|
command requests confirmation if the specified line is not in the
|
5023 |
|
|
function currently executing. However, even bizarre results are
|
5024 |
|
|
predictable if you are well acquainted with the machine-language
|
5025 |
|
|
code of your program.
|
5026 |
|
|
|
5027 |
|
|
On many systems, you can get much the same effect as the `jump'
|
5028 |
|
|
command by storing a new value into the register `$pc'. The difference
|
5029 |
|
|
is that this does not start your program running; it only changes the
|
5030 |
|
|
address of where it _will_ run when you continue. For example,
|
5031 |
|
|
|
5032 |
|
|
set $pc = 0x485
|
5033 |
|
|
|
5034 |
|
|
makes the next `continue' command or stepping command execute at
|
5035 |
|
|
address `0x485', rather than at the address where your program stopped.
|
5036 |
|
|
*Note Continuing and Stepping: Continuing and Stepping.
|
5037 |
|
|
|
5038 |
|
|
The most common occasion to use the `jump' command is to back
|
5039 |
|
|
up--perhaps with more breakpoints set--over a portion of a program that
|
5040 |
|
|
has already executed, in order to examine its execution in more detail.
|
5041 |
|
|
|
5042 |
|
|
|
5043 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Signaling, Next: Returning, Prev: Jumping, Up: Altering
|
5044 |
|
|
|
5045 |
|
|
17.3 Giving your Program a Signal
|
5046 |
|
|
=================================
|
5047 |
|
|
|
5048 |
|
|
`signal SIGNAL'
|
5049 |
|
|
Resume execution where your program stopped, but immediately give
|
5050 |
|
|
it the signal SIGNAL. SIGNAL can be the name or the number of a
|
5051 |
|
|
signal. For example, on many systems `signal 2' and `signal
|
5052 |
|
|
SIGINT' are both ways of sending an interrupt signal.
|
5053 |
|
|
|
5054 |
|
|
Alternatively, if SIGNAL is zero, continue execution without
|
5055 |
|
|
giving a signal. This is useful when your program stopped on
|
5056 |
|
|
account of a signal and would ordinary see the signal when resumed
|
5057 |
|
|
with the `continue' command; `signal 0' causes it to resume
|
5058 |
|
|
without a signal.
|
5059 |
|
|
|
5060 |
|
|
`signal' does not repeat when you press a second time after
|
5061 |
|
|
executing the command.
|
5062 |
|
|
|
5063 |
|
|
Invoking the `signal' command is not the same as invoking the `kill'
|
5064 |
|
|
utility from the shell. Sending a signal with `kill' causes GDB to
|
5065 |
|
|
decide what to do with the signal depending on the signal handling
|
5066 |
|
|
tables (*note Signals::). The `signal' command passes the signal
|
5067 |
|
|
directly to your program.
|
5068 |
|
|
|
5069 |
|
|
|
5070 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Returning, Next: Calling, Prev: Signaling, Up: Altering
|
5071 |
|
|
|
5072 |
|
|
17.4 Returning from a Function
|
5073 |
|
|
==============================
|
5074 |
|
|
|
5075 |
|
|
`return'
|
5076 |
|
|
`return EXPRESSION'
|
5077 |
|
|
You can cancel execution of a function call with the `return'
|
5078 |
|
|
command. If you give an EXPRESSION argument, its value is used as
|
5079 |
|
|
the function's return value.
|
5080 |
|
|
|
5081 |
|
|
When you use `return', GDB discards the selected stack frame (and
|
5082 |
|
|
all frames within it). You can think of this as making the discarded
|
5083 |
|
|
frame return prematurely. If you wish to specify a value to be
|
5084 |
|
|
returned, give that value as the argument to `return'.
|
5085 |
|
|
|
5086 |
|
|
This pops the selected stack frame (*note Selecting a Frame:
|
5087 |
|
|
Selection.), and any other frames inside of it, leaving its caller as
|
5088 |
|
|
the innermost remaining frame. That frame becomes selected. The
|
5089 |
|
|
specified value is stored in the registers used for returning values of
|
5090 |
|
|
functions.
|
5091 |
|
|
|
5092 |
|
|
The `return' command does not resume execution; it leaves the
|
5093 |
|
|
program stopped in the state that would exist if the function had just
|
5094 |
|
|
returned. In contrast, the `finish' command (*note Continuing and
|
5095 |
|
|
Stepping: Continuing and Stepping.) resumes execution until the
|
5096 |
|
|
selected stack frame returns naturally.
|
5097 |
|
|
|
5098 |
|
|
GDB needs to know how the EXPRESSION argument should be set for the
|
5099 |
|
|
inferior. The concrete registers assignment depends on the OS ABI and
|
5100 |
|
|
the type being returned by the selected stack frame. For example it is
|
5101 |
|
|
common for OS ABI to return floating point values in FPU registers
|
5102 |
|
|
while integer values in CPU registers. Still some ABIs return even
|
5103 |
|
|
floating point values in CPU registers. Larger integer widths (such as
|
5104 |
|
|
`long long int') also have specific placement rules. GDB already knows
|
5105 |
|
|
the OS ABI from its current target so it needs to find out also the
|
5106 |
|
|
type being returned to make the assignment into the right register(s).
|
5107 |
|
|
|
5108 |
|
|
Normally, the selected stack frame has debug info. GDB will always
|
5109 |
|
|
use the debug info instead of the implicit type of EXPRESSION when the
|
5110 |
|
|
debug info is available. For example, if you type `return -1', and the
|
5111 |
|
|
function in the current stack frame is declared to return a `long long
|
5112 |
|
|
int', GDB transparently converts the implicit `int' value of -1 into a
|
5113 |
|
|
`long long int':
|
5114 |
|
|
|
5115 |
|
|
Breakpoint 1, func () at gdb.base/return-nodebug.c:29
|
5116 |
|
|
29 return 31;
|
5117 |
|
|
(gdb) return -1
|
5118 |
|
|
Make func return now? (y or n) y
|
5119 |
|
|
#0 0x004004f6 in main () at gdb.base/return-nodebug.c:43
|
5120 |
|
|
43 printf ("result=%lld\n", func ());
|
5121 |
|
|
(gdb)
|
5122 |
|
|
|
5123 |
|
|
However, if the selected stack frame does not have a debug info,
|
5124 |
|
|
e.g., if the function was compiled without debug info, GDB has to find
|
5125 |
|
|
out the type to return from user. Specifying a different type by
|
5126 |
|
|
mistake may set the value in different inferior registers than the
|
5127 |
|
|
caller code expects. For example, typing `return -1' with its implicit
|
5128 |
|
|
type `int' would set only a part of a `long long int' result for a
|
5129 |
|
|
debug info less function (on 32-bit architectures). Therefore the user
|
5130 |
|
|
is required to specify the return type by an appropriate cast
|
5131 |
|
|
explicitly:
|
5132 |
|
|
|
5133 |
|
|
Breakpoint 2, 0x0040050b in func ()
|
5134 |
|
|
(gdb) return -1
|
5135 |
|
|
Return value type not available for selected stack frame.
|
5136 |
|
|
Please use an explicit cast of the value to return.
|
5137 |
|
|
(gdb) return (long long int) -1
|
5138 |
|
|
Make selected stack frame return now? (y or n) y
|
5139 |
|
|
#0 0x00400526 in main ()
|
5140 |
|
|
(gdb)
|
5141 |
|
|
|
5142 |
|
|
|
5143 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Calling, Next: Patching, Prev: Returning, Up: Altering
|
5144 |
|
|
|
5145 |
|
|
17.5 Calling Program Functions
|
5146 |
|
|
==============================
|
5147 |
|
|
|
5148 |
|
|
`print EXPR'
|
5149 |
|
|
Evaluate the expression EXPR and display the resulting value.
|
5150 |
|
|
EXPR may include calls to functions in the program being debugged.
|
5151 |
|
|
|
5152 |
|
|
`call EXPR'
|
5153 |
|
|
Evaluate the expression EXPR without displaying `void' returned
|
5154 |
|
|
values.
|
5155 |
|
|
|
5156 |
|
|
You can use this variant of the `print' command if you want to
|
5157 |
|
|
execute a function from your program that does not return anything
|
5158 |
|
|
(a.k.a. "a void function"), but without cluttering the output with
|
5159 |
|
|
`void' returned values that GDB will otherwise print. If the
|
5160 |
|
|
result is not void, it is printed and saved in the value history.
|
5161 |
|
|
|
5162 |
|
|
It is possible for the function you call via the `print' or `call'
|
5163 |
|
|
command to generate a signal (e.g., if there's a bug in the function,
|
5164 |
|
|
or if you passed it incorrect arguments). What happens in that case is
|
5165 |
|
|
controlled by the `set unwindonsignal' command.
|
5166 |
|
|
|
5167 |
|
|
Similarly, with a C++ program it is possible for the function you
|
5168 |
|
|
call via the `print' or `call' command to generate an exception that is
|
5169 |
|
|
not handled due to the constraints of the dummy frame. In this case,
|
5170 |
|
|
any exception that is raised in the frame, but has an out-of-frame
|
5171 |
|
|
exception handler will not be found. GDB builds a dummy-frame for the
|
5172 |
|
|
inferior function call, and the unwinder cannot seek for exception
|
5173 |
|
|
handlers outside of this dummy-frame. What happens in that case is
|
5174 |
|
|
controlled by the `set unwind-on-terminating-exception' command.
|
5175 |
|
|
|
5176 |
|
|
`set unwindonsignal'
|
5177 |
|
|
Set unwinding of the stack if a signal is received while in a
|
5178 |
|
|
function that GDB called in the program being debugged. If set to
|
5179 |
|
|
on, GDB unwinds the stack it created for the call and restores the
|
5180 |
|
|
context to what it was before the call. If set to off (the
|
5181 |
|
|
default), GDB stops in the frame where the signal was received.
|
5182 |
|
|
|
5183 |
|
|
`show unwindonsignal'
|
5184 |
|
|
Show the current setting of stack unwinding in the functions
|
5185 |
|
|
called by GDB.
|
5186 |
|
|
|
5187 |
|
|
`set unwind-on-terminating-exception'
|
5188 |
|
|
Set unwinding of the stack if a C++ exception is raised, but left
|
5189 |
|
|
unhandled while in a function that GDB called in the program being
|
5190 |
|
|
debugged. If set to on (the default), GDB unwinds the stack it
|
5191 |
|
|
created for the call and restores the context to what it was before
|
5192 |
|
|
the call. If set to off, GDB the exception is delivered to the
|
5193 |
|
|
default C++ exception handler and the inferior terminated.
|
5194 |
|
|
|
5195 |
|
|
`show unwind-on-terminating-exception'
|
5196 |
|
|
Show the current setting of stack unwinding in the functions
|
5197 |
|
|
called by GDB.
|
5198 |
|
|
|
5199 |
|
|
|
5200 |
|
|
Sometimes, a function you wish to call is actually a "weak alias"
|
5201 |
|
|
for another function. In such case, GDB might not pick up the type
|
5202 |
|
|
information, including the types of the function arguments, which
|
5203 |
|
|
causes GDB to call the inferior function incorrectly. As a result, the
|
5204 |
|
|
called function will function erroneously and may even crash. A
|
5205 |
|
|
solution to that is to use the name of the aliased function instead.
|
5206 |
|
|
|
5207 |
|
|
|
5208 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Patching, Prev: Calling, Up: Altering
|
5209 |
|
|
|
5210 |
|
|
17.6 Patching Programs
|
5211 |
|
|
======================
|
5212 |
|
|
|
5213 |
|
|
By default, GDB opens the file containing your program's executable
|
5214 |
|
|
code (or the corefile) read-only. This prevents accidental alterations
|
5215 |
|
|
to machine code; but it also prevents you from intentionally patching
|
5216 |
|
|
your program's binary.
|
5217 |
|
|
|
5218 |
|
|
If you'd like to be able to patch the binary, you can specify that
|
5219 |
|
|
explicitly with the `set write' command. For example, you might want
|
5220 |
|
|
to turn on internal debugging flags, or even to make emergency repairs.
|
5221 |
|
|
|
5222 |
|
|
`set write on'
|
5223 |
|
|
`set write off'
|
5224 |
|
|
If you specify `set write on', GDB opens executable and core files
|
5225 |
|
|
for both reading and writing; if you specify `set write off' (the
|
5226 |
|
|
default), GDB opens them read-only.
|
5227 |
|
|
|
5228 |
|
|
If you have already loaded a file, you must load it again (using
|
5229 |
|
|
the `exec-file' or `core-file' command) after changing `set
|
5230 |
|
|
write', for your new setting to take effect.
|
5231 |
|
|
|
5232 |
|
|
`show write'
|
5233 |
|
|
Display whether executable files and core files are opened for
|
5234 |
|
|
writing as well as reading.
|
5235 |
|
|
|
5236 |
|
|
|
5237 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: GDB Files, Next: Targets, Prev: Altering, Up: Top
|
5238 |
|
|
|
5239 |
|
|
18 GDB Files
|
5240 |
|
|
************
|
5241 |
|
|
|
5242 |
|
|
GDB needs to know the file name of the program to be debugged, both in
|
5243 |
|
|
order to read its symbol table and in order to start your program. To
|
5244 |
|
|
debug a core dump of a previous run, you must also tell GDB the name of
|
5245 |
|
|
the core dump file.
|
5246 |
|
|
|
5247 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
5248 |
|
|
|
5249 |
|
|
* Files:: Commands to specify files
|
5250 |
|
|
* Separate Debug Files:: Debugging information in separate files
|
5251 |
|
|
* Symbol Errors:: Errors reading symbol files
|
5252 |
|
|
* Data Files:: GDB data files
|
5253 |
|
|
|
5254 |
|
|
|
5255 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Files, Next: Separate Debug Files, Up: GDB Files
|
5256 |
|
|
|
5257 |
|
|
18.1 Commands to Specify Files
|
5258 |
|
|
==============================
|
5259 |
|
|
|
5260 |
|
|
You may want to specify executable and core dump file names. The usual
|
5261 |
|
|
way to do this is at start-up time, using the arguments to GDB's
|
5262 |
|
|
start-up commands (*note Getting In and Out of GDB: Invocation.).
|
5263 |
|
|
|
5264 |
|
|
Occasionally it is necessary to change to a different file during a
|
5265 |
|
|
GDB session. Or you may run GDB and forget to specify a file you want
|
5266 |
|
|
to use. Or you are debugging a remote target via `gdbserver' (*note
|
5267 |
|
|
file: Server.). In these situations the GDB commands to specify new
|
5268 |
|
|
files are useful.
|
5269 |
|
|
|
5270 |
|
|
`file FILENAME'
|
5271 |
|
|
Use FILENAME as the program to be debugged. It is read for its
|
5272 |
|
|
symbols and for the contents of pure memory. It is also the
|
5273 |
|
|
program executed when you use the `run' command. If you do not
|
5274 |
|
|
specify a directory and the file is not found in the GDB working
|
5275 |
|
|
directory, GDB uses the environment variable `PATH' as a list of
|
5276 |
|
|
directories to search, just as the shell does when looking for a
|
5277 |
|
|
program to run. You can change the value of this variable, for
|
5278 |
|
|
both GDB and your program, using the `path' command.
|
5279 |
|
|
|
5280 |
|
|
You can load unlinked object `.o' files into GDB using the `file'
|
5281 |
|
|
command. You will not be able to "run" an object file, but you
|
5282 |
|
|
can disassemble functions and inspect variables. Also, if the
|
5283 |
|
|
underlying BFD functionality supports it, you could use `gdb
|
5284 |
|
|
-write' to patch object files using this technique. Note that GDB
|
5285 |
|
|
can neither interpret nor modify relocations in this case, so
|
5286 |
|
|
branches and some initialized variables will appear to go to the
|
5287 |
|
|
wrong place. But this feature is still handy from time to time.
|
5288 |
|
|
|
5289 |
|
|
`file'
|
5290 |
|
|
`file' with no argument makes GDB discard any information it has
|
5291 |
|
|
on both executable file and the symbol table.
|
5292 |
|
|
|
5293 |
|
|
`exec-file [ FILENAME ]'
|
5294 |
|
|
Specify that the program to be run (but not the symbol table) is
|
5295 |
|
|
found in FILENAME. GDB searches the environment variable `PATH'
|
5296 |
|
|
if necessary to locate your program. Omitting FILENAME means to
|
5297 |
|
|
discard information on the executable file.
|
5298 |
|
|
|
5299 |
|
|
`symbol-file [ FILENAME ]'
|
5300 |
|
|
Read symbol table information from file FILENAME. `PATH' is
|
5301 |
|
|
searched when necessary. Use the `file' command to get both symbol
|
5302 |
|
|
table and program to run from the same file.
|
5303 |
|
|
|
5304 |
|
|
`symbol-file' with no argument clears out GDB information on your
|
5305 |
|
|
program's symbol table.
|
5306 |
|
|
|
5307 |
|
|
The `symbol-file' command causes GDB to forget the contents of
|
5308 |
|
|
some breakpoints and auto-display expressions. This is because
|
5309 |
|
|
they may contain pointers to the internal data recording symbols
|
5310 |
|
|
and data types, which are part of the old symbol table data being
|
5311 |
|
|
discarded inside GDB.
|
5312 |
|
|
|
5313 |
|
|
`symbol-file' does not repeat if you press again after
|
5314 |
|
|
executing it once.
|
5315 |
|
|
|
5316 |
|
|
When GDB is configured for a particular environment, it
|
5317 |
|
|
understands debugging information in whatever format is the
|
5318 |
|
|
standard generated for that environment; you may use either a GNU
|
5319 |
|
|
compiler, or other compilers that adhere to the local conventions.
|
5320 |
|
|
Best results are usually obtained from GNU compilers; for example,
|
5321 |
|
|
using `GCC' you can generate debugging information for optimized
|
5322 |
|
|
code.
|
5323 |
|
|
|
5324 |
|
|
For most kinds of object files, with the exception of old SVR3
|
5325 |
|
|
systems using COFF, the `symbol-file' command does not normally
|
5326 |
|
|
read the symbol table in full right away. Instead, it scans the
|
5327 |
|
|
symbol table quickly to find which source files and which symbols
|
5328 |
|
|
are present. The details are read later, one source file at a
|
5329 |
|
|
time, as they are needed.
|
5330 |
|
|
|
5331 |
|
|
The purpose of this two-stage reading strategy is to make GDB
|
5332 |
|
|
start up faster. For the most part, it is invisible except for
|
5333 |
|
|
occasional pauses while the symbol table details for a particular
|
5334 |
|
|
source file are being read. (The `set verbose' command can turn
|
5335 |
|
|
these pauses into messages if desired. *Note Optional Warnings
|
5336 |
|
|
and Messages: Messages/Warnings.)
|
5337 |
|
|
|
5338 |
|
|
We have not implemented the two-stage strategy for COFF yet. When
|
5339 |
|
|
the symbol table is stored in COFF format, `symbol-file' reads the
|
5340 |
|
|
symbol table data in full right away. Note that "stabs-in-COFF"
|
5341 |
|
|
still does the two-stage strategy, since the debug info is actually
|
5342 |
|
|
in stabs format.
|
5343 |
|
|
|
5344 |
|
|
`symbol-file [ -readnow ] FILENAME'
|
5345 |
|
|
`file [ -readnow ] FILENAME'
|
5346 |
|
|
You can override the GDB two-stage strategy for reading symbol
|
5347 |
|
|
tables by using the `-readnow' option with any of the commands that
|
5348 |
|
|
load symbol table information, if you want to be sure GDB has the
|
5349 |
|
|
entire symbol table available.
|
5350 |
|
|
|
5351 |
|
|
`core-file [FILENAME]'
|
5352 |
|
|
`core'
|
5353 |
|
|
Specify the whereabouts of a core dump file to be used as the
|
5354 |
|
|
"contents of memory". Traditionally, core files contain only some
|
5355 |
|
|
parts of the address space of the process that generated them; GDB
|
5356 |
|
|
can access the executable file itself for other parts.
|
5357 |
|
|
|
5358 |
|
|
`core-file' with no argument specifies that no core file is to be
|
5359 |
|
|
used.
|
5360 |
|
|
|
5361 |
|
|
Note that the core file is ignored when your program is actually
|
5362 |
|
|
running under GDB. So, if you have been running your program and
|
5363 |
|
|
you wish to debug a core file instead, you must kill the
|
5364 |
|
|
subprocess in which the program is running. To do this, use the
|
5365 |
|
|
`kill' command (*note Killing the Child Process: Kill Process.).
|
5366 |
|
|
|
5367 |
|
|
`add-symbol-file FILENAME ADDRESS'
|
5368 |
|
|
`add-symbol-file FILENAME ADDRESS [ -readnow ]'
|
5369 |
|
|
`add-symbol-file FILENAME -sSECTION ADDRESS ...'
|
5370 |
|
|
The `add-symbol-file' command reads additional symbol table
|
5371 |
|
|
information from the file FILENAME. You would use this command
|
5372 |
|
|
when FILENAME has been dynamically loaded (by some other means)
|
5373 |
|
|
into the program that is running. ADDRESS should be the memory
|
5374 |
|
|
address at which the file has been loaded; GDB cannot figure this
|
5375 |
|
|
out for itself. You can additionally specify an arbitrary number
|
5376 |
|
|
of `-sSECTION ADDRESS' pairs, to give an explicit section name and
|
5377 |
|
|
base address for that section. You can specify any ADDRESS as an
|
5378 |
|
|
expression.
|
5379 |
|
|
|
5380 |
|
|
The symbol table of the file FILENAME is added to the symbol table
|
5381 |
|
|
originally read with the `symbol-file' command. You can use the
|
5382 |
|
|
`add-symbol-file' command any number of times; the new symbol data
|
5383 |
|
|
thus read keeps adding to the old. To discard all old symbol data
|
5384 |
|
|
instead, use the `symbol-file' command without any arguments.
|
5385 |
|
|
|
5386 |
|
|
Although FILENAME is typically a shared library file, an
|
5387 |
|
|
executable file, or some other object file which has been fully
|
5388 |
|
|
relocated for loading into a process, you can also load symbolic
|
5389 |
|
|
information from relocatable `.o' files, as long as:
|
5390 |
|
|
|
5391 |
|
|
* the file's symbolic information refers only to linker symbols
|
5392 |
|
|
defined in that file, not to symbols defined by other object
|
5393 |
|
|
files,
|
5394 |
|
|
|
5395 |
|
|
* every section the file's symbolic information refers to has
|
5396 |
|
|
actually been loaded into the inferior, as it appears in the
|
5397 |
|
|
file, and
|
5398 |
|
|
|
5399 |
|
|
* you can determine the address at which every section was
|
5400 |
|
|
loaded, and provide these to the `add-symbol-file' command.
|
5401 |
|
|
|
5402 |
|
|
Some embedded operating systems, like Sun Chorus and VxWorks, can
|
5403 |
|
|
load relocatable files into an already running program; such
|
5404 |
|
|
systems typically make the requirements above easy to meet.
|
5405 |
|
|
However, it's important to recognize that many native systems use
|
5406 |
|
|
complex link procedures (`.linkonce' section factoring and C++
|
5407 |
|
|
constructor table assembly, for example) that make the
|
5408 |
|
|
requirements difficult to meet. In general, one cannot assume
|
5409 |
|
|
that using `add-symbol-file' to read a relocatable object file's
|
5410 |
|
|
symbolic information will have the same effect as linking the
|
5411 |
|
|
relocatable object file into the program in the normal way.
|
5412 |
|
|
|
5413 |
|
|
`add-symbol-file' does not repeat if you press after using
|
5414 |
|
|
it.
|
5415 |
|
|
|
5416 |
|
|
`add-symbol-file-from-memory ADDRESS'
|
5417 |
|
|
Load symbols from the given ADDRESS in a dynamically loaded object
|
5418 |
|
|
file whose image is mapped directly into the inferior's memory.
|
5419 |
|
|
For example, the Linux kernel maps a `syscall DSO' into each
|
5420 |
|
|
process's address space; this DSO provides kernel-specific code for
|
5421 |
|
|
some system calls. The argument can be any expression whose
|
5422 |
|
|
evaluation yields the address of the file's shared object file
|
5423 |
|
|
header. For this command to work, you must have used
|
5424 |
|
|
`symbol-file' or `exec-file' commands in advance.
|
5425 |
|
|
|
5426 |
|
|
`add-shared-symbol-files LIBRARY-FILE'
|
5427 |
|
|
`assf LIBRARY-FILE'
|
5428 |
|
|
The `add-shared-symbol-files' command can currently be used only
|
5429 |
|
|
in the Cygwin build of GDB on MS-Windows OS, where it is an alias
|
5430 |
|
|
for the `dll-symbols' command (*note Cygwin Native::). GDB
|
5431 |
|
|
automatically looks for shared libraries, however if GDB does not
|
5432 |
|
|
find yours, you can invoke `add-shared-symbol-files'. It takes
|
5433 |
|
|
one argument: the shared library's file name. `assf' is a
|
5434 |
|
|
shorthand alias for `add-shared-symbol-files'.
|
5435 |
|
|
|
5436 |
|
|
`section SECTION ADDR'
|
5437 |
|
|
The `section' command changes the base address of the named
|
5438 |
|
|
SECTION of the exec file to ADDR. This can be used if the exec
|
5439 |
|
|
file does not contain section addresses, (such as in the `a.out'
|
5440 |
|
|
format), or when the addresses specified in the file itself are
|
5441 |
|
|
wrong. Each section must be changed separately. The `info files'
|
5442 |
|
|
command, described below, lists all the sections and their
|
5443 |
|
|
addresses.
|
5444 |
|
|
|
5445 |
|
|
`info files'
|
5446 |
|
|
`info target'
|
5447 |
|
|
`info files' and `info target' are synonymous; both print the
|
5448 |
|
|
current target (*note Specifying a Debugging Target: Targets.),
|
5449 |
|
|
including the names of the executable and core dump files
|
5450 |
|
|
currently in use by GDB, and the files from which symbols were
|
5451 |
|
|
loaded. The command `help target' lists all possible targets
|
5452 |
|
|
rather than current ones.
|
5453 |
|
|
|
5454 |
|
|
`maint info sections'
|
5455 |
|
|
Another command that can give you extra information about program
|
5456 |
|
|
sections is `maint info sections'. In addition to the section
|
5457 |
|
|
information displayed by `info files', this command displays the
|
5458 |
|
|
flags and file offset of each section in the executable and core
|
5459 |
|
|
dump files. In addition, `maint info sections' provides the
|
5460 |
|
|
following command options (which may be arbitrarily combined):
|
5461 |
|
|
|
5462 |
|
|
`ALLOBJ'
|
5463 |
|
|
Display sections for all loaded object files, including
|
5464 |
|
|
shared libraries.
|
5465 |
|
|
|
5466 |
|
|
`SECTIONS'
|
5467 |
|
|
Display info only for named SECTIONS.
|
5468 |
|
|
|
5469 |
|
|
`SECTION-FLAGS'
|
5470 |
|
|
Display info only for sections for which SECTION-FLAGS are
|
5471 |
|
|
true. The section flags that GDB currently knows about are:
|
5472 |
|
|
`ALLOC'
|
5473 |
|
|
Section will have space allocated in the process when
|
5474 |
|
|
loaded. Set for all sections except those containing
|
5475 |
|
|
debug information.
|
5476 |
|
|
|
5477 |
|
|
`LOAD'
|
5478 |
|
|
Section will be loaded from the file into the child
|
5479 |
|
|
process memory. Set for pre-initialized code and data,
|
5480 |
|
|
clear for `.bss' sections.
|
5481 |
|
|
|
5482 |
|
|
`RELOC'
|
5483 |
|
|
Section needs to be relocated before loading.
|
5484 |
|
|
|
5485 |
|
|
`READONLY'
|
5486 |
|
|
Section cannot be modified by the child process.
|
5487 |
|
|
|
5488 |
|
|
`CODE'
|
5489 |
|
|
Section contains executable code only.
|
5490 |
|
|
|
5491 |
|
|
`DATA'
|
5492 |
|
|
Section contains data only (no executable code).
|
5493 |
|
|
|
5494 |
|
|
`ROM'
|
5495 |
|
|
Section will reside in ROM.
|
5496 |
|
|
|
5497 |
|
|
`CONSTRUCTOR'
|
5498 |
|
|
Section contains data for constructor/destructor lists.
|
5499 |
|
|
|
5500 |
|
|
`HAS_CONTENTS'
|
5501 |
|
|
Section is not empty.
|
5502 |
|
|
|
5503 |
|
|
`NEVER_LOAD'
|
5504 |
|
|
An instruction to the linker to not output the section.
|
5505 |
|
|
|
5506 |
|
|
`COFF_SHARED_LIBRARY'
|
5507 |
|
|
A notification to the linker that the section contains
|
5508 |
|
|
COFF shared library information.
|
5509 |
|
|
|
5510 |
|
|
`IS_COMMON'
|
5511 |
|
|
Section contains common symbols.
|
5512 |
|
|
|
5513 |
|
|
`set trust-readonly-sections on'
|
5514 |
|
|
Tell GDB that readonly sections in your object file really are
|
5515 |
|
|
read-only (i.e. that their contents will not change). In that
|
5516 |
|
|
case, GDB can fetch values from these sections out of the object
|
5517 |
|
|
file, rather than from the target program. For some targets
|
5518 |
|
|
(notably embedded ones), this can be a significant enhancement to
|
5519 |
|
|
debugging performance.
|
5520 |
|
|
|
5521 |
|
|
The default is off.
|
5522 |
|
|
|
5523 |
|
|
`set trust-readonly-sections off'
|
5524 |
|
|
Tell GDB not to trust readonly sections. This means that the
|
5525 |
|
|
contents of the section might change while the program is running,
|
5526 |
|
|
and must therefore be fetched from the target when needed.
|
5527 |
|
|
|
5528 |
|
|
`show trust-readonly-sections'
|
5529 |
|
|
Show the current setting of trusting readonly sections.
|
5530 |
|
|
|
5531 |
|
|
All file-specifying commands allow both absolute and relative file
|
5532 |
|
|
names as arguments. GDB always converts the file name to an absolute
|
5533 |
|
|
file name and remembers it that way.
|
5534 |
|
|
|
5535 |
|
|
GDB supports GNU/Linux, MS-Windows, HP-UX, SunOS, SVr4, Irix, and
|
5536 |
|
|
IBM RS/6000 AIX shared libraries.
|
5537 |
|
|
|
5538 |
|
|
On MS-Windows GDB must be linked with the Expat library to support
|
5539 |
|
|
shared libraries. *Note Expat::.
|
5540 |
|
|
|
5541 |
|
|
GDB automatically loads symbol definitions from shared libraries
|
5542 |
|
|
when you use the `run' command, or when you examine a core file.
|
5543 |
|
|
(Before you issue the `run' command, GDB does not understand references
|
5544 |
|
|
to a function in a shared library, however--unless you are debugging a
|
5545 |
|
|
core file).
|
5546 |
|
|
|
5547 |
|
|
On HP-UX, if the program loads a library explicitly, GDB
|
5548 |
|
|
automatically loads the symbols at the time of the `shl_load' call.
|
5549 |
|
|
|
5550 |
|
|
There are times, however, when you may wish to not automatically load
|
5551 |
|
|
symbol definitions from shared libraries, such as when they are
|
5552 |
|
|
particularly large or there are many of them.
|
5553 |
|
|
|
5554 |
|
|
To control the automatic loading of shared library symbols, use the
|
5555 |
|
|
commands:
|
5556 |
|
|
|
5557 |
|
|
`set auto-solib-add MODE'
|
5558 |
|
|
If MODE is `on', symbols from all shared object libraries will be
|
5559 |
|
|
loaded automatically when the inferior begins execution, you
|
5560 |
|
|
attach to an independently started inferior, or when the dynamic
|
5561 |
|
|
linker informs GDB that a new library has been loaded. If MODE is
|
5562 |
|
|
`off', symbols must be loaded manually, using the `sharedlibrary'
|
5563 |
|
|
command. The default value is `on'.
|
5564 |
|
|
|
5565 |
|
|
If your program uses lots of shared libraries with debug info that
|
5566 |
|
|
takes large amounts of memory, you can decrease the GDB memory
|
5567 |
|
|
footprint by preventing it from automatically loading the symbols
|
5568 |
|
|
from shared libraries. To that end, type `set auto-solib-add off'
|
5569 |
|
|
before running the inferior, then load each library whose debug
|
5570 |
|
|
symbols you do need with `sharedlibrary REGEXP', where REGEXP is a
|
5571 |
|
|
regular expression that matches the libraries whose symbols you
|
5572 |
|
|
want to be loaded.
|
5573 |
|
|
|
5574 |
|
|
`show auto-solib-add'
|
5575 |
|
|
Display the current autoloading mode.
|
5576 |
|
|
|
5577 |
|
|
To explicitly load shared library symbols, use the `sharedlibrary'
|
5578 |
|
|
command:
|
5579 |
|
|
|
5580 |
|
|
`info share REGEX'
|
5581 |
|
|
`info sharedlibrary REGEX'
|
5582 |
|
|
Print the names of the shared libraries which are currently loaded
|
5583 |
|
|
that match REGEX. If REGEX is omitted then print all shared
|
5584 |
|
|
libraries that are loaded.
|
5585 |
|
|
|
5586 |
|
|
`sharedlibrary REGEX'
|
5587 |
|
|
`share REGEX'
|
5588 |
|
|
Load shared object library symbols for files matching a Unix
|
5589 |
|
|
regular expression. As with files loaded automatically, it only
|
5590 |
|
|
loads shared libraries required by your program for a core file or
|
5591 |
|
|
after typing `run'. If REGEX is omitted all shared libraries
|
5592 |
|
|
required by your program are loaded.
|
5593 |
|
|
|
5594 |
|
|
`nosharedlibrary'
|
5595 |
|
|
Unload all shared object library symbols. This discards all
|
5596 |
|
|
symbols that have been loaded from all shared libraries. Symbols
|
5597 |
|
|
from shared libraries that were loaded by explicit user requests
|
5598 |
|
|
are not discarded.
|
5599 |
|
|
|
5600 |
|
|
Sometimes you may wish that GDB stops and gives you control when any
|
5601 |
|
|
of shared library events happen. Use the `set stop-on-solib-events'
|
5602 |
|
|
command for this:
|
5603 |
|
|
|
5604 |
|
|
`set stop-on-solib-events'
|
5605 |
|
|
This command controls whether GDB should give you control when the
|
5606 |
|
|
dynamic linker notifies it about some shared library event. The
|
5607 |
|
|
most common event of interest is loading or unloading of a new
|
5608 |
|
|
shared library.
|
5609 |
|
|
|
5610 |
|
|
`show stop-on-solib-events'
|
5611 |
|
|
Show whether GDB stops and gives you control when shared library
|
5612 |
|
|
events happen.
|
5613 |
|
|
|
5614 |
|
|
Shared libraries are also supported in many cross or remote debugging
|
5615 |
|
|
configurations. GDB needs to have access to the target's libraries;
|
5616 |
|
|
this can be accomplished either by providing copies of the libraries on
|
5617 |
|
|
the host system, or by asking GDB to automatically retrieve the
|
5618 |
|
|
libraries from the target. If copies of the target libraries are
|
5619 |
|
|
provided, they need to be the same as the target libraries, although the
|
5620 |
|
|
copies on the target can be stripped as long as the copies on the host
|
5621 |
|
|
are not.
|
5622 |
|
|
|
5623 |
|
|
For remote debugging, you need to tell GDB where the target
|
5624 |
|
|
libraries are, so that it can load the correct copies--otherwise, it
|
5625 |
|
|
may try to load the host's libraries. GDB has two variables to specify
|
5626 |
|
|
the search directories for target libraries.
|
5627 |
|
|
|
5628 |
|
|
`set sysroot PATH'
|
5629 |
|
|
Use PATH as the system root for the program being debugged. Any
|
5630 |
|
|
absolute shared library paths will be prefixed with PATH; many
|
5631 |
|
|
runtime loaders store the absolute paths to the shared library in
|
5632 |
|
|
the target program's memory. If you use `set sysroot' to find
|
5633 |
|
|
shared libraries, they need to be laid out in the same way that
|
5634 |
|
|
they are on the target, with e.g. a `/lib' and `/usr/lib' hierarchy
|
5635 |
|
|
under PATH.
|
5636 |
|
|
|
5637 |
|
|
If PATH starts with the sequence `remote:', GDB will retrieve the
|
5638 |
|
|
target libraries from the remote system. This is only supported
|
5639 |
|
|
when using a remote target that supports the `remote get' command
|
5640 |
|
|
(*note Sending files to a remote system: File Transfer.). The
|
5641 |
|
|
part of PATH following the initial `remote:' (if present) is used
|
5642 |
|
|
as system root prefix on the remote file system. (1)
|
5643 |
|
|
|
5644 |
|
|
For targets with an MS-DOS based filesystem, such as MS-Windows and
|
5645 |
|
|
SymbianOS, GDB tries prefixing a few variants of the target
|
5646 |
|
|
absolute file name with PATH. But first, on Unix hosts, GDB
|
5647 |
|
|
converts all backslash directory separators into forward slashes,
|
5648 |
|
|
because the backslash is not a directory separator on Unix:
|
5649 |
|
|
|
5650 |
|
|
c:\foo\bar.dll => c:/foo/bar.dll
|
5651 |
|
|
|
5652 |
|
|
Then, GDB attempts prefixing the target file name with PATH, and
|
5653 |
|
|
looks for the resulting file name in the host file system:
|
5654 |
|
|
|
5655 |
|
|
c:/foo/bar.dll => /path/to/sysroot/c:/foo/bar.dll
|
5656 |
|
|
|
5657 |
|
|
If that does not find the shared library, GDB tries removing the
|
5658 |
|
|
`:' character from the drive spec, both for convenience, and, for
|
5659 |
|
|
the case of the host file system not supporting file names with
|
5660 |
|
|
colons:
|
5661 |
|
|
|
5662 |
|
|
c:/foo/bar.dll => /path/to/sysroot/c/foo/bar.dll
|
5663 |
|
|
|
5664 |
|
|
This makes it possible to have a system root that mirrors a target
|
5665 |
|
|
with more than one drive. E.g., you may want to setup your local
|
5666 |
|
|
copies of the target system shared libraries like so (note `c' vs
|
5667 |
|
|
`z'):
|
5668 |
|
|
|
5669 |
|
|
`/path/to/sysroot/c/sys/bin/foo.dll'
|
5670 |
|
|
`/path/to/sysroot/c/sys/bin/bar.dll'
|
5671 |
|
|
`/path/to/sysroot/z/sys/bin/bar.dll'
|
5672 |
|
|
|
5673 |
|
|
and point the system root at `/path/to/sysroot', so that GDB can
|
5674 |
|
|
find the correct copies of both `c:\sys\bin\foo.dll', and
|
5675 |
|
|
`z:\sys\bin\bar.dll'.
|
5676 |
|
|
|
5677 |
|
|
If that still does not find the shared library, GDB tries removing
|
5678 |
|
|
the whole drive spec from the target file name:
|
5679 |
|
|
|
5680 |
|
|
c:/foo/bar.dll => /path/to/sysroot/foo/bar.dll
|
5681 |
|
|
|
5682 |
|
|
This last lookup makes it possible to not care about the drive
|
5683 |
|
|
name, if you don't want or need to.
|
5684 |
|
|
|
5685 |
|
|
The `set solib-absolute-prefix' command is an alias for `set
|
5686 |
|
|
sysroot'.
|
5687 |
|
|
|
5688 |
|
|
You can set the default system root by using the configure-time
|
5689 |
|
|
`--with-sysroot' option. If the system root is inside GDB's
|
5690 |
|
|
configured binary prefix (set with `--prefix' or `--exec-prefix'),
|
5691 |
|
|
then the default system root will be updated automatically if the
|
5692 |
|
|
installed GDB is moved to a new location.
|
5693 |
|
|
|
5694 |
|
|
`show sysroot'
|
5695 |
|
|
Display the current shared library prefix.
|
5696 |
|
|
|
5697 |
|
|
`set solib-search-path PATH'
|
5698 |
|
|
If this variable is set, PATH is a colon-separated list of
|
5699 |
|
|
directories to search for shared libraries. `solib-search-path'
|
5700 |
|
|
is used after `sysroot' fails to locate the library, or if the
|
5701 |
|
|
path to the library is relative instead of absolute. If you want
|
5702 |
|
|
to use `solib-search-path' instead of `sysroot', be sure to set
|
5703 |
|
|
`sysroot' to a nonexistent directory to prevent GDB from finding
|
5704 |
|
|
your host's libraries. `sysroot' is preferred; setting it to a
|
5705 |
|
|
nonexistent directory may interfere with automatic loading of
|
5706 |
|
|
shared library symbols.
|
5707 |
|
|
|
5708 |
|
|
`show solib-search-path'
|
5709 |
|
|
Display the current shared library search path.
|
5710 |
|
|
|
5711 |
|
|
`set target-file-system-kind KIND'
|
5712 |
|
|
Set assumed file system kind for target reported file names.
|
5713 |
|
|
|
5714 |
|
|
Shared library file names as reported by the target system may not
|
5715 |
|
|
make sense as is on the system GDB is running on. For example,
|
5716 |
|
|
when remote debugging a target that has MS-DOS based file system
|
5717 |
|
|
semantics, from a Unix host, the target may be reporting to GDB a
|
5718 |
|
|
list of loaded shared libraries with file names such as
|
5719 |
|
|
`c:\Windows\kernel32.dll'. On Unix hosts, there's no concept of
|
5720 |
|
|
drive letters, so the `c:\' prefix is not normally understood as
|
5721 |
|
|
indicating an absolute file name, and neither is the backslash
|
5722 |
|
|
normally considered a directory separator character. In that case,
|
5723 |
|
|
the native file system would interpret this whole absolute file
|
5724 |
|
|
name as a relative file name with no directory components. This
|
5725 |
|
|
would make it impossible to point GDB at a copy of the remote
|
5726 |
|
|
target's shared libraries on the host using `set sysroot', and
|
5727 |
|
|
impractical with `set solib-search-path'. Setting
|
5728 |
|
|
`target-file-system-kind' to `dos-based' tells GDB to interpret
|
5729 |
|
|
such file names similarly to how the target would, and to map them
|
5730 |
|
|
to file names valid on GDB's native file system semantics. The
|
5731 |
|
|
value of KIND can be `"auto"', in addition to one of the supported
|
5732 |
|
|
file system kinds. In that case, GDB tries to determine the
|
5733 |
|
|
appropriate file system variant based on the current target's
|
5734 |
|
|
operating system (*note Configuring the Current ABI: ABI.). The
|
5735 |
|
|
supported file system settings are:
|
5736 |
|
|
|
5737 |
|
|
`unix'
|
5738 |
|
|
Instruct GDB to assume the target file system is of Unix
|
5739 |
|
|
kind. Only file names starting the forward slash (`/')
|
5740 |
|
|
character are considered absolute, and the directory
|
5741 |
|
|
separator character is also the forward slash.
|
5742 |
|
|
|
5743 |
|
|
`dos-based'
|
5744 |
|
|
Instruct GDB to assume the target file system is DOS based.
|
5745 |
|
|
File names starting with either a forward slash, or a drive
|
5746 |
|
|
letter followed by a colon (e.g., `c:'), are considered
|
5747 |
|
|
absolute, and both the slash (`/') and the backslash (`\\')
|
5748 |
|
|
characters are considered directory separators.
|
5749 |
|
|
|
5750 |
|
|
`auto'
|
5751 |
|
|
Instruct GDB to use the file system kind associated with the
|
5752 |
|
|
target operating system (*note Configuring the Current ABI:
|
5753 |
|
|
ABI.). This is the default.
|
5754 |
|
|
|
5755 |
|
|
---------- Footnotes ----------
|
5756 |
|
|
|
5757 |
|
|
(1) If you want to specify a local system root using a directory
|
5758 |
|
|
that happens to be named `remote:', you need to use some equivalent
|
5759 |
|
|
variant of the name like `./remote:'.
|
5760 |
|
|
|
5761 |
|
|
|
5762 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Separate Debug Files, Next: Symbol Errors, Prev: Files, Up: GDB Files
|
5763 |
|
|
|
5764 |
|
|
18.2 Debugging Information in Separate Files
|
5765 |
|
|
============================================
|
5766 |
|
|
|
5767 |
|
|
GDB allows you to put a program's debugging information in a file
|
5768 |
|
|
separate from the executable itself, in a way that allows GDB to find
|
5769 |
|
|
and load the debugging information automatically. Since debugging
|
5770 |
|
|
information can be very large--sometimes larger than the executable
|
5771 |
|
|
code itself--some systems distribute debugging information for their
|
5772 |
|
|
executables in separate files, which users can install only when they
|
5773 |
|
|
need to debug a problem.
|
5774 |
|
|
|
5775 |
|
|
GDB supports two ways of specifying the separate debug info file:
|
5776 |
|
|
|
5777 |
|
|
* The executable contains a "debug link" that specifies the name of
|
5778 |
|
|
the separate debug info file. The separate debug file's name is
|
5779 |
|
|
usually `EXECUTABLE.debug', where EXECUTABLE is the name of the
|
5780 |
|
|
corresponding executable file without leading directories (e.g.,
|
5781 |
|
|
`ls.debug' for `/usr/bin/ls'). In addition, the debug link
|
5782 |
|
|
specifies a 32-bit "Cyclic Redundancy Check" (CRC) checksum for
|
5783 |
|
|
the debug file, which GDB uses to validate that the executable and
|
5784 |
|
|
the debug file came from the same build.
|
5785 |
|
|
|
5786 |
|
|
* The executable contains a "build ID", a unique bit string that is
|
5787 |
|
|
also present in the corresponding debug info file. (This is
|
5788 |
|
|
supported only on some operating systems, notably those which use
|
5789 |
|
|
the ELF format for binary files and the GNU Binutils.) For more
|
5790 |
|
|
details about this feature, see the description of the `--build-id'
|
5791 |
342 |
jeremybenn |
command-line option in *note Command Line Options:
|
5792 |
330 |
jeremybenn |
(ld.info)Options. The debug info file's name is not specified
|
5793 |
|
|
explicitly by the build ID, but can be computed from the build ID,
|
5794 |
|
|
see below.
|
5795 |
|
|
|
5796 |
|
|
Depending on the way the debug info file is specified, GDB uses two
|
5797 |
|
|
different methods of looking for the debug file:
|
5798 |
|
|
|
5799 |
|
|
* For the "debug link" method, GDB looks up the named file in the
|
5800 |
|
|
directory of the executable file, then in a subdirectory of that
|
5801 |
|
|
directory named `.debug', and finally under the global debug
|
5802 |
|
|
directory, in a subdirectory whose name is identical to the leading
|
5803 |
|
|
directories of the executable's absolute file name.
|
5804 |
|
|
|
5805 |
|
|
* For the "build ID" method, GDB looks in the `.build-id'
|
5806 |
|
|
subdirectory of the global debug directory for a file named
|
5807 |
|
|
`NN/NNNNNNNN.debug', where NN are the first 2 hex characters of
|
5808 |
|
|
the build ID bit string, and NNNNNNNN are the rest of the bit
|
5809 |
|
|
string. (Real build ID strings are 32 or more hex characters, not
|
5810 |
|
|
10.)
|
5811 |
|
|
|
5812 |
|
|
So, for example, suppose you ask GDB to debug `/usr/bin/ls', which
|
5813 |
|
|
has a debug link that specifies the file `ls.debug', and a build ID
|
5814 |
|
|
whose value in hex is `abcdef1234'. If the global debug directory is
|
5815 |
|
|
`/usr/lib/debug', then GDB will look for the following debug
|
5816 |
|
|
information files, in the indicated order:
|
5817 |
|
|
|
5818 |
|
|
- `/usr/lib/debug/.build-id/ab/cdef1234.debug'
|
5819 |
|
|
|
5820 |
|
|
- `/usr/bin/ls.debug'
|
5821 |
|
|
|
5822 |
|
|
- `/usr/bin/.debug/ls.debug'
|
5823 |
|
|
|
5824 |
|
|
- `/usr/lib/debug/usr/bin/ls.debug'.
|
5825 |
|
|
|
5826 |
|
|
You can set the global debugging info directory's name, and view the
|
5827 |
|
|
name GDB is currently using.
|
5828 |
|
|
|
5829 |
|
|
`set debug-file-directory DIRECTORIES'
|
5830 |
|
|
Set the directories which GDB searches for separate debugging
|
5831 |
|
|
information files to DIRECTORY. Multiple directory components can
|
5832 |
|
|
be set concatenating them by a directory separator.
|
5833 |
|
|
|
5834 |
|
|
`show debug-file-directory'
|
5835 |
|
|
Show the directories GDB searches for separate debugging
|
5836 |
|
|
information files.
|
5837 |
|
|
|
5838 |
|
|
|
5839 |
|
|
A debug link is a special section of the executable file named
|
5840 |
|
|
`.gnu_debuglink'. The section must contain:
|
5841 |
|
|
|
5842 |
|
|
* A filename, with any leading directory components removed,
|
5843 |
|
|
followed by a zero byte,
|
5844 |
|
|
|
5845 |
|
|
* zero to three bytes of padding, as needed to reach the next
|
5846 |
|
|
four-byte boundary within the section, and
|
5847 |
|
|
|
5848 |
|
|
* a four-byte CRC checksum, stored in the same endianness used for
|
5849 |
|
|
the executable file itself. The checksum is computed on the
|
5850 |
|
|
debugging information file's full contents by the function given
|
5851 |
|
|
below, passing zero as the CRC argument.
|
5852 |
|
|
|
5853 |
|
|
Any executable file format can carry a debug link, as long as it can
|
5854 |
|
|
contain a section named `.gnu_debuglink' with the contents described
|
5855 |
|
|
above.
|
5856 |
|
|
|
5857 |
|
|
The build ID is a special section in the executable file (and in
|
5858 |
|
|
other ELF binary files that GDB may consider). This section is often
|
5859 |
|
|
named `.note.gnu.build-id', but that name is not mandatory. It
|
5860 |
|
|
contains unique identification for the built files--the ID remains the
|
5861 |
|
|
same across multiple builds of the same build tree. The default
|
5862 |
|
|
algorithm SHA1 produces 160 bits (40 hexadecimal characters) of the
|
5863 |
|
|
content for the build ID string. The same section with an identical
|
5864 |
|
|
value is present in the original built binary with symbols, in its
|
5865 |
|
|
stripped variant, and in the separate debugging information file.
|
5866 |
|
|
|
5867 |
|
|
The debugging information file itself should be an ordinary
|
5868 |
|
|
executable, containing a full set of linker symbols, sections, and
|
5869 |
|
|
debugging information. The sections of the debugging information file
|
5870 |
|
|
should have the same names, addresses, and sizes as the original file,
|
5871 |
|
|
but they need not contain any data--much like a `.bss' section in an
|
5872 |
|
|
ordinary executable.
|
5873 |
|
|
|
5874 |
|
|
The GNU binary utilities (Binutils) package includes the `objcopy'
|
5875 |
|
|
utility that can produce the separated executable / debugging
|
5876 |
|
|
information file pairs using the following commands:
|
5877 |
|
|
|
5878 |
|
|
objcopy --only-keep-debug foo foo.debug
|
5879 |
|
|
strip -g foo
|
5880 |
|
|
|
5881 |
|
|
These commands remove the debugging information from the executable
|
5882 |
|
|
file `foo' and place it in the file `foo.debug'. You can use the
|
5883 |
|
|
first, second or both methods to link the two files:
|
5884 |
|
|
|
5885 |
|
|
* The debug link method needs the following additional command to
|
5886 |
|
|
also leave behind a debug link in `foo':
|
5887 |
|
|
|
5888 |
|
|
objcopy --add-gnu-debuglink=foo.debug foo
|
5889 |
|
|
|
5890 |
|
|
Ulrich Drepper's `elfutils' package, starting with version 0.53,
|
5891 |
|
|
contains a version of the `strip' command such that the command
|
5892 |
|
|
`strip foo -f foo.debug' has the same functionality as the two
|
5893 |
|
|
`objcopy' commands and the `ln -s' command above, together.
|
5894 |
|
|
|
5895 |
|
|
* Build ID gets embedded into the main executable using `ld
|
5896 |
|
|
--build-id' or the GCC counterpart `gcc -Wl,--build-id'. Build ID
|
5897 |
|
|
support plus compatibility fixes for debug files separation are
|
5898 |
|
|
present in GNU binary utilities (Binutils) package since version
|
5899 |
|
|
2.18.
|
5900 |
|
|
|
5901 |
|
|
The CRC used in `.gnu_debuglink' is the CRC-32 defined in IEEE 802.3
|
5902 |
|
|
using the polynomial:
|
5903 |
|
|
|
5904 |
|
|
x^32 + x^26 + x^23 + x^22 + x^16 + x^12 + x^11
|
5905 |
|
|
+ x^10 + x^8 + x^7 + x^5 + x^4 + x^2 + x + 1
|
5906 |
|
|
|
5907 |
|
|
The function is computed byte at a time, taking the least
|
5908 |
|
|
significant bit of each byte first. The initial pattern `0xffffffff'
|
5909 |
|
|
is used, to ensure leading zeros affect the CRC and the final result is
|
5910 |
|
|
inverted to ensure trailing zeros also affect the CRC.
|
5911 |
|
|
|
5912 |
|
|
_Note:_ This is the same CRC polynomial as used in handling the
|
5913 |
|
|
"Remote Serial Protocol" `qCRC' packet (*note GDB Remote Serial
|
5914 |
|
|
Protocol: Remote Protocol.). However in the case of the Remote Serial
|
5915 |
|
|
Protocol, the CRC is computed _most_ significant bit first, and the
|
5916 |
|
|
result is not inverted, so trailing zeros have no effect on the CRC
|
5917 |
|
|
value.
|
5918 |
|
|
|
5919 |
|
|
To complete the description, we show below the code of the function
|
5920 |
|
|
which produces the CRC used in `.gnu_debuglink'. Inverting the
|
5921 |
|
|
initially supplied `crc' argument means that an initial call to this
|
5922 |
|
|
function passing in zero will start computing the CRC using
|
5923 |
|
|
`0xffffffff'.
|
5924 |
|
|
|
5925 |
|
|
unsigned long
|
5926 |
|
|
gnu_debuglink_crc32 (unsigned long crc,
|
5927 |
|
|
unsigned char *buf, size_t len)
|
5928 |
|
|
{
|
5929 |
|
|
static const unsigned long crc32_table[256] =
|
5930 |
|
|
{
|
5931 |
|
|
0x00000000, 0x77073096, 0xee0e612c, 0x990951ba, 0x076dc419,
|
5932 |
|
|
0x706af48f, 0xe963a535, 0x9e6495a3, 0x0edb8832, 0x79dcb8a4,
|
5933 |
|
|
0xe0d5e91e, 0x97d2d988, 0x09b64c2b, 0x7eb17cbd, 0xe7b82d07,
|
5934 |
|
|
0x90bf1d91, 0x1db71064, 0x6ab020f2, 0xf3b97148, 0x84be41de,
|
5935 |
|
|
0x1adad47d, 0x6ddde4eb, 0xf4d4b551, 0x83d385c7, 0x136c9856,
|
5936 |
|
|
0x646ba8c0, 0xfd62f97a, 0x8a65c9ec, 0x14015c4f, 0x63066cd9,
|
5937 |
|
|
0xfa0f3d63, 0x8d080df5, 0x3b6e20c8, 0x4c69105e, 0xd56041e4,
|
5938 |
|
|
0xa2677172, 0x3c03e4d1, 0x4b04d447, 0xd20d85fd, 0xa50ab56b,
|
5939 |
|
|
0x35b5a8fa, 0x42b2986c, 0xdbbbc9d6, 0xacbcf940, 0x32d86ce3,
|
5940 |
|
|
0x45df5c75, 0xdcd60dcf, 0xabd13d59, 0x26d930ac, 0x51de003a,
|
5941 |
|
|
0xc8d75180, 0xbfd06116, 0x21b4f4b5, 0x56b3c423, 0xcfba9599,
|
5942 |
|
|
0xb8bda50f, 0x2802b89e, 0x5f058808, 0xc60cd9b2, 0xb10be924,
|
5943 |
|
|
0x2f6f7c87, 0x58684c11, 0xc1611dab, 0xb6662d3d, 0x76dc4190,
|
5944 |
|
|
0x01db7106, 0x98d220bc, 0xefd5102a, 0x71b18589, 0x06b6b51f,
|
5945 |
|
|
0x9fbfe4a5, 0xe8b8d433, 0x7807c9a2, 0x0f00f934, 0x9609a88e,
|
5946 |
|
|
0xe10e9818, 0x7f6a0dbb, 0x086d3d2d, 0x91646c97, 0xe6635c01,
|
5947 |
|
|
0x6b6b51f4, 0x1c6c6162, 0x856530d8, 0xf262004e, 0x6c0695ed,
|
5948 |
|
|
0x1b01a57b, 0x8208f4c1, 0xf50fc457, 0x65b0d9c6, 0x12b7e950,
|
5949 |
|
|
0x8bbeb8ea, 0xfcb9887c, 0x62dd1ddf, 0x15da2d49, 0x8cd37cf3,
|
5950 |
|
|
0xfbd44c65, 0x4db26158, 0x3ab551ce, 0xa3bc0074, 0xd4bb30e2,
|
5951 |
|
|
0x4adfa541, 0x3dd895d7, 0xa4d1c46d, 0xd3d6f4fb, 0x4369e96a,
|
5952 |
|
|
0x346ed9fc, 0xad678846, 0xda60b8d0, 0x44042d73, 0x33031de5,
|
5953 |
|
|
0xaa0a4c5f, 0xdd0d7cc9, 0x5005713c, 0x270241aa, 0xbe0b1010,
|
5954 |
|
|
0xc90c2086, 0x5768b525, 0x206f85b3, 0xb966d409, 0xce61e49f,
|
5955 |
|
|
0x5edef90e, 0x29d9c998, 0xb0d09822, 0xc7d7a8b4, 0x59b33d17,
|
5956 |
|
|
0x2eb40d81, 0xb7bd5c3b, 0xc0ba6cad, 0xedb88320, 0x9abfb3b6,
|
5957 |
|
|
0x03b6e20c, 0x74b1d29a, 0xead54739, 0x9dd277af, 0x04db2615,
|
5958 |
|
|
0x73dc1683, 0xe3630b12, 0x94643b84, 0x0d6d6a3e, 0x7a6a5aa8,
|
5959 |
|
|
0xe40ecf0b, 0x9309ff9d, 0x0a00ae27, 0x7d079eb1, 0xf00f9344,
|
5960 |
|
|
0x8708a3d2, 0x1e01f268, 0x6906c2fe, 0xf762575d, 0x806567cb,
|
5961 |
|
|
0x196c3671, 0x6e6b06e7, 0xfed41b76, 0x89d32be0, 0x10da7a5a,
|
5962 |
|
|
0x67dd4acc, 0xf9b9df6f, 0x8ebeeff9, 0x17b7be43, 0x60b08ed5,
|
5963 |
|
|
0xd6d6a3e8, 0xa1d1937e, 0x38d8c2c4, 0x4fdff252, 0xd1bb67f1,
|
5964 |
|
|
0xa6bc5767, 0x3fb506dd, 0x48b2364b, 0xd80d2bda, 0xaf0a1b4c,
|
5965 |
|
|
0x36034af6, 0x41047a60, 0xdf60efc3, 0xa867df55, 0x316e8eef,
|
5966 |
|
|
0x4669be79, 0xcb61b38c, 0xbc66831a, 0x256fd2a0, 0x5268e236,
|
5967 |
|
|
0xcc0c7795, 0xbb0b4703, 0x220216b9, 0x5505262f, 0xc5ba3bbe,
|
5968 |
|
|
0xb2bd0b28, 0x2bb45a92, 0x5cb36a04, 0xc2d7ffa7, 0xb5d0cf31,
|
5969 |
|
|
0x2cd99e8b, 0x5bdeae1d, 0x9b64c2b0, 0xec63f226, 0x756aa39c,
|
5970 |
|
|
0x026d930a, 0x9c0906a9, 0xeb0e363f, 0x72076785, 0x05005713,
|
5971 |
|
|
0x95bf4a82, 0xe2b87a14, 0x7bb12bae, 0x0cb61b38, 0x92d28e9b,
|
5972 |
|
|
0xe5d5be0d, 0x7cdcefb7, 0x0bdbdf21, 0x86d3d2d4, 0xf1d4e242,
|
5973 |
|
|
0x68ddb3f8, 0x1fda836e, 0x81be16cd, 0xf6b9265b, 0x6fb077e1,
|
5974 |
|
|
0x18b74777, 0x88085ae6, 0xff0f6a70, 0x66063bca, 0x11010b5c,
|
5975 |
|
|
0x8f659eff, 0xf862ae69, 0x616bffd3, 0x166ccf45, 0xa00ae278,
|
5976 |
|
|
0xd70dd2ee, 0x4e048354, 0x3903b3c2, 0xa7672661, 0xd06016f7,
|
5977 |
|
|
0x4969474d, 0x3e6e77db, 0xaed16a4a, 0xd9d65adc, 0x40df0b66,
|
5978 |
|
|
0x37d83bf0, 0xa9bcae53, 0xdebb9ec5, 0x47b2cf7f, 0x30b5ffe9,
|
5979 |
|
|
0xbdbdf21c, 0xcabac28a, 0x53b39330, 0x24b4a3a6, 0xbad03605,
|
5980 |
|
|
0xcdd70693, 0x54de5729, 0x23d967bf, 0xb3667a2e, 0xc4614ab8,
|
5981 |
|
|
0x5d681b02, 0x2a6f2b94, 0xb40bbe37, 0xc30c8ea1, 0x5a05df1b,
|
5982 |
|
|
0x2d02ef8d
|
5983 |
|
|
};
|
5984 |
|
|
unsigned char *end;
|
5985 |
|
|
|
5986 |
|
|
crc = ~crc & 0xffffffff;
|
5987 |
|
|
for (end = buf + len; buf < end; ++buf)
|
5988 |
|
|
crc = crc32_table[(crc ^ *buf) & 0xff] ^ (crc >> 8);
|
5989 |
|
|
return ~crc & 0xffffffff;
|
5990 |
|
|
}
|
5991 |
|
|
|
5992 |
|
|
This computation does not apply to the "build ID" method.
|
5993 |
|
|
|
5994 |
|
|
|
5995 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Symbol Errors, Next: Data Files, Prev: Separate Debug Files, Up: GDB Files
|
5996 |
|
|
|
5997 |
|
|
18.3 Errors Reading Symbol Files
|
5998 |
|
|
================================
|
5999 |
|
|
|
6000 |
|
|
While reading a symbol file, GDB occasionally encounters problems, such
|
6001 |
|
|
as symbol types it does not recognize, or known bugs in compiler
|
6002 |
|
|
output. By default, GDB does not notify you of such problems, since
|
6003 |
|
|
they are relatively common and primarily of interest to people
|
6004 |
|
|
debugging compilers. If you are interested in seeing information about
|
6005 |
|
|
ill-constructed symbol tables, you can either ask GDB to print only one
|
6006 |
|
|
message about each such type of problem, no matter how many times the
|
6007 |
|
|
problem occurs; or you can ask GDB to print more messages, to see how
|
6008 |
|
|
many times the problems occur, with the `set complaints' command (*note
|
6009 |
|
|
Optional Warnings and Messages: Messages/Warnings.).
|
6010 |
|
|
|
6011 |
|
|
The messages currently printed, and their meanings, include:
|
6012 |
|
|
|
6013 |
|
|
`inner block not inside outer block in SYMBOL'
|
6014 |
|
|
The symbol information shows where symbol scopes begin and end
|
6015 |
|
|
(such as at the start of a function or a block of statements).
|
6016 |
|
|
This error indicates that an inner scope block is not fully
|
6017 |
|
|
contained in its outer scope blocks.
|
6018 |
|
|
|
6019 |
|
|
GDB circumvents the problem by treating the inner block as if it
|
6020 |
|
|
had the same scope as the outer block. In the error message,
|
6021 |
|
|
SYMBOL may be shown as "`(don't know)'" if the outer block is not a
|
6022 |
|
|
function.
|
6023 |
|
|
|
6024 |
|
|
`block at ADDRESS out of order'
|
6025 |
|
|
The symbol information for symbol scope blocks should occur in
|
6026 |
|
|
order of increasing addresses. This error indicates that it does
|
6027 |
|
|
not do so.
|
6028 |
|
|
|
6029 |
|
|
GDB does not circumvent this problem, and has trouble locating
|
6030 |
|
|
symbols in the source file whose symbols it is reading. (You can
|
6031 |
|
|
often determine what source file is affected by specifying `set
|
6032 |
|
|
verbose on'. *Note Optional Warnings and Messages:
|
6033 |
|
|
Messages/Warnings.)
|
6034 |
|
|
|
6035 |
|
|
`bad block start address patched'
|
6036 |
|
|
The symbol information for a symbol scope block has a start address
|
6037 |
|
|
smaller than the address of the preceding source line. This is
|
6038 |
|
|
known to occur in the SunOS 4.1.1 (and earlier) C compiler.
|
6039 |
|
|
|
6040 |
|
|
GDB circumvents the problem by treating the symbol scope block as
|
6041 |
|
|
starting on the previous source line.
|
6042 |
|
|
|
6043 |
|
|
`bad string table offset in symbol N'
|
6044 |
|
|
Symbol number N contains a pointer into the string table which is
|
6045 |
|
|
larger than the size of the string table.
|
6046 |
|
|
|
6047 |
|
|
GDB circumvents the problem by considering the symbol to have the
|
6048 |
|
|
name `foo', which may cause other problems if many symbols end up
|
6049 |
|
|
with this name.
|
6050 |
|
|
|
6051 |
|
|
`unknown symbol type `0xNN''
|
6052 |
|
|
The symbol information contains new data types that GDB does not
|
6053 |
|
|
yet know how to read. `0xNN' is the symbol type of the
|
6054 |
|
|
uncomprehended information, in hexadecimal.
|
6055 |
|
|
|
6056 |
|
|
GDB circumvents the error by ignoring this symbol information.
|
6057 |
|
|
This usually allows you to debug your program, though certain
|
6058 |
|
|
symbols are not accessible. If you encounter such a problem and
|
6059 |
|
|
feel like debugging it, you can debug `gdb' with itself, breakpoint
|
6060 |
|
|
on `complain', then go up to the function `read_dbx_symtab' and
|
6061 |
|
|
examine `*bufp' to see the symbol.
|
6062 |
|
|
|
6063 |
|
|
`stub type has NULL name'
|
6064 |
|
|
GDB could not find the full definition for a struct or class.
|
6065 |
|
|
|
6066 |
|
|
`const/volatile indicator missing (ok if using g++ v1.x), got...'
|
6067 |
|
|
The symbol information for a C++ member function is missing some
|
6068 |
|
|
information that recent versions of the compiler should have
|
6069 |
|
|
output for it.
|
6070 |
|
|
|
6071 |
|
|
`info mismatch between compiler and debugger'
|
6072 |
|
|
GDB could not parse a type specification output by the compiler.
|
6073 |
|
|
|
6074 |
|
|
|
6075 |
|
|
|
6076 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Data Files, Prev: Symbol Errors, Up: GDB Files
|
6077 |
|
|
|
6078 |
|
|
18.4 GDB Data Files
|
6079 |
|
|
===================
|
6080 |
|
|
|
6081 |
|
|
GDB will sometimes read an auxiliary data file. These files are kept
|
6082 |
|
|
in a directory known as the "data directory".
|
6083 |
|
|
|
6084 |
|
|
You can set the data directory's name, and view the name GDB is
|
6085 |
|
|
currently using.
|
6086 |
|
|
|
6087 |
|
|
`set data-directory DIRECTORY'
|
6088 |
|
|
Set the directory which GDB searches for auxiliary data files to
|
6089 |
|
|
DIRECTORY.
|
6090 |
|
|
|
6091 |
|
|
`show data-directory'
|
6092 |
|
|
Show the directory GDB searches for auxiliary data files.
|
6093 |
|
|
|
6094 |
|
|
You can set the default data directory by using the configure-time
|
6095 |
|
|
`--with-gdb-datadir' option. If the data directory is inside GDB's
|
6096 |
|
|
configured binary prefix (set with `--prefix' or `--exec-prefix'), then
|
6097 |
|
|
the default data directory will be updated automatically if the
|
6098 |
|
|
installed GDB is moved to a new location.
|
6099 |
|
|
|
6100 |
|
|
|
6101 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Targets, Next: Remote Debugging, Prev: GDB Files, Up: Top
|
6102 |
|
|
|
6103 |
|
|
19 Specifying a Debugging Target
|
6104 |
|
|
********************************
|
6105 |
|
|
|
6106 |
|
|
A "target" is the execution environment occupied by your program.
|
6107 |
|
|
|
6108 |
|
|
Often, GDB runs in the same host environment as your program; in
|
6109 |
|
|
that case, the debugging target is specified as a side effect when you
|
6110 |
|
|
use the `file' or `core' commands. When you need more flexibility--for
|
6111 |
|
|
example, running GDB on a physically separate host, or controlling a
|
6112 |
|
|
standalone system over a serial port or a realtime system over a TCP/IP
|
6113 |
|
|
connection--you can use the `target' command to specify one of the
|
6114 |
|
|
target types configured for GDB (*note Commands for Managing Targets:
|
6115 |
|
|
Target Commands.).
|
6116 |
|
|
|
6117 |
|
|
It is possible to build GDB for several different "target
|
6118 |
|
|
architectures". When GDB is built like that, you can choose one of the
|
6119 |
|
|
available architectures with the `set architecture' command.
|
6120 |
|
|
|
6121 |
|
|
`set architecture ARCH'
|
6122 |
|
|
This command sets the current target architecture to ARCH. The
|
6123 |
|
|
value of ARCH can be `"auto"', in addition to one of the supported
|
6124 |
|
|
architectures.
|
6125 |
|
|
|
6126 |
|
|
`show architecture'
|
6127 |
|
|
Show the current target architecture.
|
6128 |
|
|
|
6129 |
|
|
`set processor'
|
6130 |
|
|
`processor'
|
6131 |
|
|
These are alias commands for, respectively, `set architecture' and
|
6132 |
|
|
`show architecture'.
|
6133 |
|
|
|
6134 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
6135 |
|
|
|
6136 |
|
|
* Active Targets:: Active targets
|
6137 |
|
|
* Target Commands:: Commands for managing targets
|
6138 |
|
|
* Byte Order:: Choosing target byte order
|
6139 |
|
|
|
6140 |
|
|
|
6141 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Active Targets, Next: Target Commands, Up: Targets
|
6142 |
|
|
|
6143 |
|
|
19.1 Active Targets
|
6144 |
|
|
===================
|
6145 |
|
|
|
6146 |
|
|
There are three classes of targets: processes, core files, and
|
6147 |
|
|
executable files. GDB can work concurrently on up to three active
|
6148 |
|
|
targets, one in each class. This allows you to (for example) start a
|
6149 |
|
|
process and inspect its activity without abandoning your work on a core
|
6150 |
|
|
file.
|
6151 |
|
|
|
6152 |
|
|
For example, if you execute `gdb a.out', then the executable file
|
6153 |
|
|
`a.out' is the only active target. If you designate a core file as
|
6154 |
|
|
well--presumably from a prior run that crashed and coredumped--then GDB
|
6155 |
|
|
has two active targets and uses them in tandem, looking first in the
|
6156 |
|
|
corefile target, then in the executable file, to satisfy requests for
|
6157 |
|
|
memory addresses. (Typically, these two classes of target are
|
6158 |
|
|
complementary, since core files contain only a program's read-write
|
6159 |
|
|
memory--variables and so on--plus machine status, while executable
|
6160 |
|
|
files contain only the program text and initialized data.)
|
6161 |
|
|
|
6162 |
|
|
When you type `run', your executable file becomes an active process
|
6163 |
|
|
target as well. When a process target is active, all GDB commands
|
6164 |
|
|
requesting memory addresses refer to that target; addresses in an
|
6165 |
|
|
active core file or executable file target are obscured while the
|
6166 |
|
|
process target is active.
|
6167 |
|
|
|
6168 |
|
|
Use the `core-file' and `exec-file' commands to select a new core
|
6169 |
|
|
file or executable target (*note Commands to Specify Files: Files.).
|
6170 |
|
|
To specify as a target a process that is already running, use the
|
6171 |
|
|
`attach' command (*note Debugging an Already-running Process: Attach.).
|
6172 |
|
|
|
6173 |
|
|
|
6174 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Target Commands, Next: Byte Order, Prev: Active Targets, Up: Targets
|
6175 |
|
|
|
6176 |
|
|
19.2 Commands for Managing Targets
|
6177 |
|
|
==================================
|
6178 |
|
|
|
6179 |
|
|
`target TYPE PARAMETERS'
|
6180 |
|
|
Connects the GDB host environment to a target machine or process.
|
6181 |
|
|
A target is typically a protocol for talking to debugging
|
6182 |
|
|
facilities. You use the argument TYPE to specify the type or
|
6183 |
|
|
protocol of the target machine.
|
6184 |
|
|
|
6185 |
|
|
Further PARAMETERS are interpreted by the target protocol, but
|
6186 |
|
|
typically include things like device names or host names to connect
|
6187 |
|
|
with, process numbers, and baud rates.
|
6188 |
|
|
|
6189 |
|
|
The `target' command does not repeat if you press again
|
6190 |
|
|
after executing the command.
|
6191 |
|
|
|
6192 |
|
|
`help target'
|
6193 |
|
|
Displays the names of all targets available. To display targets
|
6194 |
|
|
currently selected, use either `info target' or `info files'
|
6195 |
|
|
(*note Commands to Specify Files: Files.).
|
6196 |
|
|
|
6197 |
|
|
`help target NAME'
|
6198 |
|
|
Describe a particular target, including any parameters necessary to
|
6199 |
|
|
select it.
|
6200 |
|
|
|
6201 |
|
|
`set gnutarget ARGS'
|
6202 |
|
|
GDB uses its own library BFD to read your files. GDB knows
|
6203 |
|
|
whether it is reading an "executable", a "core", or a ".o" file;
|
6204 |
|
|
however, you can specify the file format with the `set gnutarget'
|
6205 |
|
|
command. Unlike most `target' commands, with `gnutarget' the
|
6206 |
|
|
`target' refers to a program, not a machine.
|
6207 |
|
|
|
6208 |
|
|
_Warning:_ To specify a file format with `set gnutarget', you
|
6209 |
|
|
must know the actual BFD name.
|
6210 |
|
|
|
6211 |
|
|
*Note Commands to Specify Files: Files.
|
6212 |
|
|
|
6213 |
|
|
`show gnutarget'
|
6214 |
|
|
Use the `show gnutarget' command to display what file format
|
6215 |
|
|
`gnutarget' is set to read. If you have not set `gnutarget', GDB
|
6216 |
|
|
will determine the file format for each file automatically, and
|
6217 |
|
|
`show gnutarget' displays `The current BDF target is "auto"'.
|
6218 |
|
|
|
6219 |
|
|
Here are some common targets (available, or not, depending on the GDB
|
6220 |
|
|
configuration):
|
6221 |
|
|
|
6222 |
|
|
`target exec PROGRAM'
|
6223 |
|
|
An executable file. `target exec PROGRAM' is the same as
|
6224 |
|
|
`exec-file PROGRAM'.
|
6225 |
|
|
|
6226 |
|
|
`target core FILENAME'
|
6227 |
|
|
A core dump file. `target core FILENAME' is the same as
|
6228 |
|
|
`core-file FILENAME'.
|
6229 |
|
|
|
6230 |
|
|
`target remote MEDIUM'
|
6231 |
|
|
A remote system connected to GDB via a serial line or network
|
6232 |
|
|
connection. This command tells GDB to use its own remote protocol
|
6233 |
|
|
over MEDIUM for debugging. *Note Remote Debugging::.
|
6234 |
|
|
|
6235 |
|
|
For example, if you have a board connected to `/dev/ttya' on the
|
6236 |
|
|
machine running GDB, you could say:
|
6237 |
|
|
|
6238 |
|
|
target remote /dev/ttya
|
6239 |
|
|
|
6240 |
|
|
`target remote' supports the `load' command. This is only useful
|
6241 |
|
|
if you have some other way of getting the stub to the target
|
6242 |
|
|
system, and you can put it somewhere in memory where it won't get
|
6243 |
|
|
clobbered by the download.
|
6244 |
|
|
|
6245 |
|
|
`target sim [SIMARGS] ...'
|
6246 |
|
|
Builtin CPU simulator. GDB includes simulators for most
|
6247 |
|
|
architectures. In general,
|
6248 |
|
|
target sim
|
6249 |
|
|
load
|
6250 |
|
|
run
|
6251 |
|
|
works; however, you cannot assume that a specific memory map,
|
6252 |
|
|
device drivers, or even basic I/O is available, although some
|
6253 |
|
|
simulators do provide these. For info about any
|
6254 |
|
|
processor-specific simulator details, see the appropriate section
|
6255 |
342 |
jeremybenn |
in *note Embedded Processors: Embedded Processors.
|
6256 |
330 |
jeremybenn |
|
6257 |
|
|
|
6258 |
|
|
Some configurations may include these targets as well:
|
6259 |
|
|
|
6260 |
|
|
`target nrom DEV'
|
6261 |
|
|
NetROM ROM emulator. This target only supports downloading.
|
6262 |
|
|
|
6263 |
|
|
|
6264 |
|
|
Different targets are available on different configurations of GDB;
|
6265 |
|
|
your configuration may have more or fewer targets.
|
6266 |
|
|
|
6267 |
|
|
Many remote targets require you to download the executable's code
|
6268 |
|
|
once you've successfully established a connection. You may wish to
|
6269 |
|
|
control various aspects of this process.
|
6270 |
|
|
|
6271 |
|
|
`set hash'
|
6272 |
|
|
This command controls whether a hash mark `#' is displayed while
|
6273 |
|
|
downloading a file to the remote monitor. If on, a hash mark is
|
6274 |
|
|
displayed after each S-record is successfully downloaded to the
|
6275 |
|
|
monitor.
|
6276 |
|
|
|
6277 |
|
|
`show hash'
|
6278 |
|
|
Show the current status of displaying the hash mark.
|
6279 |
|
|
|
6280 |
|
|
`set debug monitor'
|
6281 |
|
|
Enable or disable display of communications messages between GDB
|
6282 |
|
|
and the remote monitor.
|
6283 |
|
|
|
6284 |
|
|
`show debug monitor'
|
6285 |
|
|
Show the current status of displaying communications between GDB
|
6286 |
|
|
and the remote monitor.
|
6287 |
|
|
|
6288 |
|
|
`load FILENAME'
|
6289 |
|
|
Depending on what remote debugging facilities are configured into
|
6290 |
|
|
GDB, the `load' command may be available. Where it exists, it is
|
6291 |
|
|
meant to make FILENAME (an executable) available for debugging on
|
6292 |
|
|
the remote system--by downloading, or dynamic linking, for example.
|
6293 |
|
|
`load' also records the FILENAME symbol table in GDB, like the
|
6294 |
|
|
`add-symbol-file' command.
|
6295 |
|
|
|
6296 |
|
|
If your GDB does not have a `load' command, attempting to execute
|
6297 |
|
|
it gets the error message "`You can't do that when your target is
|
6298 |
|
|
...'"
|
6299 |
|
|
|
6300 |
|
|
The file is loaded at whatever address is specified in the
|
6301 |
|
|
executable. For some object file formats, you can specify the
|
6302 |
|
|
load address when you link the program; for other formats, like
|
6303 |
|
|
a.out, the object file format specifies a fixed address.
|
6304 |
|
|
|
6305 |
|
|
Depending on the remote side capabilities, GDB may be able to load
|
6306 |
|
|
programs into flash memory.
|
6307 |
|
|
|
6308 |
|
|
`load' does not repeat if you press again after using it.
|
6309 |
|
|
|
6310 |
|
|
|
6311 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Byte Order, Prev: Target Commands, Up: Targets
|
6312 |
|
|
|
6313 |
|
|
19.3 Choosing Target Byte Order
|
6314 |
|
|
===============================
|
6315 |
|
|
|
6316 |
|
|
Some types of processors, such as the MIPS, PowerPC, and Renesas SH,
|
6317 |
|
|
offer the ability to run either big-endian or little-endian byte
|
6318 |
|
|
orders. Usually the executable or symbol will include a bit to
|
6319 |
|
|
designate the endian-ness, and you will not need to worry about which
|
6320 |
|
|
to use. However, you may still find it useful to adjust GDB's idea of
|
6321 |
|
|
processor endian-ness manually.
|
6322 |
|
|
|
6323 |
|
|
`set endian big'
|
6324 |
|
|
Instruct GDB to assume the target is big-endian.
|
6325 |
|
|
|
6326 |
|
|
`set endian little'
|
6327 |
|
|
Instruct GDB to assume the target is little-endian.
|
6328 |
|
|
|
6329 |
|
|
`set endian auto'
|
6330 |
|
|
Instruct GDB to use the byte order associated with the executable.
|
6331 |
|
|
|
6332 |
|
|
`show endian'
|
6333 |
|
|
Display GDB's current idea of the target byte order.
|
6334 |
|
|
|
6335 |
|
|
|
6336 |
|
|
Note that these commands merely adjust interpretation of symbolic
|
6337 |
|
|
data on the host, and that they have absolutely no effect on the target
|
6338 |
|
|
system.
|
6339 |
|
|
|
6340 |
|
|
|
6341 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Remote Debugging, Next: Configurations, Prev: Targets, Up: Top
|
6342 |
|
|
|
6343 |
|
|
20 Debugging Remote Programs
|
6344 |
|
|
****************************
|
6345 |
|
|
|
6346 |
|
|
If you are trying to debug a program running on a machine that cannot
|
6347 |
|
|
run GDB in the usual way, it is often useful to use remote debugging.
|
6348 |
|
|
For example, you might use remote debugging on an operating system
|
6349 |
|
|
kernel, or on a small system which does not have a general purpose
|
6350 |
|
|
operating system powerful enough to run a full-featured debugger.
|
6351 |
|
|
|
6352 |
|
|
Some configurations of GDB have special serial or TCP/IP interfaces
|
6353 |
|
|
to make this work with particular debugging targets. In addition, GDB
|
6354 |
|
|
comes with a generic serial protocol (specific to GDB, but not specific
|
6355 |
|
|
to any particular target system) which you can use if you write the
|
6356 |
|
|
remote stubs--the code that runs on the remote system to communicate
|
6357 |
|
|
with GDB.
|
6358 |
|
|
|
6359 |
|
|
Other remote targets may be available in your configuration of GDB;
|
6360 |
|
|
use `help target' to list them.
|
6361 |
|
|
|
6362 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
6363 |
|
|
|
6364 |
|
|
* Connecting:: Connecting to a remote target
|
6365 |
|
|
* File Transfer:: Sending files to a remote system
|
6366 |
|
|
* Server:: Using the gdbserver program
|
6367 |
|
|
* Remote Configuration:: Remote configuration
|
6368 |
|
|
* Remote Stub:: Implementing a remote stub
|
6369 |
|
|
|
6370 |
|
|
|
6371 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Connecting, Next: File Transfer, Up: Remote Debugging
|
6372 |
|
|
|
6373 |
|
|
20.1 Connecting to a Remote Target
|
6374 |
|
|
==================================
|
6375 |
|
|
|
6376 |
|
|
On the GDB host machine, you will need an unstripped copy of your
|
6377 |
|
|
program, since GDB needs symbol and debugging information. Start up
|
6378 |
|
|
GDB as usual, using the name of the local copy of your program as the
|
6379 |
|
|
first argument.
|
6380 |
|
|
|
6381 |
|
|
GDB can communicate with the target over a serial line, or over an
|
6382 |
|
|
IP network using TCP or UDP. In each case, GDB uses the same protocol
|
6383 |
|
|
for debugging your program; only the medium carrying the debugging
|
6384 |
|
|
packets varies. The `target remote' command establishes a connection
|
6385 |
|
|
to the target. Its arguments indicate which medium to use:
|
6386 |
|
|
|
6387 |
|
|
`target remote SERIAL-DEVICE'
|
6388 |
|
|
Use SERIAL-DEVICE to communicate with the target. For example, to
|
6389 |
|
|
use a serial line connected to the device named `/dev/ttyb':
|
6390 |
|
|
|
6391 |
|
|
target remote /dev/ttyb
|
6392 |
|
|
|
6393 |
|
|
If you're using a serial line, you may want to give GDB the
|
6394 |
|
|
`--baud' option, or use the `set remotebaud' command (*note set
|
6395 |
|
|
remotebaud: Remote Configuration.) before the `target' command.
|
6396 |
|
|
|
6397 |
|
|
`target remote `HOST:PORT''
|
6398 |
|
|
`target remote `tcp:HOST:PORT''
|
6399 |
|
|
Debug using a TCP connection to PORT on HOST. The HOST may be
|
6400 |
|
|
either a host name or a numeric IP address; PORT must be a decimal
|
6401 |
|
|
number. The HOST could be the target machine itself, if it is
|
6402 |
|
|
directly connected to the net, or it might be a terminal server
|
6403 |
|
|
which in turn has a serial line to the target.
|
6404 |
|
|
|
6405 |
|
|
For example, to connect to port 2828 on a terminal server named
|
6406 |
|
|
`manyfarms':
|
6407 |
|
|
|
6408 |
|
|
target remote manyfarms:2828
|
6409 |
|
|
|
6410 |
|
|
If your remote target is actually running on the same machine as
|
6411 |
|
|
your debugger session (e.g. a simulator for your target running on
|
6412 |
|
|
the same host), you can omit the hostname. For example, to
|
6413 |
|
|
connect to port 1234 on your local machine:
|
6414 |
|
|
|
6415 |
|
|
target remote :1234
|
6416 |
|
|
Note that the colon is still required here.
|
6417 |
|
|
|
6418 |
|
|
`target remote `udp:HOST:PORT''
|
6419 |
|
|
Debug using UDP packets to PORT on HOST. For example, to connect
|
6420 |
|
|
to UDP port 2828 on a terminal server named `manyfarms':
|
6421 |
|
|
|
6422 |
|
|
target remote udp:manyfarms:2828
|
6423 |
|
|
|
6424 |
|
|
When using a UDP connection for remote debugging, you should keep
|
6425 |
|
|
in mind that the `U' stands for "Unreliable". UDP can silently
|
6426 |
|
|
drop packets on busy or unreliable networks, which will cause
|
6427 |
|
|
havoc with your debugging session.
|
6428 |
|
|
|
6429 |
|
|
`target remote | COMMAND'
|
6430 |
|
|
Run COMMAND in the background and communicate with it using a
|
6431 |
|
|
pipe. The COMMAND is a shell command, to be parsed and expanded
|
6432 |
|
|
by the system's command shell, `/bin/sh'; it should expect remote
|
6433 |
|
|
protocol packets on its standard input, and send replies on its
|
6434 |
|
|
standard output. You could use this to run a stand-alone simulator
|
6435 |
|
|
that speaks the remote debugging protocol, to make net connections
|
6436 |
|
|
using programs like `ssh', or for other similar tricks.
|
6437 |
|
|
|
6438 |
|
|
If COMMAND closes its standard output (perhaps by exiting), GDB
|
6439 |
|
|
will try to send it a `SIGTERM' signal. (If the program has
|
6440 |
|
|
already exited, this will have no effect.)
|
6441 |
|
|
|
6442 |
|
|
|
6443 |
|
|
Once the connection has been established, you can use all the usual
|
6444 |
|
|
commands to examine and change data. The remote program is already
|
6445 |
|
|
running; you can use `step' and `continue', and you do not need to use
|
6446 |
|
|
`run'.
|
6447 |
|
|
|
6448 |
|
|
Whenever GDB is waiting for the remote program, if you type the
|
6449 |
|
|
interrupt character (often `Ctrl-c'), GDB attempts to stop the program.
|
6450 |
|
|
This may or may not succeed, depending in part on the hardware and the
|
6451 |
|
|
serial drivers the remote system uses. If you type the interrupt
|
6452 |
|
|
character once again, GDB displays this prompt:
|
6453 |
|
|
|
6454 |
|
|
Interrupted while waiting for the program.
|
6455 |
|
|
Give up (and stop debugging it)? (y or n)
|
6456 |
|
|
|
6457 |
|
|
If you type `y', GDB abandons the remote debugging session. (If you
|
6458 |
|
|
decide you want to try again later, you can use `target remote' again
|
6459 |
|
|
to connect once more.) If you type `n', GDB goes back to waiting.
|
6460 |
|
|
|
6461 |
|
|
`detach'
|
6462 |
|
|
When you have finished debugging the remote program, you can use
|
6463 |
|
|
the `detach' command to release it from GDB control. Detaching
|
6464 |
|
|
from the target normally resumes its execution, but the results
|
6465 |
|
|
will depend on your particular remote stub. After the `detach'
|
6466 |
|
|
command, GDB is free to connect to another target.
|
6467 |
|
|
|
6468 |
|
|
`disconnect'
|
6469 |
|
|
The `disconnect' command behaves like `detach', except that the
|
6470 |
|
|
target is generally not resumed. It will wait for GDB (this
|
6471 |
|
|
instance or another one) to connect and continue debugging. After
|
6472 |
|
|
the `disconnect' command, GDB is again free to connect to another
|
6473 |
|
|
target.
|
6474 |
|
|
|
6475 |
|
|
`monitor CMD'
|
6476 |
|
|
This command allows you to send arbitrary commands directly to the
|
6477 |
|
|
remote monitor. Since GDB doesn't care about the commands it
|
6478 |
|
|
sends like this, this command is the way to extend GDB--you can
|
6479 |
|
|
add new commands that only the external monitor will understand
|
6480 |
|
|
and implement.
|
6481 |
|
|
|
6482 |
|
|
|
6483 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: File Transfer, Next: Server, Prev: Connecting, Up: Remote Debugging
|
6484 |
|
|
|
6485 |
|
|
20.2 Sending files to a remote system
|
6486 |
|
|
=====================================
|
6487 |
|
|
|
6488 |
|
|
Some remote targets offer the ability to transfer files over the same
|
6489 |
|
|
connection used to communicate with GDB. This is convenient for
|
6490 |
|
|
targets accessible through other means, e.g. GNU/Linux systems running
|
6491 |
|
|
`gdbserver' over a network interface. For other targets, e.g. embedded
|
6492 |
|
|
devices with only a single serial port, this may be the only way to
|
6493 |
|
|
upload or download files.
|
6494 |
|
|
|
6495 |
|
|
Not all remote targets support these commands.
|
6496 |
|
|
|
6497 |
|
|
`remote put HOSTFILE TARGETFILE'
|
6498 |
|
|
Copy file HOSTFILE from the host system (the machine running GDB)
|
6499 |
|
|
to TARGETFILE on the target system.
|
6500 |
|
|
|
6501 |
|
|
`remote get TARGETFILE HOSTFILE'
|
6502 |
|
|
Copy file TARGETFILE from the target system to HOSTFILE on the
|
6503 |
|
|
host system.
|
6504 |
|
|
|
6505 |
|
|
`remote delete TARGETFILE'
|
6506 |
|
|
Delete TARGETFILE from the target system.
|
6507 |
|
|
|
6508 |
|
|
|
6509 |
|
|
|
6510 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Server, Next: Remote Configuration, Prev: File Transfer, Up: Remote Debugging
|
6511 |
|
|
|
6512 |
|
|
20.3 Using the `gdbserver' Program
|
6513 |
|
|
==================================
|
6514 |
|
|
|
6515 |
|
|
`gdbserver' is a control program for Unix-like systems, which allows
|
6516 |
|
|
you to connect your program with a remote GDB via `target remote'--but
|
6517 |
|
|
without linking in the usual debugging stub.
|
6518 |
|
|
|
6519 |
|
|
`gdbserver' is not a complete replacement for the debugging stubs,
|
6520 |
|
|
because it requires essentially the same operating-system facilities
|
6521 |
|
|
that GDB itself does. In fact, a system that can run `gdbserver' to
|
6522 |
|
|
connect to a remote GDB could also run GDB locally! `gdbserver' is
|
6523 |
|
|
sometimes useful nevertheless, because it is a much smaller program
|
6524 |
|
|
than GDB itself. It is also easier to port than all of GDB, so you may
|
6525 |
|
|
be able to get started more quickly on a new system by using
|
6526 |
|
|
`gdbserver'. Finally, if you develop code for real-time systems, you
|
6527 |
|
|
may find that the tradeoffs involved in real-time operation make it
|
6528 |
|
|
more convenient to do as much development work as possible on another
|
6529 |
|
|
system, for example by cross-compiling. You can use `gdbserver' to
|
6530 |
|
|
make a similar choice for debugging.
|
6531 |
|
|
|
6532 |
|
|
GDB and `gdbserver' communicate via either a serial line or a TCP
|
6533 |
|
|
connection, using the standard GDB remote serial protocol.
|
6534 |
|
|
|
6535 |
|
|
_Warning:_ `gdbserver' does not have any built-in security. Do
|
6536 |
|
|
not run `gdbserver' connected to any public network; a GDB
|
6537 |
|
|
connection to `gdbserver' provides access to the target system
|
6538 |
|
|
with the same privileges as the user running `gdbserver'.
|
6539 |
|
|
|
6540 |
|
|
20.3.1 Running `gdbserver'
|
6541 |
|
|
--------------------------
|
6542 |
|
|
|
6543 |
|
|
Run `gdbserver' on the target system. You need a copy of the program
|
6544 |
|
|
you want to debug, including any libraries it requires. `gdbserver'
|
6545 |
|
|
does not need your program's symbol table, so you can strip the program
|
6546 |
|
|
if necessary to save space. GDB on the host system does all the symbol
|
6547 |
|
|
handling.
|
6548 |
|
|
|
6549 |
|
|
To use the server, you must tell it how to communicate with GDB; the
|
6550 |
|
|
name of your program; and the arguments for your program. The usual
|
6551 |
|
|
syntax is:
|
6552 |
|
|
|
6553 |
|
|
target> gdbserver COMM PROGRAM [ ARGS ... ]
|
6554 |
|
|
|
6555 |
|
|
COMM is either a device name (to use a serial line) or a TCP
|
6556 |
|
|
hostname and portnumber. For example, to debug Emacs with the argument
|
6557 |
|
|
`foo.txt' and communicate with GDB over the serial port `/dev/com1':
|
6558 |
|
|
|
6559 |
|
|
target> gdbserver /dev/com1 emacs foo.txt
|
6560 |
|
|
|
6561 |
|
|
`gdbserver' waits passively for the host GDB to communicate with it.
|
6562 |
|
|
|
6563 |
|
|
To use a TCP connection instead of a serial line:
|
6564 |
|
|
|
6565 |
|
|
target> gdbserver host:2345 emacs foo.txt
|
6566 |
|
|
|
6567 |
|
|
The only difference from the previous example is the first argument,
|
6568 |
|
|
specifying that you are communicating with the host GDB via TCP. The
|
6569 |
|
|
`host:2345' argument means that `gdbserver' is to expect a TCP
|
6570 |
|
|
connection from machine `host' to local TCP port 2345. (Currently, the
|
6571 |
|
|
`host' part is ignored.) You can choose any number you want for the
|
6572 |
|
|
port number as long as it does not conflict with any TCP ports already
|
6573 |
|
|
in use on the target system (for example, `23' is reserved for
|
6574 |
|
|
`telnet').(1) You must use the same port number with the host GDB
|
6575 |
|
|
`target remote' command.
|
6576 |
|
|
|
6577 |
|
|
20.3.1.1 Attaching to a Running Program
|
6578 |
|
|
.......................................
|
6579 |
|
|
|
6580 |
|
|
On some targets, `gdbserver' can also attach to running programs. This
|
6581 |
|
|
is accomplished via the `--attach' argument. The syntax is:
|
6582 |
|
|
|
6583 |
|
|
target> gdbserver --attach COMM PID
|
6584 |
|
|
|
6585 |
|
|
PID is the process ID of a currently running process. It isn't
|
6586 |
|
|
necessary to point `gdbserver' at a binary for the running process.
|
6587 |
|
|
|
6588 |
|
|
You can debug processes by name instead of process ID if your target
|
6589 |
|
|
has the `pidof' utility:
|
6590 |
|
|
|
6591 |
|
|
target> gdbserver --attach COMM `pidof PROGRAM`
|
6592 |
|
|
|
6593 |
|
|
In case more than one copy of PROGRAM is running, or PROGRAM has
|
6594 |
|
|
multiple threads, most versions of `pidof' support the `-s' option to
|
6595 |
|
|
only return the first process ID.
|
6596 |
|
|
|
6597 |
|
|
20.3.1.2 Multi-Process Mode for `gdbserver'
|
6598 |
|
|
...........................................
|
6599 |
|
|
|
6600 |
|
|
When you connect to `gdbserver' using `target remote', `gdbserver'
|
6601 |
|
|
debugs the specified program only once. When the program exits, or you
|
6602 |
|
|
detach from it, GDB closes the connection and `gdbserver' exits.
|
6603 |
|
|
|
6604 |
|
|
If you connect using `target extended-remote', `gdbserver' enters
|
6605 |
|
|
multi-process mode. When the debugged program exits, or you detach
|
6606 |
|
|
from it, GDB stays connected to `gdbserver' even though no program is
|
6607 |
|
|
running. The `run' and `attach' commands instruct `gdbserver' to run
|
6608 |
|
|
or attach to a new program. The `run' command uses `set remote
|
6609 |
|
|
exec-file' (*note set remote exec-file::) to select the program to run.
|
6610 |
342 |
jeremybenn |
Command line arguments are supported, except for wildcard expansion and
|
6611 |
|
|
I/O redirection (*note Arguments::).
|
6612 |
330 |
jeremybenn |
|
6613 |
|
|
To start `gdbserver' without supplying an initial command to run or
|
6614 |
|
|
process ID to attach, use the `--multi' command line option. Then you
|
6615 |
|
|
can connect using `target extended-remote' and start the program you
|
6616 |
|
|
want to debug.
|
6617 |
|
|
|
6618 |
|
|
`gdbserver' does not automatically exit in multi-process mode. You
|
6619 |
|
|
can terminate it by using `monitor exit' (*note Monitor Commands for
|
6620 |
|
|
gdbserver::).
|
6621 |
|
|
|
6622 |
|
|
20.3.1.3 Other Command-Line Arguments for `gdbserver'
|
6623 |
|
|
.....................................................
|
6624 |
|
|
|
6625 |
|
|
The `--debug' option tells `gdbserver' to display extra status
|
6626 |
|
|
information about the debugging process. The `--remote-debug' option
|
6627 |
|
|
tells `gdbserver' to display remote protocol debug output. These
|
6628 |
|
|
options are intended for `gdbserver' development and for bug reports to
|
6629 |
|
|
the developers.
|
6630 |
|
|
|
6631 |
|
|
The `--wrapper' option specifies a wrapper to launch programs for
|
6632 |
|
|
debugging. The option should be followed by the name of the wrapper,
|
6633 |
|
|
then any command-line arguments to pass to the wrapper, then `--'
|
6634 |
|
|
indicating the end of the wrapper arguments.
|
6635 |
|
|
|
6636 |
|
|
`gdbserver' runs the specified wrapper program with a combined
|
6637 |
|
|
command line including the wrapper arguments, then the name of the
|
6638 |
|
|
program to debug, then any arguments to the program. The wrapper runs
|
6639 |
|
|
until it executes your program, and then GDB gains control.
|
6640 |
|
|
|
6641 |
|
|
You can use any program that eventually calls `execve' with its
|
6642 |
|
|
arguments as a wrapper. Several standard Unix utilities do this, e.g.
|
6643 |
|
|
`env' and `nohup'. Any Unix shell script ending with `exec "$@"' will
|
6644 |
|
|
also work.
|
6645 |
|
|
|
6646 |
|
|
For example, you can use `env' to pass an environment variable to
|
6647 |
|
|
the debugged program, without setting the variable in `gdbserver''s
|
6648 |
|
|
environment:
|
6649 |
|
|
|
6650 |
|
|
$ gdbserver --wrapper env LD_PRELOAD=libtest.so -- :2222 ./testprog
|
6651 |
|
|
|
6652 |
|
|
20.3.2 Connecting to `gdbserver'
|
6653 |
|
|
--------------------------------
|
6654 |
|
|
|
6655 |
|
|
Run GDB on the host system.
|
6656 |
|
|
|
6657 |
|
|
First make sure you have the necessary symbol files. Load symbols
|
6658 |
|
|
for your application using the `file' command before you connect. Use
|
6659 |
|
|
`set sysroot' to locate target libraries (unless your GDB was compiled
|
6660 |
|
|
with the correct sysroot using `--with-sysroot').
|
6661 |
|
|
|
6662 |
|
|
The symbol file and target libraries must exactly match the
|
6663 |
|
|
executable and libraries on the target, with one exception: the files
|
6664 |
|
|
on the host system should not be stripped, even if the files on the
|
6665 |
|
|
target system are. Mismatched or missing files will lead to confusing
|
6666 |
|
|
results during debugging. On GNU/Linux targets, mismatched or missing
|
6667 |
|
|
files may also prevent `gdbserver' from debugging multi-threaded
|
6668 |
|
|
programs.
|
6669 |
|
|
|
6670 |
|
|
Connect to your target (*note Connecting to a Remote Target:
|
6671 |
|
|
Connecting.). For TCP connections, you must start up `gdbserver' prior
|
6672 |
|
|
to using the `target remote' command. Otherwise you may get an error
|
6673 |
|
|
whose text depends on the host system, but which usually looks
|
6674 |
|
|
something like `Connection refused'. Don't use the `load' command in
|
6675 |
|
|
GDB when using `gdbserver', since the program is already on the target.
|
6676 |
|
|
|
6677 |
|
|
20.3.3 Monitor Commands for `gdbserver'
|
6678 |
|
|
---------------------------------------
|
6679 |
|
|
|
6680 |
|
|
During a GDB session using `gdbserver', you can use the `monitor'
|
6681 |
|
|
command to send special requests to `gdbserver'. Here are the
|
6682 |
|
|
available commands.
|
6683 |
|
|
|
6684 |
|
|
`monitor help'
|
6685 |
|
|
List the available monitor commands.
|
6686 |
|
|
|
6687 |
|
|
`monitor set debug 0'
|
6688 |
|
|
`monitor set debug 1'
|
6689 |
|
|
Disable or enable general debugging messages.
|
6690 |
|
|
|
6691 |
|
|
`monitor set remote-debug 0'
|
6692 |
|
|
`monitor set remote-debug 1'
|
6693 |
|
|
Disable or enable specific debugging messages associated with the
|
6694 |
|
|
remote protocol (*note Remote Protocol::).
|
6695 |
|
|
|
6696 |
|
|
`monitor set libthread-db-search-path [PATH]'
|
6697 |
|
|
When this command is issued, PATH is a colon-separated list of
|
6698 |
|
|
directories to search for `libthread_db' (*note set
|
6699 |
|
|
libthread-db-search-path: Threads.). If you omit PATH,
|
6700 |
|
|
`libthread-db-search-path' will be reset to an empty list.
|
6701 |
|
|
|
6702 |
|
|
`monitor exit'
|
6703 |
|
|
Tell gdbserver to exit immediately. This command should be
|
6704 |
|
|
followed by `disconnect' to close the debugging session.
|
6705 |
|
|
`gdbserver' will detach from any attached processes and kill any
|
6706 |
|
|
processes it created. Use `monitor exit' to terminate `gdbserver'
|
6707 |
|
|
at the end of a multi-process mode debug session.
|
6708 |
|
|
|
6709 |
|
|
|
6710 |
|
|
20.3.4 Tracepoints support in `gdbserver'
|
6711 |
|
|
-----------------------------------------
|
6712 |
|
|
|
6713 |
|
|
On some targets, `gdbserver' supports tracepoints, fast tracepoints and
|
6714 |
|
|
static tracepoints.
|
6715 |
|
|
|
6716 |
|
|
For fast or static tracepoints to work, a special library called the
|
6717 |
|
|
"in-process agent" (IPA), must be loaded in the inferior process. This
|
6718 |
|
|
library is built and distributed as an integral part of `gdbserver'.
|
6719 |
|
|
In addition, support for static tracepoints requires building the
|
6720 |
|
|
in-process agent library with static tracepoints support. At present,
|
6721 |
|
|
the UST (LTTng Userspace Tracer, `http://lttng.org/ust') tracing engine
|
6722 |
|
|
is supported. This support is automatically available if UST
|
6723 |
|
|
development headers are found in the standard include path when
|
6724 |
|
|
`gdbserver' is built, or if `gdbserver' was explicitly configured using
|
6725 |
|
|
`--with-ust' to point at such headers. You can explicitly disable the
|
6726 |
|
|
support using `--with-ust=no'.
|
6727 |
|
|
|
6728 |
|
|
There are several ways to load the in-process agent in your program:
|
6729 |
|
|
|
6730 |
|
|
`Specifying it as dependency at link time'
|
6731 |
|
|
You can link your program dynamically with the in-process agent
|
6732 |
|
|
library. On most systems, this is accomplished by adding
|
6733 |
|
|
`-linproctrace' to the link command.
|
6734 |
|
|
|
6735 |
|
|
`Using the system's preloading mechanisms'
|
6736 |
|
|
You can force loading the in-process agent at startup time by using
|
6737 |
|
|
your system's support for preloading shared libraries. Many Unixes
|
6738 |
|
|
support the concept of preloading user defined libraries. In most
|
6739 |
|
|
cases, you do that by specifying `LD_PRELOAD=libinproctrace.so' in
|
6740 |
|
|
the environment. See also the description of `gdbserver''s
|
6741 |
|
|
`--wrapper' command line option.
|
6742 |
|
|
|
6743 |
|
|
`Using GDB to force loading the agent at run time'
|
6744 |
|
|
On some systems, you can force the inferior to load a shared
|
6745 |
|
|
library, by calling a dynamic loader function in the inferior that
|
6746 |
|
|
takes care of dynamically looking up and loading a shared library.
|
6747 |
|
|
On most Unix systems, the function is `dlopen'. You'll use the
|
6748 |
|
|
`call' command for that. For example:
|
6749 |
|
|
|
6750 |
|
|
(gdb) call dlopen ("libinproctrace.so", ...)
|
6751 |
|
|
|
6752 |
|
|
Note that on most Unix systems, for the `dlopen' function to be
|
6753 |
|
|
available, the program needs to be linked with `-ldl'.
|
6754 |
|
|
|
6755 |
|
|
On systems that have a userspace dynamic loader, like most Unix
|
6756 |
|
|
systems, when you connect to `gdbserver' using `target remote', you'll
|
6757 |
|
|
find that the program is stopped at the dynamic loader's entry point,
|
6758 |
|
|
and no shared library has been loaded in the program's address space
|
6759 |
|
|
yet, including the in-process agent. In that case, before being able
|
6760 |
|
|
to use any of the fast or static tracepoints features, you need to let
|
6761 |
|
|
the loader run and load the shared libraries. The simplest way to do
|
6762 |
|
|
that is to run the program to the main procedure. E.g., if debugging a
|
6763 |
|
|
C or C++ program, start `gdbserver' like so:
|
6764 |
|
|
|
6765 |
|
|
$ gdbserver :9999 myprogram
|
6766 |
|
|
|
6767 |
|
|
Start GDB and connect to `gdbserver' like so, and run to main:
|
6768 |
|
|
|
6769 |
|
|
$ gdb myprogram
|
6770 |
|
|
(gdb) target remote myhost:9999
|
6771 |
|
|
0x00007f215893ba60 in ?? () from /lib64/ld-linux-x86-64.so.2
|
6772 |
|
|
(gdb) b main
|
6773 |
|
|
(gdb) continue
|
6774 |
|
|
|
6775 |
|
|
The in-process tracing agent library should now be loaded into the
|
6776 |
|
|
process; you can confirm it with the `info sharedlibrary' command,
|
6777 |
|
|
which will list `libinproctrace.so' as loaded in the process. You are
|
6778 |
|
|
now ready to install fast tracepoints, list static tracepoint markers,
|
6779 |
|
|
probe static tracepoints markers, and start tracing.
|
6780 |
|
|
|
6781 |
|
|
---------- Footnotes ----------
|
6782 |
|
|
|
6783 |
|
|
(1) If you choose a port number that conflicts with another service,
|
6784 |
|
|
`gdbserver' prints an error message and exits.
|
6785 |
|
|
|
6786 |
|
|
|
6787 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Remote Configuration, Next: Remote Stub, Prev: Server, Up: Remote Debugging
|
6788 |
|
|
|
6789 |
|
|
20.4 Remote Configuration
|
6790 |
|
|
=========================
|
6791 |
|
|
|
6792 |
|
|
This section documents the configuration options available when
|
6793 |
|
|
debugging remote programs. For the options related to the File I/O
|
6794 |
342 |
jeremybenn |
extensions of the remote protocol, see *note system-call-allowed:
|
6795 |
330 |
jeremybenn |
system.
|
6796 |
|
|
|
6797 |
|
|
`set remoteaddresssize BITS'
|
6798 |
|
|
Set the maximum size of address in a memory packet to the specified
|
6799 |
|
|
number of bits. GDB will mask off the address bits above that
|
6800 |
|
|
number, when it passes addresses to the remote target. The
|
6801 |
|
|
default value is the number of bits in the target's address.
|
6802 |
|
|
|
6803 |
|
|
`show remoteaddresssize'
|
6804 |
|
|
Show the current value of remote address size in bits.
|
6805 |
|
|
|
6806 |
|
|
`set remotebaud N'
|
6807 |
|
|
Set the baud rate for the remote serial I/O to N baud. The value
|
6808 |
|
|
is used to set the speed of the serial port used for debugging
|
6809 |
|
|
remote targets.
|
6810 |
|
|
|
6811 |
|
|
`show remotebaud'
|
6812 |
|
|
Show the current speed of the remote connection.
|
6813 |
|
|
|
6814 |
|
|
`set remotebreak'
|
6815 |
|
|
If set to on, GDB sends a `BREAK' signal to the remote when you
|
6816 |
|
|
type `Ctrl-c' to interrupt the program running on the remote. If
|
6817 |
|
|
set to off, GDB sends the `Ctrl-C' character instead. The default
|
6818 |
|
|
is off, since most remote systems expect to see `Ctrl-C' as the
|
6819 |
|
|
interrupt signal.
|
6820 |
|
|
|
6821 |
|
|
`show remotebreak'
|
6822 |
|
|
Show whether GDB sends `BREAK' or `Ctrl-C' to interrupt the remote
|
6823 |
|
|
program.
|
6824 |
|
|
|
6825 |
|
|
`set remoteflow on'
|
6826 |
|
|
`set remoteflow off'
|
6827 |
|
|
Enable or disable hardware flow control (`RTS'/`CTS') on the
|
6828 |
|
|
serial port used to communicate to the remote target.
|
6829 |
|
|
|
6830 |
|
|
`show remoteflow'
|
6831 |
|
|
Show the current setting of hardware flow control.
|
6832 |
|
|
|
6833 |
|
|
`set remotelogbase BASE'
|
6834 |
|
|
Set the base (a.k.a. radix) of logging serial protocol
|
6835 |
|
|
communications to BASE. Supported values of BASE are: `ascii',
|
6836 |
|
|
`octal', and `hex'. The default is `ascii'.
|
6837 |
|
|
|
6838 |
|
|
`show remotelogbase'
|
6839 |
|
|
Show the current setting of the radix for logging remote serial
|
6840 |
|
|
protocol.
|
6841 |
|
|
|
6842 |
|
|
`set remotelogfile FILE'
|
6843 |
|
|
Record remote serial communications on the named FILE. The
|
6844 |
|
|
default is not to record at all.
|
6845 |
|
|
|
6846 |
|
|
`show remotelogfile.'
|
6847 |
|
|
Show the current setting of the file name on which to record the
|
6848 |
|
|
serial communications.
|
6849 |
|
|
|
6850 |
|
|
`set remotetimeout NUM'
|
6851 |
|
|
Set the timeout limit to wait for the remote target to respond to
|
6852 |
|
|
NUM seconds. The default is 2 seconds.
|
6853 |
|
|
|
6854 |
|
|
`show remotetimeout'
|
6855 |
|
|
Show the current number of seconds to wait for the remote target
|
6856 |
|
|
responses.
|
6857 |
|
|
|
6858 |
|
|
`set remote hardware-watchpoint-limit LIMIT'
|
6859 |
|
|
`set remote hardware-breakpoint-limit LIMIT'
|
6860 |
|
|
Restrict GDB to using LIMIT remote hardware breakpoint or
|
6861 |
|
|
watchpoints. A limit of -1, the default, is treated as unlimited.
|
6862 |
|
|
|
6863 |
|
|
`set remote exec-file FILENAME'
|
6864 |
|
|
`show remote exec-file'
|
6865 |
|
|
Select the file used for `run' with `target extended-remote'.
|
6866 |
|
|
This should be set to a filename valid on the target system. If
|
6867 |
|
|
it is not set, the target will use a default filename (e.g. the
|
6868 |
|
|
last program run).
|
6869 |
|
|
|
6870 |
|
|
`set remote interrupt-sequence'
|
6871 |
|
|
Allow the user to select one of `Ctrl-C', a `BREAK' or `BREAK-g'
|
6872 |
|
|
as the sequence to the remote target in order to interrupt the
|
6873 |
|
|
execution. `Ctrl-C' is a default. Some system prefers `BREAK'
|
6874 |
|
|
which is high level of serial line for some certain time. Linux
|
6875 |
|
|
kernel prefers `BREAK-g', a.k.a Magic SysRq g. It is `BREAK'
|
6876 |
|
|
signal followed by character `g'.
|
6877 |
|
|
|
6878 |
|
|
`show interrupt-sequence'
|
6879 |
|
|
Show which of `Ctrl-C', `BREAK' or `BREAK-g' is sent by GDB to
|
6880 |
|
|
interrupt the remote program. `BREAK-g' is BREAK signal followed
|
6881 |
|
|
by `g' and also known as Magic SysRq g.
|
6882 |
|
|
|
6883 |
|
|
`set remote interrupt-on-connect'
|
6884 |
|
|
Specify whether interrupt-sequence is sent to remote target when
|
6885 |
|
|
GDB connects to it. This is mostly needed when you debug Linux
|
6886 |
|
|
kernel. Linux kernel expects `BREAK' followed by `g' which is
|
6887 |
|
|
known as Magic SysRq g in order to connect GDB.
|
6888 |
|
|
|
6889 |
|
|
`show interrupt-on-connect'
|
6890 |
|
|
Show whether interrupt-sequence is sent to remote target when GDB
|
6891 |
|
|
connects to it.
|
6892 |
|
|
|
6893 |
|
|
`set tcp auto-retry on'
|
6894 |
|
|
Enable auto-retry for remote TCP connections. This is useful if
|
6895 |
|
|
the remote debugging agent is launched in parallel with GDB; there
|
6896 |
|
|
is a race condition because the agent may not become ready to
|
6897 |
|
|
accept the connection before GDB attempts to connect. When
|
6898 |
|
|
auto-retry is enabled, if the initial attempt to connect fails,
|
6899 |
|
|
GDB reattempts to establish the connection using the timeout
|
6900 |
|
|
specified by `set tcp connect-timeout'.
|
6901 |
|
|
|
6902 |
|
|
`set tcp auto-retry off'
|
6903 |
|
|
Do not auto-retry failed TCP connections.
|
6904 |
|
|
|
6905 |
|
|
`show tcp auto-retry'
|
6906 |
|
|
Show the current auto-retry setting.
|
6907 |
|
|
|
6908 |
|
|
`set tcp connect-timeout SECONDS'
|
6909 |
|
|
Set the timeout for establishing a TCP connection to the remote
|
6910 |
|
|
target to SECONDS. The timeout affects both polling to retry
|
6911 |
|
|
failed connections (enabled by `set tcp auto-retry on') and
|
6912 |
|
|
waiting for connections that are merely slow to complete, and
|
6913 |
|
|
represents an approximate cumulative value.
|
6914 |
|
|
|
6915 |
|
|
`show tcp connect-timeout'
|
6916 |
|
|
Show the current connection timeout setting.
|
6917 |
|
|
|
6918 |
|
|
The GDB remote protocol autodetects the packets supported by your
|
6919 |
|
|
debugging stub. If you need to override the autodetection, you can use
|
6920 |
|
|
these commands to enable or disable individual packets. Each packet
|
6921 |
|
|
can be set to `on' (the remote target supports this packet), `off' (the
|
6922 |
|
|
remote target does not support this packet), or `auto' (detect remote
|
6923 |
|
|
target support for this packet). They all default to `auto'. For more
|
6924 |
342 |
jeremybenn |
information about each packet, see *note Remote Protocol::.
|
6925 |
330 |
jeremybenn |
|
6926 |
|
|
During normal use, you should not have to use any of these commands.
|
6927 |
|
|
If you do, that may be a bug in your remote debugging stub, or a bug in
|
6928 |
|
|
GDB. You may want to report the problem to the GDB developers.
|
6929 |
|
|
|
6930 |
|
|
For each packet NAME, the command to enable or disable the packet is
|
6931 |
|
|
`set remote NAME-packet'. The available settings are:
|
6932 |
|
|
|
6933 |
|
|
Command Name Remote Packet Related Features
|
6934 |
|
|
`fetch-register' `p' `info registers'
|
6935 |
|
|
`set-register' `P' `set'
|
6936 |
|
|
`binary-download' `X' `load', `set'
|
6937 |
|
|
`read-aux-vector' `qXfer:auxv:read' `info auxv'
|
6938 |
|
|
`symbol-lookup' `qSymbol' Detecting
|
6939 |
|
|
multiple threads
|
6940 |
|
|
`attach' `vAttach' `attach'
|
6941 |
|
|
`verbose-resume' `vCont' Stepping or
|
6942 |
|
|
resuming multiple
|
6943 |
|
|
threads
|
6944 |
|
|
`run' `vRun' `run'
|
6945 |
|
|
`software-breakpoint'`Z0' `break'
|
6946 |
|
|
`hardware-breakpoint'`Z1' `hbreak'
|
6947 |
|
|
`write-watchpoint' `Z2' `watch'
|
6948 |
|
|
`read-watchpoint' `Z3' `rwatch'
|
6949 |
|
|
`access-watchpoint' `Z4' `awatch'
|
6950 |
|
|
`target-features' `qXfer:features:read' `set architecture'
|
6951 |
|
|
`library-info' `qXfer:libraries:read' `info
|
6952 |
|
|
sharedlibrary'
|
6953 |
|
|
`memory-map' `qXfer:memory-map:read' `info mem'
|
6954 |
|
|
`read-sdata-object' `qXfer:sdata:read' `print $_sdata'
|
6955 |
|
|
`read-spu-object' `qXfer:spu:read' `info spu'
|
6956 |
|
|
`write-spu-object' `qXfer:spu:write' `info spu'
|
6957 |
|
|
`read-siginfo-object'`qXfer:siginfo:read' `print $_siginfo'
|
6958 |
|
|
`write-siginfo-object'`qXfer:siginfo:write' `set $_siginfo'
|
6959 |
|
|
`threads' `qXfer:threads:read' `info threads'
|
6960 |
|
|
`get-thread-local- `qGetTLSAddr' Displaying
|
6961 |
|
|
storage-address' `__thread'
|
6962 |
|
|
variables
|
6963 |
|
|
`get-thread-information-block-address'`qGetTIBAddr' Display
|
6964 |
|
|
MS-Windows Thread
|
6965 |
|
|
Information Block.
|
6966 |
|
|
`search-memory' `qSearch:memory' `find'
|
6967 |
|
|
`supported-packets' `qSupported' Remote
|
6968 |
|
|
communications
|
6969 |
|
|
parameters
|
6970 |
|
|
`pass-signals' `QPassSignals' `handle SIGNAL'
|
6971 |
|
|
`hostio-close-packet'`vFile:close' `remote get',
|
6972 |
|
|
`remote put'
|
6973 |
|
|
`hostio-open-packet' `vFile:open' `remote get',
|
6974 |
|
|
`remote put'
|
6975 |
|
|
`hostio-pread-packet'`vFile:pread' `remote get',
|
6976 |
|
|
`remote put'
|
6977 |
|
|
`hostio-pwrite-packet'`vFile:pwrite' `remote get',
|
6978 |
|
|
`remote put'
|
6979 |
|
|
`hostio-unlink-packet'`vFile:unlink' `remote delete'
|
6980 |
|
|
`noack-packet' `QStartNoAckMode' Packet
|
6981 |
|
|
acknowledgment
|
6982 |
|
|
`osdata' `qXfer:osdata:read' `info os'
|
6983 |
|
|
`query-attached' `qAttached' Querying remote
|
6984 |
|
|
process attach
|
6985 |
|
|
state.
|
6986 |
|
|
|
6987 |
|
|
|
6988 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Remote Stub, Prev: Remote Configuration, Up: Remote Debugging
|
6989 |
|
|
|
6990 |
|
|
20.5 Implementing a Remote Stub
|
6991 |
|
|
===============================
|
6992 |
|
|
|
6993 |
|
|
The stub files provided with GDB implement the target side of the
|
6994 |
|
|
communication protocol, and the GDB side is implemented in the GDB
|
6995 |
|
|
source file `remote.c'. Normally, you can simply allow these
|
6996 |
|
|
subroutines to communicate, and ignore the details. (If you're
|
6997 |
|
|
implementing your own stub file, you can still ignore the details: start
|
6998 |
|
|
with one of the existing stub files. `sparc-stub.c' is the best
|
6999 |
|
|
organized, and therefore the easiest to read.)
|
7000 |
|
|
|
7001 |
|
|
To debug a program running on another machine (the debugging
|
7002 |
|
|
"target" machine), you must first arrange for all the usual
|
7003 |
|
|
prerequisites for the program to run by itself. For example, for a C
|
7004 |
|
|
program, you need:
|
7005 |
|
|
|
7006 |
|
|
1. A startup routine to set up the C runtime environment; these
|
7007 |
|
|
usually have a name like `crt0'. The startup routine may be
|
7008 |
|
|
supplied by your hardware supplier, or you may have to write your
|
7009 |
|
|
own.
|
7010 |
|
|
|
7011 |
|
|
2. A C subroutine library to support your program's subroutine calls,
|
7012 |
|
|
notably managing input and output.
|
7013 |
|
|
|
7014 |
|
|
3. A way of getting your program to the other machine--for example, a
|
7015 |
|
|
download program. These are often supplied by the hardware
|
7016 |
|
|
manufacturer, but you may have to write your own from hardware
|
7017 |
|
|
documentation.
|
7018 |
|
|
|
7019 |
|
|
The next step is to arrange for your program to use a serial port to
|
7020 |
|
|
communicate with the machine where GDB is running (the "host" machine).
|
7021 |
|
|
In general terms, the scheme looks like this:
|
7022 |
|
|
|
7023 |
|
|
_On the host,_
|
7024 |
|
|
GDB already understands how to use this protocol; when everything
|
7025 |
|
|
else is set up, you can simply use the `target remote' command
|
7026 |
|
|
(*note Specifying a Debugging Target: Targets.).
|
7027 |
|
|
|
7028 |
|
|
_On the target,_
|
7029 |
|
|
you must link with your program a few special-purpose subroutines
|
7030 |
|
|
that implement the GDB remote serial protocol. The file
|
7031 |
|
|
containing these subroutines is called a "debugging stub".
|
7032 |
|
|
|
7033 |
|
|
On certain remote targets, you can use an auxiliary program
|
7034 |
|
|
`gdbserver' instead of linking a stub into your program. *Note
|
7035 |
|
|
Using the `gdbserver' Program: Server, for details.
|
7036 |
|
|
|
7037 |
|
|
The debugging stub is specific to the architecture of the remote
|
7038 |
|
|
machine; for example, use `sparc-stub.c' to debug programs on SPARC
|
7039 |
|
|
boards.
|
7040 |
|
|
|
7041 |
|
|
These working remote stubs are distributed with GDB:
|
7042 |
|
|
|
7043 |
|
|
`i386-stub.c'
|
7044 |
|
|
For Intel 386 and compatible architectures.
|
7045 |
|
|
|
7046 |
|
|
`m68k-stub.c'
|
7047 |
|
|
For Motorola 680x0 architectures.
|
7048 |
|
|
|
7049 |
|
|
`sh-stub.c'
|
7050 |
|
|
For Renesas SH architectures.
|
7051 |
|
|
|
7052 |
|
|
`sparc-stub.c'
|
7053 |
|
|
For SPARC architectures.
|
7054 |
|
|
|
7055 |
|
|
`sparcl-stub.c'
|
7056 |
|
|
For Fujitsu SPARCLITE architectures.
|
7057 |
|
|
|
7058 |
|
|
|
7059 |
|
|
The `README' file in the GDB distribution may list other recently
|
7060 |
|
|
added stubs.
|
7061 |
|
|
|
7062 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
7063 |
|
|
|
7064 |
|
|
* Stub Contents:: What the stub can do for you
|
7065 |
|
|
* Bootstrapping:: What you must do for the stub
|
7066 |
|
|
* Debug Session:: Putting it all together
|
7067 |
|
|
|
7068 |
|
|
|
7069 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Stub Contents, Next: Bootstrapping, Up: Remote Stub
|
7070 |
|
|
|
7071 |
|
|
20.5.1 What the Stub Can Do for You
|
7072 |
|
|
-----------------------------------
|
7073 |
|
|
|
7074 |
|
|
The debugging stub for your architecture supplies these three
|
7075 |
|
|
subroutines:
|
7076 |
|
|
|
7077 |
|
|
`set_debug_traps'
|
7078 |
|
|
This routine arranges for `handle_exception' to run when your
|
7079 |
|
|
program stops. You must call this subroutine explicitly near the
|
7080 |
|
|
beginning of your program.
|
7081 |
|
|
|
7082 |
|
|
`handle_exception'
|
7083 |
|
|
This is the central workhorse, but your program never calls it
|
7084 |
|
|
explicitly--the setup code arranges for `handle_exception' to run
|
7085 |
|
|
when a trap is triggered.
|
7086 |
|
|
|
7087 |
|
|
`handle_exception' takes control when your program stops during
|
7088 |
|
|
execution (for example, on a breakpoint), and mediates
|
7089 |
|
|
communications with GDB on the host machine. This is where the
|
7090 |
|
|
communications protocol is implemented; `handle_exception' acts as
|
7091 |
|
|
the GDB representative on the target machine. It begins by
|
7092 |
|
|
sending summary information on the state of your program, then
|
7093 |
|
|
continues to execute, retrieving and transmitting any information
|
7094 |
|
|
GDB needs, until you execute a GDB command that makes your program
|
7095 |
|
|
resume; at that point, `handle_exception' returns control to your
|
7096 |
|
|
own code on the target machine.
|
7097 |
|
|
|
7098 |
|
|
`breakpoint'
|
7099 |
|
|
Use this auxiliary subroutine to make your program contain a
|
7100 |
|
|
breakpoint. Depending on the particular situation, this may be
|
7101 |
|
|
the only way for GDB to get control. For instance, if your target
|
7102 |
|
|
machine has some sort of interrupt button, you won't need to call
|
7103 |
|
|
this; pressing the interrupt button transfers control to
|
7104 |
|
|
`handle_exception'--in effect, to GDB. On some machines, simply
|
7105 |
|
|
receiving characters on the serial port may also trigger a trap;
|
7106 |
|
|
again, in that situation, you don't need to call `breakpoint' from
|
7107 |
|
|
your own program--simply running `target remote' from the host GDB
|
7108 |
|
|
session gets control.
|
7109 |
|
|
|
7110 |
|
|
Call `breakpoint' if none of these is true, or if you simply want
|
7111 |
|
|
to make certain your program stops at a predetermined point for the
|
7112 |
|
|
start of your debugging session.
|
7113 |
|
|
|
7114 |
|
|
|
7115 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Bootstrapping, Next: Debug Session, Prev: Stub Contents, Up: Remote Stub
|
7116 |
|
|
|
7117 |
|
|
20.5.2 What You Must Do for the Stub
|
7118 |
|
|
------------------------------------
|
7119 |
|
|
|
7120 |
|
|
The debugging stubs that come with GDB are set up for a particular chip
|
7121 |
|
|
architecture, but they have no information about the rest of your
|
7122 |
|
|
debugging target machine.
|
7123 |
|
|
|
7124 |
|
|
First of all you need to tell the stub how to communicate with the
|
7125 |
|
|
serial port.
|
7126 |
|
|
|
7127 |
|
|
`int getDebugChar()'
|
7128 |
|
|
Write this subroutine to read a single character from the serial
|
7129 |
|
|
port. It may be identical to `getchar' for your target system; a
|
7130 |
|
|
different name is used to allow you to distinguish the two if you
|
7131 |
|
|
wish.
|
7132 |
|
|
|
7133 |
|
|
`void putDebugChar(int)'
|
7134 |
|
|
Write this subroutine to write a single character to the serial
|
7135 |
|
|
port. It may be identical to `putchar' for your target system; a
|
7136 |
|
|
different name is used to allow you to distinguish the two if you
|
7137 |
|
|
wish.
|
7138 |
|
|
|
7139 |
|
|
If you want GDB to be able to stop your program while it is running,
|
7140 |
|
|
you need to use an interrupt-driven serial driver, and arrange for it
|
7141 |
|
|
to stop when it receives a `^C' (`\003', the control-C character).
|
7142 |
|
|
That is the character which GDB uses to tell the remote system to stop.
|
7143 |
|
|
|
7144 |
|
|
Getting the debugging target to return the proper status to GDB
|
7145 |
|
|
probably requires changes to the standard stub; one quick and dirty way
|
7146 |
|
|
is to just execute a breakpoint instruction (the "dirty" part is that
|
7147 |
|
|
GDB reports a `SIGTRAP' instead of a `SIGINT').
|
7148 |
|
|
|
7149 |
|
|
Other routines you need to supply are:
|
7150 |
|
|
|
7151 |
|
|
`void exceptionHandler (int EXCEPTION_NUMBER, void *EXCEPTION_ADDRESS)'
|
7152 |
|
|
Write this function to install EXCEPTION_ADDRESS in the exception
|
7153 |
|
|
handling tables. You need to do this because the stub does not
|
7154 |
|
|
have any way of knowing what the exception handling tables on your
|
7155 |
|
|
target system are like (for example, the processor's table might
|
7156 |
|
|
be in ROM, containing entries which point to a table in RAM).
|
7157 |
|
|
EXCEPTION_NUMBER is the exception number which should be changed;
|
7158 |
|
|
its meaning is architecture-dependent (for example, different
|
7159 |
|
|
numbers might represent divide by zero, misaligned access, etc).
|
7160 |
|
|
When this exception occurs, control should be transferred directly
|
7161 |
|
|
to EXCEPTION_ADDRESS, and the processor state (stack, registers,
|
7162 |
|
|
and so on) should be just as it is when a processor exception
|
7163 |
|
|
occurs. So if you want to use a jump instruction to reach
|
7164 |
|
|
EXCEPTION_ADDRESS, it should be a simple jump, not a jump to
|
7165 |
|
|
subroutine.
|
7166 |
|
|
|
7167 |
|
|
For the 386, EXCEPTION_ADDRESS should be installed as an interrupt
|
7168 |
|
|
gate so that interrupts are masked while the handler runs. The
|
7169 |
|
|
gate should be at privilege level 0 (the most privileged level).
|
7170 |
|
|
The SPARC and 68k stubs are able to mask interrupts themselves
|
7171 |
|
|
without help from `exceptionHandler'.
|
7172 |
|
|
|
7173 |
|
|
`void flush_i_cache()'
|
7174 |
|
|
On SPARC and SPARCLITE only, write this subroutine to flush the
|
7175 |
|
|
instruction cache, if any, on your target machine. If there is no
|
7176 |
|
|
instruction cache, this subroutine may be a no-op.
|
7177 |
|
|
|
7178 |
|
|
On target machines that have instruction caches, GDB requires this
|
7179 |
|
|
function to make certain that the state of your program is stable.
|
7180 |
|
|
|
7181 |
|
|
You must also make sure this library routine is available:
|
7182 |
|
|
|
7183 |
|
|
`void *memset(void *, int, int)'
|
7184 |
|
|
This is the standard library function `memset' that sets an area of
|
7185 |
|
|
memory to a known value. If you have one of the free versions of
|
7186 |
|
|
`libc.a', `memset' can be found there; otherwise, you must either
|
7187 |
|
|
obtain it from your hardware manufacturer, or write your own.
|
7188 |
|
|
|
7189 |
|
|
If you do not use the GNU C compiler, you may need other standard
|
7190 |
|
|
library subroutines as well; this varies from one stub to another, but
|
7191 |
|
|
in general the stubs are likely to use any of the common library
|
7192 |
|
|
subroutines which `GCC' generates as inline code.
|
7193 |
|
|
|
7194 |
|
|
|
7195 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Debug Session, Prev: Bootstrapping, Up: Remote Stub
|
7196 |
|
|
|
7197 |
|
|
20.5.3 Putting it All Together
|
7198 |
|
|
------------------------------
|
7199 |
|
|
|
7200 |
|
|
In summary, when your program is ready to debug, you must follow these
|
7201 |
|
|
steps.
|
7202 |
|
|
|
7203 |
|
|
1. Make sure you have defined the supporting low-level routines
|
7204 |
|
|
(*note What You Must Do for the Stub: Bootstrapping.):
|
7205 |
|
|
`getDebugChar', `putDebugChar',
|
7206 |
|
|
`flush_i_cache', `memset', `exceptionHandler'.
|
7207 |
|
|
|
7208 |
|
|
2. Insert these lines near the top of your program:
|
7209 |
|
|
|
7210 |
|
|
set_debug_traps();
|
7211 |
|
|
breakpoint();
|
7212 |
|
|
|
7213 |
|
|
3. For the 680x0 stub only, you need to provide a variable called
|
7214 |
|
|
`exceptionHook'. Normally you just use:
|
7215 |
|
|
|
7216 |
|
|
void (*exceptionHook)() = 0;
|
7217 |
|
|
|
7218 |
|
|
but if before calling `set_debug_traps', you set it to point to a
|
7219 |
|
|
function in your program, that function is called when `GDB'
|
7220 |
|
|
continues after stopping on a trap (for example, bus error). The
|
7221 |
|
|
function indicated by `exceptionHook' is called with one
|
7222 |
|
|
parameter: an `int' which is the exception number.
|
7223 |
|
|
|
7224 |
|
|
4. Compile and link together: your program, the GDB debugging stub for
|
7225 |
|
|
your target architecture, and the supporting subroutines.
|
7226 |
|
|
|
7227 |
|
|
5. Make sure you have a serial connection between your target machine
|
7228 |
|
|
and the GDB host, and identify the serial port on the host.
|
7229 |
|
|
|
7230 |
|
|
6. Download your program to your target machine (or get it there by
|
7231 |
|
|
whatever means the manufacturer provides), and start it.
|
7232 |
|
|
|
7233 |
|
|
7. Start GDB on the host, and connect to the target (*note Connecting
|
7234 |
|
|
to a Remote Target: Connecting.).
|
7235 |
|
|
|
7236 |
|
|
|
7237 |
|
|
|
7238 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Configurations, Next: Controlling GDB, Prev: Remote Debugging, Up: Top
|
7239 |
|
|
|
7240 |
|
|
21 Configuration-Specific Information
|
7241 |
|
|
*************************************
|
7242 |
|
|
|
7243 |
|
|
While nearly all GDB commands are available for all native and cross
|
7244 |
|
|
versions of the debugger, there are some exceptions. This chapter
|
7245 |
|
|
describes things that are only available in certain configurations.
|
7246 |
|
|
|
7247 |
|
|
There are three major categories of configurations: native
|
7248 |
|
|
configurations, where the host and target are the same, embedded
|
7249 |
|
|
operating system configurations, which are usually the same for several
|
7250 |
|
|
different processor architectures, and bare embedded processors, which
|
7251 |
|
|
are quite different from each other.
|
7252 |
|
|
|
7253 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
7254 |
|
|
|
7255 |
|
|
* Native::
|
7256 |
|
|
* Embedded OS::
|
7257 |
|
|
* Embedded Processors::
|
7258 |
|
|
* Architectures::
|
7259 |
|
|
|
7260 |
|
|
|
7261 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: Native, Next: Embedded OS, Up: Configurations
|
7262 |
|
|
|
7263 |
|
|
21.1 Native
|
7264 |
|
|
===========
|
7265 |
|
|
|
7266 |
|
|
This section describes details specific to particular native
|
7267 |
|
|
configurations.
|
7268 |
|
|
|
7269 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
7270 |
|
|
|
7271 |
|
|
* HP-UX:: HP-UX
|
7272 |
|
|
* BSD libkvm Interface:: Debugging BSD kernel memory images
|
7273 |
|
|
* SVR4 Process Information:: SVR4 process information
|
7274 |
|
|
* DJGPP Native:: Features specific to the DJGPP port
|
7275 |
|
|
* Cygwin Native:: Features specific to the Cygwin port
|
7276 |
|
|
* Hurd Native:: Features specific to GNU Hurd
|
7277 |
|
|
* Neutrino:: Features specific to QNX Neutrino
|
7278 |
|
|
* Darwin:: Features specific to Darwin
|
7279 |
|
|
|
7280 |
|
|
|
7281 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: HP-UX, Next: BSD libkvm Interface, Up: Native
|
7282 |
|
|
|
7283 |
|
|
21.1.1 HP-UX
|
7284 |
|
|
------------
|
7285 |
|
|
|
7286 |
|
|
On HP-UX systems, if you refer to a function or variable name that
|
7287 |
|
|
begins with a dollar sign, GDB searches for a user or system name
|
7288 |
|
|
first, before it searches for a convenience variable.
|
7289 |
|
|
|
7290 |
|
|
|
7291 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: BSD libkvm Interface, Next: SVR4 Process Information, Prev: HP-UX, Up: Native
|
7292 |
|
|
|
7293 |
|
|
21.1.2 BSD libkvm Interface
|
7294 |
|
|
---------------------------
|
7295 |
|
|
|
7296 |
|
|
BSD-derived systems (FreeBSD/NetBSD/OpenBSD) have a kernel memory
|
7297 |
|
|
interface that provides a uniform interface for accessing kernel virtual
|
7298 |
|
|
memory images, including live systems and crash dumps. GDB uses this
|
7299 |
|
|
interface to allow you to debug live kernels and kernel crash dumps on
|
7300 |
|
|
many native BSD configurations. This is implemented as a special `kvm'
|
7301 |
|
|
debugging target. For debugging a live system, load the currently
|
7302 |
|
|
running kernel into GDB and connect to the `kvm' target:
|
7303 |
|
|
|
7304 |
|
|
(gdb) target kvm
|
7305 |
|
|
|
7306 |
|
|
For debugging crash dumps, provide the file name of the crash dump
|
7307 |
|
|
as an argument:
|
7308 |
|
|
|
7309 |
|
|
(gdb) target kvm /var/crash/bsd.0
|
7310 |
|
|
|
7311 |
|
|
Once connected to the `kvm' target, the following commands are
|
7312 |
|
|
available:
|
7313 |
|
|
|
7314 |
|
|
`kvm pcb'
|
7315 |
|
|
Set current context from the "Process Control Block" (PCB) address.
|
7316 |
|
|
|
7317 |
|
|
`kvm proc'
|
7318 |
|
|
Set current context from proc address. This command isn't
|
7319 |
|
|
available on modern FreeBSD systems.
|
7320 |
|
|
|
7321 |
|
|
|
7322 |
|
|
File: gdb.info, Node: SVR4 Process Information, Next: DJGPP Native, Prev: BSD libkvm Interface, Up: Native
|
7323 |
|
|
|
7324 |
|
|
21.1.3 SVR4 Process Information
|
7325 |
|
|
-------------------------------
|
7326 |
|
|
|
7327 |
|
|
Many versions of SVR4 and compatible systems provide a facility called
|
7328 |
|
|
`/proc' that can be used to examine the image of a running process
|
7329 |
|
|
using file-system subroutines. If GDB is configured for an operating
|
7330 |
|
|
system with this facility, the command `info proc' is available to
|
7331 |
|
|
report information about the process running your program, or about any
|
7332 |
|
|
process running on your system. `info proc' works only on SVR4 systems
|
7333 |
|
|
that include the `procfs' code. This includes, as of this writing,
|
7334 |
|
|
GNU/Linux, OSF/1 (Digital Unix), Solaris, Irix, and Unixware, but not
|
7335 |
|
|
HP-UX, for example.
|
7336 |
|
|
|
7337 |
|
|
`info proc'
|
7338 |
|
|
`info proc PROCESS-ID'
|
7339 |
|
|
Summarize available information about any running process. If a
|
7340 |
|
|
process ID is specified by PROCESS-ID, display information about
|
7341 |
|
|
that process; otherwise display information about the program being
|
7342 |
|
|
debugged. The summary includes the debugged process ID, the
|
7343 |
|
|
command line used to invoke it, its current working directory, and
|
7344 |
|
|
its executable file's absolute file name.
|
7345 |
|
|
|
7346 |
|
|
On some systems, PROCESS-ID can be of the form `[PID]/TID' which
|
7347 |
|
|
specifies a certain thread ID within a process. If the optional
|
7348 |
|
|
PID part is missing, it means a thread from the process being
|
7349 |
|
|
debugged (the leading `/' still needs to be present, or else GDB
|
7350 |
|
|
will interpret the number as a process ID rather than a thread ID).
|
7351 |
|
|
|
7352 |
|
|
`info proc mappings'
|
7353 |
|
|
Report the memory address space ranges accessible in the program,
|
7354 |
|
|
with information on whether the process has read, write, or
|
7355 |
|
|
execute access rights to each range. On GNU/Linux systems, each
|
7356 |
|
|
memory range includes the object file which is mapped to that
|
7357 |
|
|
range, instead of the memory access rights to that range.
|
7358 |
|
|
|
7359 |
|
|
`info proc stat'
|
7360 |
|
|
`info proc status'
|
7361 |
|
|
These subcommands are specific to GNU/Linux systems. They show
|
7362 |
|
|
the process-related information, including the user ID and group
|
7363 |
|
|
ID; how many threads are there in the process; its virtual memory
|
7364 |
|
|
usage; the signals that are pending, blocked, and ignored; its
|
7365 |
|
|
TTY; its consumption of system and user time; its stack size; its
|
7366 |
|
|
`nice' value; etc. For more information, see the `proc' man page
|
7367 |
|
|
(type `man 5 proc' from your shell prompt).
|
7368 |
|
|
|
7369 |
|
|
`info proc all'
|
7370 |
|
|
Show all the information about the process described under all of
|
7371 |
|
|
the above `info proc' subcommands.
|
7372 |
|
|
|
7373 |
|
|
`set procfs-trace'
|
7374 |
|
|
This command enables and disables tracing of `procfs' API calls.
|
7375 |
|
|
|
7376 |
|
|
`show procfs-trace'
|
7377 |
|
|
Show the current state of `procfs' API call tracing.
|
7378 |
|
|
|
7379 |
|
|
`set procfs-file FILE'
|
7380 |
|
|
Tell GDB to write `procfs' API trace to the named FILE. GDB
|
7381 |
|
|
appends the trace info to the previous contents of the file. The
|
7382 |
|
|
default is to display the trace on the standard output.
|
7383 |
|
|
|
7384 |
|
|
`show procfs-file'
|
7385 |
|
|
Show the file to which `procfs' API trace is written.
|
7386 |
|
|
|
7387 |
|
|
`proc-trace-entry'
|
7388 |
|
|
`proc-trace-exit'
|
7389 |
|
|
`proc-untrace-entry'
|
7390 |
|
|
`proc-untrace-exit'
|
7391 |
|
|
These commands enable and disable tracing of entries into and exits
|
7392 |
|
|
from the `syscall' interface.
|
7393 |
|
|
|
7394 |
|
|
`info pidlist'
|
7395 |
|
|
For QNX Neutrino only, this command displays the list of all the
|
7396 |
|
|
processes and all the threads within each process.
|
7397 |
|
|
|
7398 |
|
|
`info meminfo'
|
7399 |
|
|
For QNX Neutrino only, this command displays the list of all
|
7400 |
|
|
mapinfos.
|
7401 |
|
|
|